Home

Garmin GNS 430(A) GPS Receiver User Manual

1. 11 1 11 1 INTRODUCTION 11 1 11 2 TERRAIN Page 11 3 11 3 TERRAIN Alerts 11 4 11 4 Database Information for TERRAIN 11 9 SECTION 12 ADDITIONAL FEATURES 12 1 12 1 Traffic Information Service TIS 12 1 12 2 GTS 8XX Traffic Systems 12 11 12 3 Weather Data Link Interface 12 18 SECTION 13 FAULT DETECTION amp EXCLUSION 13 1 13 1 Detection and Exclusion 13 1 13 2 Pre Departure Verification of FDE 13 2 SECTION 14 MESSAGES ABBREVIATIONS amp NAV TERMS 14 1 14 1 Messages 14 1 14 2 Abbreviations 14 9 14 3 Navigation Terms 14 12 Appendix A Data Card Use A 1 Appendix B Specifications B 1 Appendix C Troubleshooting Q amp A C 1 GNS 430 A Pilot s Guide and Reference 190 00140 00 Rev P iv WARNINGS CAU
2. 7 17 SECTION 8 NRST PAGES 8 1 8 1 NRST Page Group 8 1 8 2 Nearest Airport Page 8 4 8 3 Nearest Intersection Page 8 6 8 4 Nearest NDB Page 8 6 8 5 Nearest VOR Page 8 7 8 6 Nearest User Waypoint Page 8 8 8 7 Nearest Center ARTCC Page 8 9 8 8 Nearest Flight Service Station FSS Page 8 10 8 9 Nearest Airspace Page 8 11 SECTION 9 VLOC RECEIVER 9 1 9 1 VLOC VOR LOCALIZER GLIDESLOPE Receiver Operations 9 1 SECTION 10 AUX PAGES 10 1 10 1 AUX Page Group 10 1 10 2 Flight Planning Page 10 2 10 3 Utility Page 10 12 10 4 Setup 1 Page 10 20 10 5 Setup 2 Page 10 27 SECTION 11 TERRAIN
3. 4 1 SECTION 5 FLIGHT PLANS 5 1 5 1 Flight Plan Catalog Page 5 1 5 2 Active Flight Plan Page 5 8 SECTION 6 PROCEDURES 6 1 6 1 Approaches Departures and Arrivals 6 1 6 2 Non Precision Approach Operations 6 3 6 3 ILS Approaches 6 26 6 4 Points to Remember for All Approaches 6 32 SECTION 7 WPT PAGES 7 1 7 1 WPT Page Group 7 1 7 2 Airport Location Page 7 4 7 3 Airport Runway Page 7 5 7 4 Airport Frequency Page 7 6 7 5 Airport Approach Page 7 8 7 6 Airport Arrival Page 7 11 7 7 Airport Departure Page 7 13 7 8 Intersection Page 7 14 7 9 NDB Page 7 15 7 10 VOR Page 7 15 7 11 User Waypoint Page
4. Figure 5 3 Flight Plan Catalog Page Menu 3 Turn the large right knob to highlight Create New Flight Plan and press the ENT Key GNS 430 A Pilot s Guide and Reference 190 00140 00 Rev P 5 2 SECTION 5 FLIGHT PLANS 4 A blank Flight Plan Page appears for the first empty storage location Figure 5 4 Use the small and large right knobs to enter the identifier of the departure waypoint and press the ENT Key Figure 5 4 Flight Plan Page 5 Repeat step 4 above to enter the identifier for each additional flight plan waypoint 6 Once all waypoints have been entered press the small right knob to return to the Flight Plan Catalog Page Flight Plan Editing To add a waypoint to an existing flight plan 1 Press the FPL Key and turn the small right knob to display the Flight Plan Catalog Page 2 Press the small right knob to activate the cursor 3 Turn the large right knob to highlight the desired flight plan and press the ENT Key 4 Turn the large right knob to select the point to add the new waypoint If an existing waypoint is highlighted the new waypoint is placed directly in front of this waypoint Figure 5 5 Figure 5 5 Flight Plan Page 5 Use the small and large right knobs to enter the identifier of the new waypoint and press the ENT Key Figure 5 6 Figure 5 6 Waypoint Identifier Field Selected 6 Once all changes have been made press the small right knob to return to th
5. Wind Gust For Temperature Dewpoint Data Age of Data in Minutes Temperature Dewpoint Displaying Textual METARs Once received textual METARs are displayed on the METARs Text Page Selecting the METARs Text Page 1 Select the Data Link Page 2 Select Textual Metar 3 Press the ENT Key The Textual METAR Page Figure 12 46 is displayed for the airport selected The pilot can enter a different identifier on the Textual METAR Page Figure 12 46 Textual METAR Page GNS 430 A Pilot s Guide and Reference 190 00140 00 Rev P 12 31 SECTION 12 ADDITIONAL FEATURES Entering an identifier 1 Select the Data Link Page Highlight TEXTUAL METAR and press the ENT Key 2 Turn the small right knob and scroll through the list of four letter identifiers 3 Highlight the desired identifier and press the ENT Key 4 The text box displays the METAR data for the selected identifier 5 To request an updated graphic or textual METAR for this airport press the MENU key to access the page menu and select Request METAR 6 The METAR Request Page is displayed The request option is displayed on the Textual METAR Page Displaying Wind Data Displaying wind data on the NAV Weather Page 1 Select the NAV Weather Page 2 Press the small right knob The upper left hand corner field flashes 3 Turn the small right knob and select WINDS 4 Press the sm
6. GNS 430 A Pilot s Guide and Reference 190 00140 00 Rev P 12 12 SECTION 12 ADDITIONAL FEATURES Pilots should be aware of TAS TCAS system limitations If an intruder transponder does not respond to interrogations due to antenna shading or marginal transponder performance it will not be displayed or display may be intermittent Pilots should remain vigilant for traffic at all times when using TAS TCAS systems for non transponder equipped airplanes or unresponsive airplanes TCAS I Surveillance Volume Top and bottom mounted antennas allow an active surveillance range of up to 12 nm GTS 800 or 40 nm GTS 820 850 in the forward direction and somewhat reduced ranges to the sides and aft of own aircraft due to the directional interrogation patterns Interference limiting in GTS 820 850 units may automatically reduce range in high density traffic areas TA Alerting Conditions The GTS 8XX automatically adjusts its TA sensitivity level Table 12 5 to reduce the likelihood of nuisance TA alerting during flight phases likely to be near airports Sensitivity Level A less sensitivity TA is used when the aircraft s radar altimeter if equipped indicates own altitude is less than 2000 feet AGL If no radar altimeter is present Sensitivity Level A is active when the landing gear is extended Level A is also active when groundspeed is less than 120 knots with no radar altimeter present in a fixed gear aircraft Sensitivi
7. To view and quickly tune the frequency for a controlling agency 1 Follow steps 1 through 4 on the preceding page to display the Airspace Page Figure 8 34 for the desired controlled or special use airspace 2 Turn the large right knob to highlight Frequencies and press the ENT Key 3 Turn the large right knob to scroll through the list highlighting the desired frequency Figure 8 35 Figure 8 35 Frequency Highlighted 4 Press the ENT Key to place the selected frequency in the standby field of the COM Window 5 Press the COM Flip flop Key to activate the selected frequency Figure 8 36 Figure 8 36 Frequency Moved to Active Field GNS 430 A Pilot s Guide and Reference 190 00140 00 Rev P 8 14 SECTION 8 NRST PAGES 6 To return to the Airspace Page turn the large right knob to highlight Done and press the ENT Key or press the CLR Key 7 To return to the Nearest Airspace Page turn the large right knob to highlight Done and press the ENT Key or press the CLR Key 8 Press the small right knob to remove the flashing cursor The Airspace Page displays and airspace alert messages are provided for the following airspace types Figures 8 37 8 38 and 8 39 Alert Caution Class B Class C Class D CTA Danger MOA Prohibited Restricted TMA Training TRSA Unspecified Warning The bottom r
8. 1 Press the small right knob to activate the cursor 2 Turn the large right knob to place the cursor on the runway designation field Figure 7 9 3 Turn the small right knob to display a window listing all runways for the selected airport Figure 7 10 Figure 7 10 Runway Window 4 Continue turning the small right knob to select the desired runway 5 Press the ENT Key to display information for the selected runway on the Airport Runway Page Figure 7 11 Figure 7 11 Airport Runway Page 6 To remove the flashing cursor press the small right knob GNS 430 A Pilot s Guide and Reference 190 00140 00 Rev P 7 6 SECTION 7 WPT PAGES To adjust the range of the map image 1 Press the down arrow of the RNG Key to display a smaller map area 2 Press the up arrow of the RNG Key to display a larger map area The following descriptions and abbreviations are used on the Airport Runway Page Type Usage type Public Heliport Military or Private Surface Runway surface types include Hard Turf Sealed Gravel Dirt Soft Unknown or Water Lighting Runway lighting types include No Lights Part Time Full Time Unknown or Frequency for pilot controlled lighting 7 4 AIRPORT FREQUENCy PAGE The Airport Frequency Page displays radio frequencies and frequency types for the selected airport as well as sector and altitude restrictions where applicable If the select
9. All data referenced to True North The GNS 430 has not detected a NavData Card in the left data card slot Altitude input failure The GNS 430 is configured to receive altitude serializer data Icarus Rosetta or Shadin and it is not being received Or the data was being received but has been interrupted If a grey code altitude input is available it is used instead If the problem persists contact a Garmin dealer and check the installation and installation settings When this message occurs no pilot action is required if enough satellites are available for a 3D position fix provided no RAIM warnings are present However if only a 2D position fix is possible the pilot should maintain the GPS altitude within 1 000 feet of pressure altitude by entering the altitude on the Position Page Approach is not active The approach could not transition to active at 2 nm or closer to the FAF Verify that SUSP does not appear directly above the OBS Key indicating the auto waypoint sequencing is suspended This message also appears if Receiver Autonomous Integrity Monitoring RAIM has determined that sufficient GPS satellite coverage does not exist for the current phase of flight along with a RAIM not available from FAF to MAP message Approaching target altitude The current GPS computed altitude is within 500 feet of the final Vertical Navigation target altitude GNS 430 A Pilot s Guide and Reference 190 00140 00 R
10. Figure 1 2 Scroll Bar Scroll Bar Bottom Row Keys 12 CDI Key Used to toggle which navigation source GPS or VLOC provides output to an external HSI or CDI 13 OBS Key Selects OBS mode which retains the current active to waypoint as the navigation reference even after passing the waypoint i e prevents sequencing to the next waypoint Pressing the OBS Key again returns the unit to normal operation with automatic sequencing of waypoints When OBS mode is selected the pilot may set the desired course to from a waypoint using the Select OBS Course pop up window or an external OBS selector on the HSI or CDI 14 MSG Key Used to view system messages and to alert the pilot to important warnings and requirements See Section 14 1 for more information on messages 15 FPL Key Allows the pilot to create edit activate and invert flight plans as well as access approaches departures and arrivals A closest point to flight plan feature is also made available by pressing the FPL Key See Section 5 for more information on flight plans 16 PROC Key Allows the pilot to select and remove approaches departures and arrivals from the flight plan When using a flight plan available procedures for the departure and or arrival airport are offered automatically Otherwise the pilot may select the desired airport then the desired procedure GNS 430 A Pilot s Guide and Reference 190 00140 00 Rev P 1
11. Nearest ARTCC Page Nearest Airspace Page The communication frequencies and runway information may both be examined directly from the Nearest Airport Page As discussed earlier for the NAV COM Page the pilot may also place any displayed frequency into the standby COM or VLOC field by highlighting the frequency with the cursor and pressing the ENT Key GNS 430 A Pilot s Guide and Reference 190 00140 00 Rev P 1 16 SECTION 1 INTRODUCTION To display the NRST pages 1 If necessary press and hold the CLR Key to select the NAV group and display the Default NAV Page 2 Turn the large right knob to select the NRST Page Group as indicated by NRST appearing in the lower right corner of the screen 3 Turn the small right knob to select the desired NRST Page To display a list of nearby airports 1 Turn the large right knob to select the NRST Page Group and if needed the small right knob to select the Nearest Airport Page Figure 1 24 Figure 1 24 Nearest Airport Page 2 To scroll through the list press the small right knob then turn the large right knob Figure 1 25 Figure 1 25 Scrolling the Nearest Airport List To view additional information for a nearby airport 1 Press the small right knob to activate the cursor 2 Turn the large right knob to select the desired airport from the list 3 Press the ENT Key to display waypoint WPT information pages for the selecte
12. PWR Power RAD Radial RAIM Receiver Autonomous Integrity Monitoring REF Reference REQ Required Requirements RESTRICTD Restricted RNG Range RX Receive SID Standard Instrument Departure Sml Small SPD Speed SQ Squelch SRFC Surface STAR Standard Terminal Arrival Route SUA Special Use Airspace T Degree True TACAN Tactical Air Navigation TAS True Airspeed TAT Total Air Temperature TEMP Temperature TERM Terminal TKE Track Angle Error TMA ICAO Terminal Control Area TRANS Transition TRFC Traffic TRK Track also Ground Track TRSA Terminal Radar Service Area twr Tower TX Transmit uni Unicom UTC Coordinated Universal Time also GMT or Zulu VAR Variation VER Version VFR Visual Flight Rules VLOC VOR Localizer Receiver VNAV Vertical Navigation VOL Volume VOR VHF Very High Frequency Omnidirectional Radio Range VS Vertical Speed VSR Vertical Speed Required WPT Waypoint WX Weather XTK Crosstrack Error GNS 430 A Pilot s Guide and Reference 190 00140 00 Rev P SECTION 14 MESSAGES ABBREVIATIONS amp NAV TERMS 14 12 14 3 NAVIGATION TERMS The following navigation terms are used on the GNS 430 and in this Pilot s Guide Refer to Figures 14 1 and 14 2 for graphic representation of navigation terms WPT 1 XTK NORTH WPT 2 BRG GS DIS AIRPLANE DTK TRK Figu
13. To change the reference waypoint information 1 Press the MENU Key to display the Position Page Menu 2 Turn the large right knob to highlight Change Fields and press the ENT Key 3 Turn the large right knob to highlight the waypoint type field bottom left corner of the page default setting shows APT see Figure 3 42 Figure 3 42 Waypoint Type Field Highlighted 4 Turn the small right knob to display the list of available waypoint types Figure 3 43 Continue turning the small right knob to select the desired data item from the list Figure 3 43 Category Window 5 If WPT is selected as the waypoint type any airport NAVAID or user waypoint can be designated as a reference waypoint Press the small right knob turn the large right knob to highlight the waypoint identifier field Figure 3 44 then use the small and large right knobs to enter the identifier of the desired waypoint Press the ENT Key to confirm the selected waypoints Press the small right knob to remove the cursor Figure 3 44 Reference Waypoint Field Highlighted GNS 430 A Pilot s Guide and Reference 190 00140 00 Rev P SECTION 3 NAV PAGES 3 21 6 Press the ENT Key to select the desired type and return to the Position Page 7 To select between bearing FROM or bearing TO to the reference waypoint turn the small right knob to select the desired bearing reference Figure 3 45 and press the ENT Ke
14. Type Usage type Public Heliport Military or Private Position Latitude Longitude degrees minutes or degrees minutes seconds MGRS or UTM UPS Elevation In feet or meters Fuel For public use airports the available fuel type s are Avgas 80 87 100LL 100 130 Mogas Jet or None Approach Best available approach ILS MLS LOC LDA SDF GPS VOR RNAV RNV LORAN LOR NDB TACAN TCN Helicopter HEL or VFR Radar Radar coverage Yes or No Airspace Control environment Class B Class C Class D CTA TMA TRSA or none GNS 430 A Pilot s Guide and Reference 190 00140 00 Rev P 7 5 SECTION 7 WPT PAGES 7 3 AIRPORT RUNWAy PAGE The Airport Runway Page Figure 7 9 displays runway designations length surface type and lighting for the selected airport A map image of the runway layout and surrounding area is also displayed on the Airport Runway Page The map image range appears in the lower left corner and is adjustable using the RNG Key For airports with multiple runways information for each runway is available Figure 7 9 Airport Runway Page Map Image Airport Identifier Symbol and Type Runway Designations Runway Length and Width Surface and Lighting Number of Pages in Current Page Group Position of Current Page within Current Page Group Current Page Group To display information for each additional runway
15. is generated on the TERRAIN Page Figure 11 9 Figure 11 9 TERRAIN FAILED Display GNS 430 A Pilot s Guide and Reference 190 00140 00 Rev P 11 9 SECTION 11 TERRAIN 11 4 DATABASE INFORMATION FOR TERRAIN General Database Information Garmin TERRAIN uses terrain and obstacle information supplied by government sources The data undergoes verification by Garmin to confirm accuracy of the content per TSO C151b However the displayed information should never be understood as being all inclusive Pilots must familiarize themselves with the appropriate sectional charts for safe flight NOTE The data contained in the terrain and obstacle databases comes from government agencies Garmin accurately processes and cross validates the data but cannot guarantee the accuracy and completeness of the data The terrain obstacle databases are contained on a datacard which is inserted in the right most slot of the GNS 430 units Appendix A NOTE Obstacles 200 and higher are included in the Obstacle Database It is very important to note that not all obstacles are necessarily charted and therefore may not be contained in the Obstacle Database Database Versions The version and area of coverage of each terrain obstacle database is shown on the Terrain Database Versions Page located in the AUX Page Group Figures 11 10 and 11 11 also Section 10 3 Databases are checked for integrity at power up If a databas
16. local or UTC 12 or 24 hour and time offset The time offset is used to define current local time UTC also called GMT or Zulu date and time are calculated directly from the GPS satellites signals and cannot be changed To use local time simply designate the offset by adding or subtracting the correct number of hours Setup 1 Page Airspace Alarms To set the airspace warning messages or change the altitude buffer 1 Select Airspace Alarms from the Setup 1 Page Figure 10 55 using the steps described at the beginning of this section Figure 10 55 Airspace Alarms Highlighted 2 Turn the large right knob to highlight the On Off field next to the desired airspace type Other SUAs includes alert caution danger training and warning areas 3 Turn the small right knob to select On or Off as desired Figure 10 56 Press the ENT Key to accept the selection Figure 10 56 TWR CTL Zone Alarm Window 4 To change the altitude buffer turn the large right knob to highlight the Altitude Buffers field Figure 10 57 Use the small and large right knobs to enter the desired buffer distance Press the ENT Key when finished Figure 10 57 Buffer Distance Field Selected NOTE When an approach has been loaded into the active flight plan airspace alert messages are disabled within 30nm of the destination airport GNS 430 A Pilot s Guide and Reference 190 00140 00 Rev P 10 2
17. region country latitude and longitude for the selected NDB Figure 7 32 The NDB Page also displays the frequency and a weather broadcast indication if applicable As mentioned in Section 7 1 NDBs may be selected by identifier facility name or location city Figure 7 32 NDB Page NDB Identifier and Symbol Facility Name City and Region Country Frequency and Weather Broadcast Indication Latitude Longitude Position Position of Current Page within Current Page Group Number of Pages in Current Page Group Current Page Group The following descriptions and abbreviations are used Symbol See Section 3 4 for a graphic illustration of available NDB symbols Position Latitude Longitude degrees minutes or degrees minutes seconds MGRS or UTM UPS FREQ Frequency in kilohertz kHz Wx Brdcst Weather information is broadcast on the selected facility s frequency 7 10 VOR PAGE The VOR Page Figure 7 33 displays the facility name city region country magnetic variation latitude and longitude for the selected VOR The VOR Page also displays the frequency and a weather broadcast indication if applicable Figure 7 33 VOR Page VOR Identifier and Symbol Facility Name City and Region Country Frequency and Weather Broadcast Indication Latitude Longitude Position Magnetic Variation Position of Current Page within Current Page Group Number of
18. 12 When approaching SHUTR a waypoint alert NEXT DTK 210 appears in the lower right corner of the screen Figure 6 84 13 After crossing SHUTR the destination sequences to the MAP RW21 the runway threshold see Figure 6 86 Fly toward the MAP When viewing the Map Page as in Figure 6 87 note that the final course segment is displayed in magenta the active leg of the flight plan always appears in magenta and a dashed line extends the course beyond the MAP Figure 6 86 Default NAV Page Figure 6 87 Map Page 14 When approaching the MAP a waypoint alert APPRCHING WPT appears in the lower right corner GNS 430 A Pilot s Guide and Reference 190 00140 00 Rev P SECTION 6 PROCEDURES 6 32 15 After crossing the MAP SUSP appears above the OBS Key Figure 6 88 indicating that automatic sequencing of approach waypoints is suspended at the MAP A FROM indication is displayed on the CDI and Default NAV Page but course guidance along the final approach course continues Do not follow this extended course Follow published missed approach procedures using the OBS Key to initiate the missed approach sequence Figure 6 88 SUSP Annunciation NOTE In addition to using the OBS Key to initiate the missed approach sequence the CDI Key may be used to manually switch the external CDI output to the GPS receiver GPS is indicated above the CDI Key If the pilot lea
19. Used to approve an operation or complete data entry It is also used to confirm information during power on 17 Large Right Knob Used to select page groups NAV WPT AUX or NRST With the on screen cursor enabled the large right knob allows the pilot to move the cursor about the page The large right knob is also used to move the target pointer right turn clockwise or left counterclockwise when the map panning function is active 18 Small Right Knob Used to select pages within one of the groups listed above Press this knob momentarily to display the on screen cursor The cursor allows the pilot to enter data and or make a selection from a list of options When entering data the small knob is used to select the desired letter or number and the large knob is used to move to the next character space The small right knob is also used to move the target pointer up turn clockwise or down counterclockwise when the map panning function is active GNS 430 A Pilot s Guide and Reference 190 00140 00 Rev P 1 4 SECTION 1 INTRODUCTION NOTE When the GNS 430 displays a list of information that is too long for the display screen a scroll bar appears along the right hand side of the display Figure 1 2 The scroll bar graphically indicates the number of additional items available within the selected category To scroll through the list press the small right knob to activate the cursor then turn the large right knob
20. as the IAF Figure 6 76 Also select Load or Activate if already cleared for the approach Figure 6 76 Transitions Window 4 A reminder message appears indicating that GPS can only be used for approach monitoring As mentioned the VLOC receiver must be used for this approach Press the ENT Key to acknowledge the message When an ILS approach is loaded or activated the ILS frequency is automatically placed in the standby field of the VLOC Window To use this frequency press the VLOC Flip flop Key to place it in the active frequency field Flying the ILS Approach When Activate is selected for an ILS approach automatic switching of the external CDI is enabled unless turned off from the CDI Alarms Page Once established on the inbound course to the FAF the external CDI guidance automatically switches from GPS shown in green text to VLOC shown in white text If the pilot has forgotten to activate the ILS frequency step 4 below automatic selection of VLOC does not occur refer to Figure 6 77 for the following steps DO NOT USE FOR NAVIGATION Figure 6 77 Terminal Mode GNS 430 A Pilot s Guide and Reference 190 00140 00 Rev P SECTION 6 PROCEDURES 6 29 1 Within 30 nm of KFLG the GNS 430 switches from enroute mode to terminal mode and the CDI scale transitions from 5 0 to 1 0 nm full scale deflection 2 If the app
21. s Guide and Reference 190 00140 00 Rev P 12 34 SECTION 12 ADDITIONAL FEATURES Standard Aviation Forecast Abbreviations The standard aviation forecast abbreviations are listed in Table 12 12 STANDARD AVIATION FORECAST ABBREVIATIONS Heavy Light Missing or separator Axxxx Altimeter setting xxxx are numbers AFT After BKN Broken clouds BLO Below BR Light fog CIG Ceiling CLR Sky clear DZ Drizzle FEW Few clouds FG Thick fog FM From FZ Freezing G Gusts KT Knots OBSCD Obscured OVC Overcast clouds Pxxxx Hourly Precipitation xxxx are numbers PRESFR Pressure falling rapidly PRESRR Pressure rising rapidly RA Rain RMK Remarks SCT Scattered clouds SLP Sea Level Pressure SM Statue Miles SN Snow TEMPO Occasionally Trrn Terrain TS Thunderstorm VV Vertical Visibility Table 12 12 Forecast Abbreviations METAR Graphics The age symbols listed in Table 12 13 are common to METARs Winds and Temperature Dewpoint graphics METAR Winds and Temperature Dewpoints Age Graphics 0 10 minutes Green 11 20 minutes Green 21 30 minutes Green 31 60 minutes Green 61 minutes Yellow Unknown Yellow Table 12 13 Weather Age Graphics METARs Precipitation Graphics Light Green Moderate
22. 10 min 15 min 20 min 30 min 45 min and 1 hr When an auto request time is selected the first report is sent after the specified time has elapsed from when the field was set as opposed to immediately sending a report Note that in order to take advantage of EchoFlight s Automatic Weather Delivery AWD service the time interval must be set to 15 minutes Manual Send This field is used to send out a current single position report Figure 12 41 Figure 12 41 Position Report Page Requesting Graphical METARs Graphical METAR data can be requested from the Data Link Page Map Page or Airport Page Requesting graphical METARs from the Data Link Page 1 Select the Data Link Page from the AUX Page Group 2 Press the small right knob to activate the cursor Turn the small right knob and highlight Metar Request Figure 12 42 Figure 12 42 Data Link Page 3 Press the ENT Key The METAR REQUEST Page is displayed Figure 12 43 Figure 12 43 Metar Request Page The METAR Request Page has the following user selectable fields Format This field is used to select between requesting the raw METAR text Textual or requesting a graphical summary Graphic of several METARs GNS 430 A Pilot s Guide and Reference 190 00140 00 Rev P 12 28 SECTION 12 ADDITIONAL FEATURES NOTE Textual METARs can only be requested by identifier or by flight plan if the flight plan contains a
23. Card if applicable supplied with the GNS 430 can be installed or removed when the GNS 430 is on or off If the NavData Card is not present when the unit is turned on a No Jeppesen Aviation Database Limited to user defined waypoints message appears on the Database Confirmation Page If the NavData Card is removed during operation a Data card removed Unit will restart in 30 seconds warning is displayed A counter begins to count down and if the card is not replaced within 30 seconds the GNS 430 automatically re initializes Pressing the ENT Key will manually re initialize the unit Figure A 1 Data Card Slot Locations Terrain Data Card Slot right hand slot NavData Card Slot left hand slot To insert the NavData or Terrain Data Card Figure A 2 1 Place the card into the appropriate card slot with the label facing to the left and the swing arm handle at the bottom front 2 Press the data card into place until it seats on the internal connector and the front of the card is flush with the face of the GNS 430 unit 3 If the swing arm handle is up gently lower the handle and push it into place flush with the face of the GNS 430 unit Figure A 2 Data Card Insertion Removal Detail GNS 430 A Pilot s Guide and Reference 190 00140 00 Rev P APPENDIX A DATA CARD USE A 2 To remove the NavData or Terrain data card Figure A 2 1 Gently press on the tab using a slight upward motion
24. Figure 12 5 Traffic Page Heading or Track Up Indicator TIS Traffic Display Status and Pilot Response AGE If traffic data is not refreshed within 6 seconds an age indicator e g AGE 00 12 is displayed in the lower right corner of the display when displaying traffic See Figure 12 6 The pilot should be aware that the quality of displayed traffic is reduced in this condition After another 6 seconds if data is still not received the traffic is removed from the display Figure 12 6 Traffic Age Indicator and Coasting Banner Traffic Coasting Banner and Age Indicator GNS 430 A Pilot s Guide and Reference 190 00140 00 Rev P 12 6 SECTION 12 ADDITIONAL FEATURES DATA FAIL DATA FAIL is displayed when data is being received from GTX 330 Figure 12 7 but there was a failure detected in the data stream The pilot should see the installer for corrective action Figure 12 7 Data Fail Message FAILED FAILED is displayed when the GTX 330 has indicated it has failed Figure 12 8 The pilot should see the installer for corrective action Figure 12 8 Failed Message NO DATA NO DATA is displayed when no data is being received from the GTX 330 Figure 12 9 The pilot should be aware that this status may be a normal mode of operation in a dual transponder installation where the GTX 330 with TIS is not the selected transponder Figure 12 9 No Data
25. GNS 430 A Pilot s Guide and Reference 190 00140 00 Rev P 7 2 SECTION 7 WPT PAGES To enter a waypoint identifier 1 Select the desired WPT page and press the small right knob to activate the cursor 2 Turn the small right knob to select the first character of the waypoint s identifier 3 Turn the large right knob to select the next character field 4 Turn the small right knob to select the desired character 5 Repeat steps 3 and 4 until the identifier is selected then press the ENT Key 6 To remove the flashing cursor press the small right knob To enter a waypoint facility name or city location 1 Select the Airport Location Page NDB Page or VOR Page from the WPT Page Group as described on the preceding page 2 Press the small right knob to activate the cursor 3 Turn the large right knob to select the facility name or location city field 4 Turn the small right knob to select the desired character Figure 7 2 Figure 7 2 Airport Location Page 5 Turn the large right knob to select the next character field 6 Repeat steps 4 and 5 until the facility name or location is selected then press the ENT Key Figures 7 3 and 7 4 Figure 7 3 Airport Location Page Figure 7 4 VOR Page 7 To remove the flashing cursor press the small right knob GNS 430 A Pilot s Guide and Reference 190 00140 00 Rev P 7 3 SECTION 7 WPT PAGES Duplicate Waypoints Once the
26. Internal system to system communication between the main processor and the glideslope receiver has failed Operational status of the glideslope receiver is unknown and the unit should be returned to a Garmin dealer for service G S needs service The GNS 430 has detected a failure in its glideslope receiver The glideslope receiver may still be usable but the unit should be returned at the earliest convenience to a Garmin dealer for service GPS has failed The GNS 430 has detected a failure in its GPS receiver The GPS receiver is not available and the unit should be returned to a Garmin dealer for service GPS is not responding Internal system to system communication between the main processor and the GPS receiver has failed Operational status of the GPS receiver is unknown and the unit should be returned to a Garmin dealer for service GPS needs service The GNS 430 has detected a failure in its GPS receiver The GPS receiver may still be usable but the unit should be returned at the earliest convenience to a Garmin dealer for service GPS stored data was lost Satellite almanac ephemeris and time data have been lost due to a memory battery failure system reset or data expiration data over six months old GNS 430 A Pilot s Guide and Reference 190 00140 00 Rev P SECTION 14 MESSAGES ABBREVIATIONS amp NAV TERMS 14 5 Heading input failure The heading selection on the external HSI s or CDI s OBS co
27. Message OPER When the Traffic Page displays OPER in the upper right hand corner of the display Figure 12 11 the TIS system is in operational mode and available to display traffic on the Traffic or Map Page STANDBY When the Traffic Page displays STANDBY Figure 12 10 the TIS system is in standby mode and cannot display traffic data Figure 12 10 Standby Message TRFC CST The TRFC CST traffic coasting banner located above the AGE indicator in Figure 12 6 indicates that displayed traffic is held even though the data is stale The pilot should be aware that the quality of displayed traffic is reduced in this condition TRFC RMVD The TRFC RMVD banner Figure 12 11 indicates that traffic has been removed from the display due to the age of the data being too old to coast for the time period of 12 60 seconds from the last receipt of a TIS message The pilot should be aware that traffic may be present but not shown GNS 430 A Pilot s Guide and Reference 190 00140 00 Rev P 12 7 SECTION 12 ADDITIONAL FEATURES Figure 12 11 Traffic Removed Banner UNAVAIL When a 60 second period elapses with no data TIS is considered to be unavailable This state is indicated by the text UNAVAIL Figure 12 12 The pilot should be aware that UNAVAIL could indicate a TIS coverage limitation due to a line of sight situation a low altitude condition or a
28. P 12 14 SECTION 12 ADDITIONAL FEATURES Switching Between Standby and Operating Modes The unit must be in operating mode for traffic to be displayed The ability to switch out of standby into operating mode on the ground is especially useful for scanning the airspace around the airport before takeoff Operating Mode is confirmed by the display of OPER in the upper right hand corner of the Traffic Page Figure 12 23 Switching to Operating Mode from Standby Mode 1 Press the small right knob to activate the cursor and highlight STBY 2 Turn the small right knob to select OPER 3 Press the ENT Key to confirm and place the GTS 8XX in operating mode the GTS 8XX switches out of standby into the 6 nm display range NOTE The GTS 8XX will automatically switch out of standby 8 to 10 seconds after takeoff which is determined by ground speed or by a transition of the aircraft squat switch if connected Switching to Standby Mode from the Traffic Page 1 Press the small right knob to activate the cursor and highlight OPER 2 Turn the small right knob to select STBY 3 Press the ENT Key to confirm and place the GTS 8XX in standby mode NOTE The GTS 8XX goes into standby mode 24 seconds after landing which is determined by ground speed or by a transition of the aircraft squat switch if connected This delay allows the GTS 8XX to remain out of standby during a touch an
29. TERRAIN uses information provided from the GPS receiver to provide a horizontal position and altitude GPS altitude is derived from satellite measurements GPS altitude is converted to a mean sea level MSL based altitude GPS MSL altitude and is used to determine TERRAIN alerts GPS MSL altitude accuracy is affected by factors such as satellite geometry but it is not subject to variations in pressure and temperature that normally affect pressure altitude devices GPS MSL altitude does not require local altimeter settings to determine MSL altitude Therefore GPS altitude provides a highly accurate and reliable MSL altitude source to calculate terrain and obstacle alerts TERRAIN utilizes terrain and obstacle databases that are referenced to mean sea level MSL Using the GPS position and GPS MSL altitude TERRAIN displays a 2 D picture of the surrounding terrain and obstacles relative to the position and altitude of the aircraft Furthermore the GPS position and GPS MSL altitude are used to calculate and predict the aircraft s flight path in relation to the surrounding terrain and obstacles In this manner TERRAIN can provide advanced alerts of predicted dangerous terrain conditions Detailed alert modes are described later in this section Baro Corrected Altitude Baro corrected altitude or indicated altitude is derived by adjusting the altimeter setting for local atmospheric conditions The most accurate baro correcte
30. This Section assumes the user has experience operating the GNS 430 unit and the Garmin GTX 330 Transponder NOTE TIS and Weather Data Link displays are available only when GNS 430 units are configured with the GTX 330 Mode S Transponder and a GDL 49 or GDL 69 A Data Link Satellite Receiver NOTE Proximity Advisories and Other Traffic symbols normally displayed in white may be displayed in cyan if configured for alternate traffic color see the 400 series installation manual 12 1 TRAFFIC INFORMATION SERVICE TIS This section is written for Garmin GNS 400 Main System Software Version 5 01 and later GTX 330 330D Main Software Version 4 01 and later Some differences in operation may be observed when comparing the information in this manual to earlier or later software versions NOTE This section is written exclusively for GNS 430 units that are configured with the GTX 330 Mode S Transponder Refer to the 400 500 Series Display Interfaces Pilot s Guide Addendum 190 00140 10 when interfacing with non Garmin products TIS Operation Traffic Information Service TIS provides a graphic display of traffic advisory information in the cockpit for non TCAS equipped aircraft TIS is a ground based service providing relative location of aircraft tracked by ATC radar within a specified service volume The TIS ground sensor uses real time track reports to generate traffic notification TIS Traffic display is av
31. To re select a direct course from present position or select a new manually defined course simply press the Direct to Key followed by the ENT Key twice GNS 430 A Pilot s Guide and Reference 190 00140 00 Rev P 5 1 SECTION 5 FLIGHT PLANS SECTION 5 FLIGHT PLANS The GNS 430 lets the pilot create up to 20 different flight plans with up to 31 waypoints in each flight plan The Flight Plan Page Group consists of two pages Active Flight Plan Page Figure 5 1 and Flight Plan Catalog Page Figure 5 2 accessed by pressing the FPL Key The flight plan pages allow the pilot to create edit and copy flight plans Indicates Current Page Figure 5 1 Active Flight Plan Page Indicates Current Page Figure 5 2 Flight Plan Catalog Page 5 1 FLIGHT PLAN CATALOG PAGE The Flight Plan Catalog Page allows the pilot to create edit activate delete and copy flight plans Flight plans numbered from 1 through 19 are used to save flight plans for future use Flight plan 00 is reserved exclusively for the flight plan currently in use for navigation When a flight plan is activated a copy of the flight plan is automatically transferred to flight plan 00 overwriting any previously active flight plan To create a new flight plan 1 Press the FPL Key and turn the small right knob to display the Flight Plan Catalog Page Figure 5 2 2 Press the MENU Key to display the Flight Plan Catalog Page Menu Figure 5 3
32. Use the panning function Map Panning in this section to place the target pointer on an open area within the boundaries of an airspace If the area is congested and it is difficult to select an open area it may be necessary to zoom in or press the CLR Key to make the selection easier Figure 3 14 Figure 3 14 Select Airspace with Target Pointer GNS 430 A Pilot s Guide and Reference 190 00140 00 Rev P SECTION 3 NAV PAGES 3 9 2 Press the ENT Key to display an options menu Figure 3 15 Figure 3 15 Map Panning Options Window 3 Review Airspace should already be highlighted If not select it with the small right knob Press the ENT Key to display the Airspace Information Page for the selected airspace 4 To display the COM frequency ies for the controlling agency turn the large right knob to highlight Frequencies and press the ENT Key Press the CLR Key to return to the Airspace Information Page 5 Press the CLR Key to exit the Airspace Information Page Map Setup Many of the GNS 430 s functions are menu driven Each of the main pages has an options menu allowing customization of the page to the pilot s preferences and or selection of special features which specifically relate to that page A Map Page Menu Figure 3 16 provides additional settings to customize the Map Page and additional features related specifically to the Map Page To display the Map Page Menu Press t
33. appears next which shows the current database information on the NavData and Terrain Data cards Database information highlighted in yellow indicates the database is not within its effective dates The NavData database is updated every 28 days and must be current for approved instrument approach operations Information on database subscriptions is available inside the GNS 430 package Figure 1 4 Database Versions Page To acknowledge the database information Press the ENT Key Instrument Panel Self test Page Once the database has been acknowledged the Instrument Panel Self Test Page appears Figure 1 5 Figure 1 5 Instrument Panel Self Test Page To ensure that the GNS 430 and any connected instruments are working properly check for the following indications on the CDI HSI RMI external annunciators and other connected instruments Course deviation Half left no flag TO FROM flag TO Bearing to destination 135 Distance to destination 10 0 nm All external annunciators if installed On Glideslope Half up no flag Time to destination 4 minutes Desired track 149 5 Ground speed 150 knots The Instrument Panel Self test Page Figure 1 5 indicates the currently selected OBS course fuel capacity CAP fuel on board FOB and fuel flow FF The fuel capacity fuel on board and fuel flow may be manually entered if the installation does not includ
34. at the front center of the data card This partially deploys the swing arm handle 2 Rotate the swing arm handle upward and outward until it locks into place perpendicular to the face of the GNS 430 unit 3 Grasp the top and bottom surfaces of the swing arm handle between your thumb and forefinger and pull directly away from the face of the GNS 430 unit to remove the data card GNS 430 A Pilot s Guide and Reference 190 00140 00 Rev P APPENDIX B SPECIFICATIONS B 1 APPENDIX B SPECIFICATIONS PHYSICAL Unit Size 6 25 W x 11 00 D x 2 65 H 159 mm x 279 mm x 67 mm Unit Weight 6 6 pounds installed 3 0 kg POWER Input 28 Vdc early 430 all 430A units 14 28 Vdc later 430 units ENVIRONMENTAL Temperature 20 C to 55 C operating range 4 F to 131 F Humidity 95 non condensing Altitude 1 500 ft to 50 000 ft 457 m to 15 240 m GPS PERFORMANCE Receiver 12 parallel channel PhaseTrac12 Acquisition Time 12 seconds warm 45 seconds cold Update Rate Once per second continuous Accuracy Position 15 meters 49 ft RMS Velocity 0 1 knot RMS steady state Dynamics 999 kts maximum velocity 6g maximum acceleration VHF COM PERFORMANCE Channels 760 25 kHz spacing or 2280 8 33 kHz spacing Frequency Range 118 000 MHz to 136 975 MHz Transmit Power 10 watts minimum 430 16 watts minimum 430A VOR PERFORMANCE Fre
35. the active flight plan any stored flight plan or user waypoints to a second 400 or 500 series Garmin unit Some crossfill operations can be done automatically If both units are set to auto a change in the direct to destination or active flight plan on one unit is seen on the other For additional information see Section 10 2 Flight Planning Page Crossfill To crossfill flight plans between two 400 or 500 Series Garmin units 1 Select the Crossfill option from the Flight Plan Catalog Page Menu Figure 5 13 and press the ENT Key Figure 5 13 Flight Plan Catalog Page Menu 2 Turn the large right knob to select the Method field Figure 5 14 Figure 5 14 Crossfill Page 3 Turn the small right knob to select Auto or Manual and press the ENT Key Auto automatically transfers the active flight plan or Direct to selection to another 400 or 500 series Garmin unit without user intervention 4 If Manual is selected Turn the large right knob to select the Transfer field then turn the small right knob to select the type of information to transfer between units active flight plan flight plan all user waypoints or a single user waypoint When Flight Plan or User Waypoint is selected a second field appears to the immediate right of the Transfer field Use the small and large right knobs to enter the number of the flight plan or the name of the user waypoi
36. 0 nm of the FAF LYH the GNS 430 switches from terminal mode to approach mode CDI scaling is tightened from 1 0 to 0 3 nm full scale deflection 10 When approaching the FAF a waypoint alert NEXT DTK 026 appears in the lower right corner Make any course adjustments necessary for the final course segment FAF to MAP GNS 430 A Pilot s Guide and Reference 190 00140 00 Rev P SECTION 6 PROCEDURES 6 8 11 After crossing the FAF the destination sequences to the MAP RW03 the runway threshold see Figure 6 18 Fly toward the MAP Figure 6 18 Sequence to MAP NOTE When viewing the Map Page note that the final course segment is displayed in magenta the active leg of the flight plan always appears in magenta and a dashed line extends the course beyond the MAP The dashed line is provided for situational awareness only and should NOT be used for navigation Follow the published missed approach procedures 12 When approaching the MAP a waypoint alert APPRCHING WPT appears in the lower right corner 13 After crossing the MAP SUSP appears above the OBS Key Figure 6 19 indicating that automatic sequencing of approach waypoints is suspended at the MAP A from indication is displayed on the CDI and Default NAV Page but course guidance along the final approach course continues If a missed approach is required use the OBS Key to initiate the missed approach seq
37. 1 9 SECTION 1 INTRODUCTION Selecting COM and VLOC Frequencies While the GNS 430 is acquiring a position take a minute to dial in the active and standby frequencies to be used for the first phase of the flight The GNS 430 s display is divided into separate windows or screen areas including a COM Window VLOC Window and the GPS Window Figure 1 11 Figure 1 11 Standby Frequency 135 325 MHz COM Window GPS Window VLOC Window Active Frequency Standby Frequency To change the standby communication frequency 1 Press the small left knob if needed to move the tuning cursor to the COM Window Figure 1 11 2 Turn the large left knob to select the MHz and the small left knob to select the kHz of the desired frequency To place the standby communication frequency in the active field Press the COM Flip flop Key Figure 1 12 Figure 1 12 Active Frequency 135 325 MHz Once the active frequency has been entered repeat steps 1 and 2 to enter the standby frequency After both communication frequencies have been entered the COM Window may be kept hot by leaving the cursor on the standby frequency Move the cursor to the VLOC Window by pressing the small left knob NOTE When selecting VLOC frequencies the tuning cursor automatically returns to the COM Window after 30 seconds of inactivity To change the standby VLOC frequency 1 Press the small left knob if needed to activate the tunin
38. 11 SECTION 10 AUX PAGES 4 The flashing cursor moves to the type field under the new message Figure 10 27 Turn the small right knob to display a window of available options Figure 10 28 Event One Time Periodic Press the ENT Key to select Figure 10 27 Type Field Highlighted Figure 10 28 Type Window 5 The flashing cursor moves to the time date field Use the small and large right knobs to set the time or date required before the message is displayed Time is entered as hours minutes seconds hhh mm ss Event based messages expire at a specific date and time Press the ENT Key when finished To edit a scheduled message 1 Select Scheduler from the Flight Planning Page using the steps described at the beginning of this section 2 The flashing cursor highlights the first message field 3 To edit the message text turn the large right knob to highlight the desired message field Use the small and large right knobs to edit the message text entering the new text directly over the old message Press the ENT Key when finished 4 To edit the time field turn the large right knob to highlight the field Use the small and large right knobs to edit the new date or time entering the new value directly over the old figure Press the ENT Key when finished To delete a scheduled message 1 Select Scheduler from the Flight Planning Page using the steps described in this section 2 The f
39. 2009 190 00140 00 Rev P Printed in the U S A GNS 430 A Pilot s Guide and Reference 190 00140 00 Rev P iii TABLE OF CONTENTS SECTION 1 INTRODUCTION 1 1 1 1 Accessories and Packing List 1 1 1 2 Key and Knob Functions 1 2 1 3 Takeoff Tour 1 5 SECTION 2 COM 2 1 2 1 Communicating using the GNS 430 2 1 SECTION 3 NAV PAGES 3 1 3 1 Main Page Groups 3 1 3 2 NAV Page Group 3 1 3 3 Default NAV Page 3 2 3 4 Map Page 3 5 3 5 TERRAIN Page 3 14 3 6 NAV COM Page 3 17 3 7 Position Page 3 19 3 8 Satellite Status Page 3 22 3 9 Vertical Navigation Page 3 24 SECTION 4 DIRECT TO NAVIGATION 4 1 4 1 Overview
40. 24 Frequency Moved to Standby Field 6 Press the COM Flip flop Key to activate the selected frequency 7 Press the small right knob to remove the flashing cursor GNS 430 A Pilot s Guide and Reference 190 00140 00 Rev P 8 10 SECTION 8 NRST PAGES 8 8 NEAREST FLIGHT SERVICE STATION FSS PAGE The Nearest Flight Service Station Page Figure 8 25 displays the facility name bearing to and distance to the five nearest FSS points of communication within 200 nm of the present position For each FSS listed the Nearest Flight Service Station Page also indicates the frequency ies and may be used to quickly tune the COM transceiver to the FSS s frequency The selected frequency is placed in the standby field of the COM Window and activated using the COM Flip flop Key For duplex operations RX and TX indications appears beside the listed frequencies indicating receive only or transmit only frequencies The associated VOR is also provided for reference Figure 8 25 Nearest FSS Page FSS Name Bearing To and Distance To Current Page Group Frequency ies VOR Identifier For Duplex Operation Position of Current Page within Current Page Group Number of Pages in Current Page Group To quickly tune an FSS s frequency from the Nearest Flight Service Station Page 1 Select the Nearest Flight Service Station Page using the steps outlined in Section 8 1 Figure 8 25 2
41. 3 SECTION 4 DIRECT TO NAVIGATION To select a direct to destination from the active flight plan 1 Press the Direct to Key The Select Direct to Waypoint Page appears with the waypoint identifier field highlighted 2 Turn the large right knob to highlight the flight plan FPL field Figure 4 6 Figure 4 6 Highlighted Flight Plan Field 3 Turn the small right knob to display a window showing all waypoints in the active flight plan Figure 4 7 Figure 4 7 FPL Flight Plan Window 4 Continue turning the small right knob to scroll through the list and highlight the desired waypoint 5 Press the ENT Key to confirm the selected waypoint and press the ENT Key again to activate the direct to function Selecting the Nearest Airport as a Direct to Destination The Select Direct to Waypoint Page always displays the nearest airports from the present position in the NRST field Nearby airports may also be selected as direct to destinations using the steps described in Section 8 1 To select a nearby airport as a direct to destination 1 Press the Direct to Key The Select Direct to Waypoint Page appears with the waypoint identifier field highlighted 2 Turn the large right knob to highlight the nearest airport NRST field 3 Turn the small right knob to display a window showing up to nine nearby airports Figure 4 8 Figure 4 8 Nearest Window 4 Continue turning the small right knob to scr
42. 5 Turn the small right knob to display a window of available transitions Figure 7 24 Continue turning the small right knob to select the desired transition Figure 7 24 Transitions Window 6 Press the ENT Key The cursor moves to the runway field GNS 430 A Pilot s Guide and Reference 190 00140 00 Rev P 7 12 SECTION 7 WPT PAGES 7 Turn the small right knob to display a window of available runways Figure 7 25 Continue turning the small right knob to select the desired runway ALL may appear in the runway field indicating the arrival procedure applies to all runways For airports with parallel runways B may appear at the end of the runway designation to indicate the arrival procedure applies to both runways Figure 7 25 Runway Window 8 Press the ENT Key To remove the flashing cursor press the small right knob Airport Arrival Page Options The following option is available for the Airport Arrival Page by pressing the MENU Key Load into Active FPL allows the pilot to load the selected arrival into the active flight plan This is identical to loading an arrival procedure from the Procedures Page as described in Section 6 1 To load an arrival procedure from the Airport Arrival Page 1 Select the desired arrival transition and runway using the steps above 2 Press the MENU Key to display the Airport Arrival Page Menu 3 Press the ENT Key to select the Load in
43. 5 15 C 4 Activate the approach 6 3 6 4 6 10 6 19 C 6 Activating flight plans 5 4 Active flight plan options 5 8 5 10 5 13 Active frequency 1 9 2 1 2 2 2 5 6 28 6 33 9 1 9 2 Active leg 1 12 3 2 5 9 6 7 6 8 6 11 6 13 6 17 6 18 6 21 6 30 6 31 6 32 C 4 Airport Approach Page 7 8 7 10 C 1 Airport frequencies 2 3 2 5 Airport Location Page 7 2 7 4 8 5 Airport Runway Page 7 5 Airport type 7 4 7 6 7 8 Airspace alert messages 1 17 1 18 8 14 10 22 Airspace information 1 17 Altitude 3 19 3 24 3 23 3 25 14 1 14 9 Altitude buffer 8 14 10 20 10 22 Annunciator 1 8 1 18 3 16 8 12 11 7 14 1 C 1 C 3 Approach best available 7 4 Approach procedures 6 1 6 8 6 9 6 13 6 17 6 20 6 32 7 8 9 3 C 6 Arrivals 1 4 1 14 1 15 5 9 5 12 5 14 6 1 7 1 7 11 14 3 Arrival alarm 10 20 10 21 10 24 14 1 Auto tuning 2 3 9 2 Automatic sequencing C 3 Automatic squelch 1 3 2 1 Automatic zoom 3 9 3 11 Auto request 12 22 AUX Page Group 10 1 Aviation data 3 11 3 15 B Backlighting 10 28 14 2 14 3 Bearing 1 6 1 11 1 12 3 3 3 7 3 12 3 13 3 20 3 21 5 9 5 13 8 4 8 6 8 7 8 8 8 9 8 10 14 9 14 12 Bottom row keys 1 4 C CAUTIONS v CDI Key 1 4 6 26 6 32 6 33 9 4 14 2 14 7 CDI scale 3 2 6 11 6 15 6 19 6 29 6 30 10 20 10 21 10 23 10 24 C 5 C 6 CDI switching 6 33 Ceiling and visibility graphics 12 35 Checklists 1 7 10 12 10 14 10 15 Closest point of flight p
44. ARTCC Page and the Nearest FSS Page present detailed information for up to five nearby facilities displaying only one facility at a time Again the additional information is viewed using the flashing cursor and large right knob to scroll through the list To scroll through the list of nearest flight service station or center points of communication 1 Select the desired NRST page using the steps outlined on the preceding page 2 Press the small right knob to activate the cursor 3 Turn the small right knob to scroll through the list Figure 8 5 Figure 8 5 Nearest FSS Page 4 Press the small right knob to remove the flashing cursor GNS 430 A Pilot s Guide and Reference 190 00140 00 Rev P 8 3 SECTION 8 NRST PAGES Navigating to a Nearby Waypoint The NRST pages can be used in conjunction with the GNS 430 s direct to function to quickly set a course to a nearby facility and can provide navigation to the nearest airport in case of an in flight emergency To select a nearby airport VOR NDB intersection or user waypoint as a direct to destination 1 Use the flashing cursor to scroll through a NRST page list Figure 8 6 and highlight the desired nearest waypoint as outlined in Section 8 1 Figure 8 6 Nearest VOR Page 2 Press the Direct to Key to display the select Direct to Waypoint Page Figure 8 7 Figure 8 7 Direct to Waypoint Page 3 Press the ENT Key to accept the selected w
45. Facility Name Flight Plan Field Nearest Airport Field City Figure 4 4 Select Direct to Waypoint Page To select a direct to destination by facility name or city 1 Press the Direct to Key The Select Direct to Waypoint Page appears with the waypoint identifier field highlighted 2 Turn the large right knob to highlight the facility name second line or the city third line field 3 Use the small and large right knobs to enter the facility name or city location of the desired destination waypoint Figure 4 5 When spelling the facility name or city the GNS 430 s Spell N Find feature selects the first entry in the database based upon the characters entered up to that point Figure 4 5 Facility Name Selected 4 Continue turning the small right knob to scroll through any additional database listings for the selected facility name or city The pilot can also scroll backwards with the small right knob if the desired waypoint has been scrolled past 5 Press the ENT Key to confirm the selected waypoint and press the ENT Key again to activate the direct to function Selecting a Destination from the Active Flight Plan When navigating an active flight plan any waypoint contained in the flight plan may be selected as a direct to destination from the Select Direct to Waypoint Page See Section 5 for more information on flight plans GNS 430 A Pilot s Guide and Reference 190 00140 00 Rev P 4
46. Green Heavy Yellow No Precipitation Rain Snow Unknown Table 12 14 Precipitation Graphics GNS 430 A Pilot s Guide and Reference 190 00140 00 Rev P 12 35 SECTION 12 ADDITIONAL FEATURES The symbol in Figure 12 48 indicates the ceiling at KMWM is marginal VFR with heavy snow and low IFR visibility The data age is 31 60 minutes old Ceiling and Visibility Flight Rules VFR green bars Marginal VFR green bars IFR yellow bars Low IFR yellow bars Table 12 15 Ceiling and Visibility Graphics Ceiling Precipitation Visibility Station Identifier Data Age Figure 12 48 METAR Symbol Winds Wind Vector The wind vector indicates the direction of the surface wind to the nearest 30 increment e g 30 60 90 120 etc Wind Speed In general the sum of the wind barbs see Table 12 16 is the sustained surface wind speed Wind Speed Blank Unknown Short Barb 5 kts Long Barb 10 kts 37 kts Table 12 16 Wind Speed Graphics Gust Offset Blank Gusts are unknown or lt 5 kts above sustained wind speed G10 Green Wind is gusting 5 10 kts more than sustained speed G11 Yellow Wind is gusting 11 kts or more above its sustained speed Table 12 17 Gust Offset Graphics GNS 430 A Pilot s Guide and Reference 190 00140 00 Rev P 12 36 SECTION 12 ADDITIONAL FEATURES To interpret wind speed add the values of each of the
47. Knob When VLOC ident is enabled an ID indication appears in the upper right corner of the VLOC Window to the immediate right of VLOC Figure 9 1 VLOC audio volume is adjusted using the VLOC Volume Knob Turn the VLOC Volume Knob clockwise to increase volume or counterclockwise to decrease volume VLOC Window and Tuning VLOC frequencies are tuned with the large and small left knobs when the tuning cursor is in the standby VLOC frequency field The standby frequency always appears below the active frequency The active frequency is the frequency currently in use The tuning cursor remains in the COM Window To select a VOR Localizer ILS frequency press the small left knob momentarily to place the cursor in the VLOC Window NOTE The tuning cursor normally appears in the COM Window unless placed in the VLOC Window by pressing the small left knob When the tuning cursor is in the VLOC Window it automatically returns to the COM Window after 30 seconds of inactivity The active frequency in either window cannot be accessed directly only the standby frequency is highlighted by the tuning cursor To select a VOR localizer ILS frequency 1 If the tuning cursor is not currently in the VLOC Window press the small left knob momentarily Figure 9 2 Figure 9 2 Tuning Cursor in VLOC Window Tuning Cursor in VLOC Window GNS 430 A Pilot s Guide and Reference 190 00140 00 Rev P 9 2 SECTION 9 VL
48. METAR station identifier Center This field allows the pilot to specify reference points for the request The following five options are available for the Center field Current Position Request METAR data from the aircraft s current position Look Ahead Request METAR data ahead of along the current route From ID Request NEXRAD data from a specific waypoint identifier If From ID is selected as the reference point for the request the WPT field is displayed in place of Position The WPT field is used to enter a waypoint identifier as the reference point for the request From Lat Lon Request NEXRAD data from a specific latitude and longitude This is only selectable when requesting from the map The Position field displays the position of the map cursor and cannot be edited From Flight Plan Request METAR data from one of the waypoints in the active flight plan This is only selectable when an active Flight Plan has been selected The Flight Plan field displayed in place of Position is used to select which waypoint in the active flight plan to use as the reference point for the request Radius Graphical requests only This field selects a request radius from 50 to 250 nm from the selected position Position also WPT or Flight Plan Current Posn Position is current Look Ahead Position is look ahead positio
49. Map Page The symbology is shown in Table 12 1 and Figures 10 2 10 3 and 10 4 The symbology is described in Table 12 2 A Traffic Advisory TA symbol appears as a solid yellow circle or half circle on the outer range ring if the traffic is outside the range of the dedicated Traffic Page Other Traffic is displayed as hollow white may be configured as cyan diamonds Altitude deviation from own client aircraft altitude is displayed in hundreds of feet for each target symbol If traffic is above own aircraft altitude the deviation is shown above the target next to a symbol If traffic is below own aircraft altitude the deviation is shown below the target next to a symbol Altitude trend is displayed as an up arrow gt 500 fpm down arrow lt 500 fpm or no symbol if less than 500 fpm rate in either direction The traffic ground track vector protrudes from each symbol in the approximate direction of travel Traffic Type Symbol Traffic Advisory Out of Range Traffic Advisory Other Traffic Table 12 1 TIS Symbology Figure 12 2 Traffic Page Own Client Aircraft Symbol Other Intruder Traffic Symbol Traffic Advisory TA Symbol Traffic Ground Track Vector Figure 12 3 Out of Range TA Symbol Out of Range Traffic Advisory TA Symbol GNS 430 A Pilot s Guide and Reference 190 00140 00 Rev P 12 5 SECTION 12 ADDITIONAL FEATURES Figure 12 4 Traffic Symbol Com
50. PT Part time frequency If a listed frequency has sector or altitude restrictions the frequency is preceded by an Info designation To view usage restrictions for a frequency 1 Turn the large right knob to place the cursor on the Info designation directly to the left of the desired frequency Figure 7 15 Figure 7 15 Info Highlighted 2 Press the ENT Key to display the restriction information Figure 7 16 Figure 7 16 Restriction Information Page 3 To return to the Airport Frequency Page press the ENT Key GNS 430 A Pilot s Guide and Reference 190 00140 00 Rev P 7 8 SECTION 7 WPT PAGES The following descriptions and abbreviations are used on the Airport Frequency Page Type Usage type Public Heliport Military or Private Frequency Communication frequencies which may include restrictions Approach Arrival Class B Class C CTA Departure TMA Terminal TRSA Communication frequencies without restrictions ATIS ASOS AWOS Center Clearance Gate Control Ground Helicopter Multicom Pre taxi Radar Ramp Other Tower Unicom Navigation frequencies ILS LOC 7 5 AIRPORT APPROACH PAGE The Airport Approach Page Figure 7 17 shows the available approach procedures for the selected airport Where multiple initial approach fixes IAFs and feeder routes are available that information may also be displayed A map image provides
51. Page Flight Plan Leg GNS 430 A Pilot s Guide and Reference 190 00140 00 Rev P 10 7 SECTION 10 AUX PAGES 5 Turn the large right knob to highlight the departure time DEP TIME field 6 Use the small and large right knobs to enter the departure time Press the ENT Key when finished Departure time may be entered in local or UTC time depending upon unit settings see Section 10 4 Setup 1 Page Date Time 7 The flashing cursor moves to the ground speed GS field Use the small and large right knobs to enter the ground speed Press the ENT Key when finished 8 With all variables entered the following information is provided Figure 10 16 Figure 10 16 Trip Planning Page DTK Desired track or desired course DIS Distance ETE Estimated time enroute ESA Enroute safe altitude ETA Estimated time of arrival Flight Planning Page Density Alt TAS Winds To calculate density altitude true airspeed winds aloft 1 Select Density Alt TAS Winds from the Flight Planning Page Figure 10 17 using the steps described at the beginning of this section Figure 10 17 Density Alt TAS Winds Highlighted 2 The flashing cursor highlights the indicated altitude IND ALT field Use the small and large right knobs to enter the altitude indicated on the altimeter Press the ENT Key when finished 3 The flashing cursor moves to the calibrated airspeed CAS field Figure 1
52. Pages in Current Page Group Current Page Group The following descriptions and abbreviations are used Symbol See Section 3 4 for a graphic illustration of available VOR symbols VAR Magnetic variation in degrees Position Latitude Longitude degrees minutes or degrees minutes seconds MGRS or UTM UPS FREQ Frequency in megahertz MHz Wx Brdcst Weather information is broadcast on the selected facility s frequency As mentioned in Section 7 1 VORs may be selected by identifier facility name or location city The VOR Page may also be used to quickly tune the VLOC receiver to the selected VOR s frequency GNS 430 A Pilot s Guide and Reference 190 00140 00 Rev P 7 16 SECTION 7 WPT PAGES To select a VOR frequency from the VOR Page 1 Select the VOR Page from the WPT Page Group as described in Section 7 1 2 Press the small right knob momentarily to place the cursor on the VOR identifier field Figure 7 34 To select another VOR use the small and large right knobs and press the ENT Key when finished Figure 7 34 VOR Identifier Field Selected 3 Turn the large right knob to highlight the frequency field Figure 7 35 and press the ENT Key to place the frequency in the standby field of the VLOC Window Figure 7 35 Frequency Field Highlighted 4 To activate the standby VLOC frequency press the VLOC Flip flop Key Figure 7 36 Figure 7 36 Activate t
53. Press the small right knob to activate the cursor 2 Turn the large right knob to place the cursor on the airport identifier field top line on the NAV COM Page see Figure 3 33 3 Turn the small right knob to select the desired airport Figure 3 35 and press the ENT Key Figure 3 35 Airport Window GNS 430 A Pilot s Guide and Reference 190 00140 00 Rev P SECTION 3 NAV PAGES 3 18 To scroll through the list of frequencies 1 Activate the cursor if not already active by pressing the small right knob 2 Turn the large right knob to move the cursor through the list of frequencies If there are more frequencies in the list than can be displayed on the screen a scroll bar along the right hand side of the screen Figure 3 36 indicates which part of the list is currently being displayed Scroll Bar Figure 3 36 Scroll Bar 3 To place a frequency in the standby field of the COM or VLOC Window highlight the desired frequency and press the ENT Key Some listed frequencies may include designations for limited usage as follows TX Transmit only RX Receive only PT Part time frequency If a listed frequency has sector or altitude restrictions the frequency is preceded by an Info designation To view usage restrictions for a frequency 1 Turn the large right knob to place the cursor on the Info designation directly in front of the desired fre
54. Press the small right knob to activate the cursor 3 Turn the small right knob to scroll through the list selecting the desired FSS Figure 8 26 Figure 8 26 FSS Field Selected 4 Turn the large right knob to scroll down the page Figure 8 27 highlighting the desired frequency COM frequency ies or VOR frequency for duplex operation Figure 8 27 Frequency Field Highlighted GNS 430 A Pilot s Guide and Reference 190 00140 00 Rev P 8 11 SECTION 8 NRST PAGES 5 Press the ENT Key to place the selected frequency in the standby field of the COM or VLOC Window figure 8 28 Figure 8 28 Frequency Moved to Standby Field 6 Press the COM Flip flop or VLOC Flip flop Key as appropriate to activate the selected frequency 7 Press the small right knob to remove the flashing cursor 8 9 NEAREST AIRSPACE PAGE The last page in the NRST group the Nearest Airspace Page alerts the pilot to as many as nine controlled or special use airspaces near or in the flight path Alerts are provided according to the following conditions If the aircraft s projected course will take it inside an airspace within the next ten minutes the alert message Airspace ahead less than 10 minutes appears Figure 8 29 The Nearest Airspace Page shows the airspace as Ahead Figure 8 29 Airspace Messages If the aircraft is within two nautical miles of an airspace and the current course will take it insid
55. Rev P 1 15 SECTION 1 INTRODUCTION 4 For approaches a window appears Figure 1 23 to select the desired initial approach fix IAF or provide a vectors option to select just the final course segment of the approach Turn the small right knob to select the desired option and press the ENT Key The vectors option extends the final inbound course beyond the final approach fix allowing the pilot to intercept the final course segment beyond its normal limits Figure 1 23 Approach Window 5 For departures and arrivals a window appears to select the desired transition Turn the small right knob to select the desired option and press the ENT Key In the flight plan or direct to the departure or arrival airport is replaced with the sequence of waypoints contained within the selected procedure Nearest NRST Pages The NRST Page Group provides detailed information on the nine nearest airports VORs NDBs intersections and user created waypoints within 200 nm of the current position In addition pages are also provided to display the five nearest center ARTCC FIR and Flight Service Station FSS points of communication plus alert the pilot to any nearby special use or controlled airspaces There are eight pages available in the NRST group Nearest Airport Page Nearest NDB Page Nearest User Waypoint Page Nearest FSS Page Nearest Intersection Page Nearest VOR Page
56. SUSP annunciation appears directly above the OBS Key Figure C 3 to indicate that automatic waypoint sequencing is temporarily suspended and course selection is not available If more than one trip around the holding pattern is desired press the OBS Key to again suspend waypoint sequencing An example of this operation is an approach which begins with a holding pattern at the initial approach fix IAF See Section 6 2 Flying an Approach with a Hold for more information on the SUSP annunciation and approaches with holding patterns Figure C 3 SUSP Annunciation GNS 430 A Pilot s Guide and Reference 190 00140 00 Rev P APPENDIX C TROUBLESHOOTING C 4 When should I use the OBS key to return to auto sequencing and what happens when I do The most common application for using the OBS Key is the missed approach The GNS 430 suspends automatic waypoint sequencing indicated by a SUSP annunciation directly above the OBS Key see Figure C 4 when the aircraft crosses the missed approach point MAP This prevents the GNS 430 from automatically sequencing to the missed approach holding point MAHP If a missed approach is required press the OBS Key to return to automatic waypoint sequencing and sequence the approach to the MAHP See Section 6 2 Flying the Missed Approach for more information on missed approaches Figure C 4 SUSP Annunciation Why won t my unit automatically sequence to the next way
57. Select the TERRAIN Page and press the MENU Key Inhibit Terrain is selected by default Figure 11 6 Figure 11 6 TERRAIN Page Menu 2 Press the ENT Key The TER INHB annunciation is displayed in the TERRAIN annunciator field when TERRAIN is inhibited Figure 11 7 Annunciator Field Figure 11 7 Annunciator Field Enabling TERRAIN 1 Select the TERRAIN Page and press the MENU Key Enable Terrain is selected by default 2 Press the ENT Key The TERRAIN system is functional again GNS 430 A Pilot s Guide and Reference 190 00140 00 Rev P 11 8 SECTION 11 TERRAIN TERRAIN NOT AVAILABLE ALERT TERRAIN requires a 3 D GPS navigation solution along with specific vertical accuracy minimums Should the navigation solution become degraded or if the aircraft is out of the database coverage area the annunciation TER N A is generated in the annunciation window and TERRAIN NOT AVAILABLE is generated on the TERRAIN Page Figure 11 8 When the GPS signal is re established and the aircraft is within the database coverage area the TER N A visual annunciation is removed Figure 11 8 TERRAIN NOT AVAILABLE Display TERRAIN FAILURE ALERT TERRAIN continually monitors several system critical items such as database validity hardware status and GPS status If the terrain obstacle database is not available TER FAIL is generated in the annunciation window and TERRAIN has failed
58. The GNS 430 has detected a failure in its VLOC receiver The VLOC receiver is not available and the unit should be returned to a Garmin dealer for service GNS 430 A Pilot s Guide and Reference 190 00140 00 Rev P SECTION 14 MESSAGES ABBREVIATIONS amp NAV TERMS 14 8 VLOC is not responding Internal system to system communication between the main processor and the VLOC receiver has failed Operational status of the VLOC receiver is unknown and the unit should be returned to a Garmin dealer for service VLOC needs service The GNS 430 has detected a failure in its VLOC receiver The VLOC receiver may still be usable but the unit should be returned at the earliest convenience to a Garmin dealer for service VLOC remote transfer key is stuck The remote VLOC transfer switch is stuck in the enabled or pressed state Try pressing the switch again to cycle its operation If the message persists contact a Garmin dealer for assistance VLOC transfer key stuck The VLOC Flip flop Key is stuck in the enabled or pressed state Try pressing the VLOC Flip flop Key again to cycle its operation If the message persists contact a Garmin dealer for assistance Waypoint already exists The name just entered for a user waypoint already exists in memory Waypoint s have been replaced One or more user waypoints were updated during a unit to unit crossfill operation Waypoint memory is full The pilot has used all 100
59. Turn advisories C 5 Turn anticipation 14 7 C 5 U Units of measure 1 5 10 20 10 21 10 24 10 25 User waypoint list 7 22 7 23 7 24 User Waypoint Page 7 17 7 18 7 20 7 23 8 8 Utility Page 10 12 10 14 10 17 10 18 10 19 V Vectors to final 3 2 6 17 Vertical navigation 3 24 14 1 14 11 Vertical Navigation Page 1 10 VLOC audio 9 1 VLOC Flip flop Key 1 3 1 13 6 29 6 33 7 16 8 7 8 11 9 2 9 3 9 4 14 6 14 8 VLOC volume knob 1 3 9 1 VLOC window 1 9 1 13 2 2 3 18 6 26 6 28 7 7 7 16 8 7 8 11 9 1 9 3 9 4 Volume 1 3 1 5 2 1 9 1 VORs 1 11 1 15 3 10 3 15 4 2 7 1 7 15 8 1 8 2 8 7 VSR 3 3 3 26 14 11 14 13 W Waypoint alerts C 5 Waypoint list 7 22 7 23 7 24 Waypoint sequencing 3 2 6 12 6 24 14 1 C 2 C 3 C 4 Weather age graphic 12 34 Weather broadcast 7 15 Weather data link 12 1 12 11 Weather Legend Page 12 30 Winds aloft 10 1 10 2 10 3 10 7 Wind speed graphics 12 35 WPT Page Group 5 15 7 1 7 2 7 16 Garmin International Inc 1200 East 151st Street Olathe KS 66062 U S A p 913 397 8200 f 913 397 8282 Garmin AT Inc 2345 Turner Road SE Salem OR 97302 U S A p 503 391 3411 f 503 364 2138 Garmin Europe Ltd Liberty House Bulls Copse Road Hounsdown Business Park Abbey Park Industrial Estate Southampton SO40 9RB U K p 44 0 870 8501241 f 44 0 870 8501251 Garmin Corporation No 68 Jangshu 2nd Road Shijr Taipei County Taiwan p 886 2
60. a layout diagram for each approach and transition Figure 7 17 Airport Approach Page Airport Identifier Symbol and Type Map Image Approach Procedure Name Transitions IAF s Feeder Routes and Vectors to Final Position of Current Page within Current Page Group Number of Pages in Current Page Group Current Page Group To scroll through the available approaches and transitions 1 Press the small right knob to activate the cursor 2 Turn the large right knob to place the cursor on the approach APR procedure name field Figure 7 17 GNS 430 A Pilot s Guide and Reference 190 00140 00 Rev P 7 9 SECTION 7 WPT PAGES 3 Turn the small right knob to display a window of available approaches for the selected airport Figure 7 18 Continue turning the small right knob to select the desired approach Figure 7 18 Approach Window 4 Press the ENT Key The cursor moves to the transitions TRANS field 5 Turn the small right knob to display a window of available transitions Figure 7 19 Continue turning the small right knob to select the desired transition or select VECTORS for guidance only along the final course segment of the approach Figure 7 19 Transitions Window 6 Press the ENT Key To remove the flashing cursor press the small right knob NOTE Not all approaches in the database are approved for GPS use When selecting an approach a GPS designation to the righ
61. and getting started with the GNS 430 please check to see that the package includes the following items If any parts are missing or damaged please contact a Garmin dealer immediately Standard Package GNS 430 Unit NavData Card Terrain Data Card Installation Rack Connectors GPS Antenna Pilot s Guide Quick Reference Guide Database Subscription Packet Warranty Registration Card GNS 430 Simulator CD ROM The Garmin dealer installs and configures the GNS 430 The GNS 430 is secured in the installation rack with the proper wiring connections A Garmin dealer can answer questions about the installation such as location of antennas or any connections to other equipment in the panel After installation the NavData Card and the Terrain Data Card if applicable are installed into the correct slot on the front of the unit Appendix A NOTE Help Garmin provide better support by completing on line registration Registration ensures notification of product updates new products and provides for lost or stolen unit tracking Have the serial number of the GNS 430 available and connect to the website www garmin com Look for the product registration link on the home page GNS 430 A Pilot s Guide and Reference 190 00140 00 Rev P 1 2 SECTION 1 INTRODUCTION 1 2 KEy AND KNOB FUNCTIONS The GNS 430 is designed to make operation as simple as possible The
62. but does not affect the FOB figure and is not retained the next time the page is displayed Flight Planning Page Trip Planning To perform trip planning operations 1 Select Trip Planning from the Flight Planning Page using the steps described in this section 2 The current trip planning leg mode is displayed at the top of the page POINT TO POINT or FPL LEG for a flight plan leg To change the leg mode press the MENU Key to display the Flight Planning Page Menu for the other leg mode then press the ENT Key to accept the other leg mode 3 For point to point trip planning turn the small and large right knobs to enter the identifier of the from waypoint Once the waypoint s identifier is entered press the ENT Key to accept the waypoint The flashing cursor moves to the to waypoint Figure 10 14 Again turn the small and large right knobs to enter the identifier of the to waypoint and press the ENT Key to accept the waypoint OR Figure 10 14 Trip Planning Page Point to Point 4 For flight plan leg trip planning turn the small right knob to select the desired flight plan already stored in memory by number Turn the large right knob to highlight the LEG field Figure 10 15 and turn the small right knob to select the desired leg of the flight plan or select Cum to apply trip planning calculations to the entire flight plan Figure 10 15 Trip Planning
63. course When converging with the final approach course the needle moves toward the center In Figure 6 54 the needle has not yet returned to the on screen CDI since the current position is still 1 7 nm right of the final approach course Figure 6 54 CDI Off Scale GNS 430 A Pilot s Guide and Reference 190 00140 00 Rev P SECTION 6 PROCEDURES 6 20 DO NOT USE FOR NAVIGATION Figure 6 55 Approach Mode Refer to Figure 6 55 for the following steps 6 At 2 0 nm from the FAF TOP VOR the GNS 430 switches from terminal mode to approach mode Figure 6 56 CDI scaling is tightened from 1 0 to 0 3 nm full scale deflection Figure 6 56 Approach Mode 7 When approaching the FAF a waypoint alert NEXT DTK 214 appears in the lower right corner Figure 6 57 Figure 6 57 Waypoint Alert 8 When crossing the FAF the destination sequences to the MAP RW22 9 When approaching the MAP a waypoint alert APPRCHING WPT appears in the lower right corner 10 After crossing the MAP SUSP appears above the OBS Key Figure 6 58 indicating that automatic sequencing of approach waypoints is suspended at the MAP A from indication is displayed on the CDI and Default NAV Page but course guidance along the final approach course continues Do not follow this extended course Follow published missed approach procedures using the OBS Key to initiate the
64. data received New NEXRAD Received New Graphic METAR Received New Text METAR Received GNS 430 A Pilot s Guide and Reference 190 00140 00 Rev P 12 23 SECTION 12 ADDITIONAL FEATURES Displaying NEXRAD Data on the Weather Page To display NEXRAD Data on the Weather Page 1 Select the NAV Weather Page Figure 12 34 using the small and large right knobs When the GNS 430 unit is configured with the Data Link interface the Weather Page is the third page in the NAV Page Group it is the fourth page if a traffic sensor is also configured Figure 12 34 NEXRAD Data on Weather Page 2 Press the small right knob The upper left hand corner field flashes 3 Turn small right knob and select NEXRAD 4 Press the small right knob Customizing NEXRAD Data on the Weather Page The pilot can customize the NEXRAD data on the Weather Page from the Page Options Menu Customizing the NEXRAD data on the Weather Page 1 From the Weather Page press the MENU Key to display the NAV Weather Page Options Menu 2 Select from the following options to customize the NEXRAD data View 120 View 360 There are two viewing options available each shown relative to the position of the aircraft When the MENU Key is pressed the alternate selection is shown Use this option to switch between a radar like 120 display of the data and the default 360 display Request NEXRAD Requ
65. dimmed to reduce the temperature Check for adequate ventilation or check cooling air flow Contact a Garmin dealer for assistance COM has failed Internal system to system communication between the main processor and the COM transceiver has failed COM is not responding Internal system to system communication between the main processor and the COM transceiver has failed Operational status of the COM transceiver is unknown and the unit should be returned to a Garmin dealer for service COM needs service The GNS 430 has detected a failure in its communications transceiver The COM transceiver may still be usable but the unit should be returned at the earliest convenience to a Garmin dealer for service COM push to talk key stuck The external push to talk PTT switch is stuck in the enabled or pressed state Try pressing the PTT switch again to cycle its operation If the message persists contact a Garmin dealer for assistance COM remote transfer key is stuck The remote COM transfer switch is stuck in the enabled or pressed state Try pressing the switch again to cycle its operation If the message persists contact a Garmin dealer for assistance COM transfer key stuck The COM Flip flop Key is stuck in the enabled or pressed state Try pressing the COM Flip flop Key again to cycle its operation If the message persists contact a Garmin dealer for assistance GNS 430 A Pilot s Guide and Reference 190 00140
66. field Figure 10 75 Figure 10 75 Contrast Mode Field Highlighted 3 Turn the small right knob to select the desired mode Auto or Manual Press the ENT Key to accept the selection 4 If Manual is selected the flashing cursor moves to the contrast level field Turn the small right knob to select the desired level Press the ENT Key to accept the selection Setup 2 Page Nearest Airport Criteria To set the minimum runway length and runway surface 1 Select Nearest Airport Criteria from the Setup 2 Page using the steps described at the beginning of this section 2 The flashing cursor highlights the runway surface field Figure 10 76 Turn the small right knob to select the desired surface The following options are available Any surface Hard surfaces only Hard or Soft surfaces Water landings only Figure 10 76 Surface Type Window 3 Press the ENT Key to accept the runway surface selection GNS 430 A Pilot s Guide and Reference 190 00140 00 Rev P 10 30 SECTION 10 AUX PAGES 4 The flashing cursor moves to the minimum runway length field Figure 10 77 To enter a different minimum runway length use the small and large right knobs to enter the desired length Press the ENT Key when finished Figure 10 77 Minimum Runway Length Field Selected Setup 2 Page COM Configuration To set the COM channel spacing 1 Select COM Configuration from the Setup 2
67. have a squat switch the Standby Screen is displayed Figure 12 21 If the GTS 8XX fails the power up test as indicated by a FAILED screen the GTS 8XX is inoperable see the GTS 8XX Installation Manual for detailed information on Failure Response NOTE The FAILED message is displayed when the system detects an error that prohibits further traffic display operation NOTE When the system is in standby the GTS 8XX does not transmit interrogate or track intruder aircraft Figure 12 21 Standby Mode User initiated Test In addition to the power up test the GTS 8XX performs self tests during normal operation A self test is performed once per minute to verify that the antenna is connected Also a calibration is performed at varying intervals based on time and temperature A user initiated test of the GTS 8XX interface can also be performed The test criteria are identical to the power up self test although the user initiated test is concluded by an aural pass fail message NOTE A user initiated test can only be performed when in standby or failed mode Performing a user initiated test 1 Turn the small right knob to select the Traffic Page 2 From the Traffic Page press the MENU Key to display the Page Menu 3 Turn the small right knob to select Self Test 4 Press the ENT Key TEST is displayed Figure 12 22 Self Test Mode GNS 430 A Pilot s Guide and Reference 190 00140 00 Rev
68. identifier facility name or location is entered all six airport pages display information for the selected airport When entering an identifier facility name or location the GNS 430 s Spell N Find feature scrolls through the database displaying those waypoints matching the characters that have been entered to that point If duplicate entries exist for the entered facility name or location additional entries may be viewed by continuing to turn the small right knob during the selection process If duplicate entries exist for an entered identifier a Duplicate Waypoint Window appears when the identifier is selected by pressing the ENT Key To select a facility name or location where duplicate entries exist 1 Select the desired facility name or location following the preceding steps under To enter a waypoint facility name or city location 2 When spelling the facility name or location using the small and large right knobs the GNS 430 s Spell N Find feature selects the first entry Figure 7 5 in the database based upon the characters entered up to that point Figure 7 5 First Facility for Albuquerque 3 Continue turning the small right knob to scroll through any additional database listings Figure 7 6 for the selected facility name or location Scroll backwards with the small right knob if the desired facility name or location has been scrolled past Figure 7 6 Second Facility for Albuquerque
69. in the flight plan Continue turning the small right knob to select the desired airport Figure 2 8 NAV COM Page Airport Window 4 Press the ENT Key to return to the NAV COM Page with the frequencies for the selected airport 5 Turn the large right knob to highlight the desired frequency 6 Press the ENT Key to place the highlighted frequency in the standby COM Window field GNS 430 A Pilot s Guide and Reference 190 00140 00 Rev P 2 5 SECTION 2 COM To select a COM frequency for any airport in the database 1 Turn the large right knob to select the WPT Page Group 2 Turn the small right knob to select the Airport Frequencies Page Figure 2 9 Figure 2 9 Airport Frequencies Page 3 Press the small right knob to place the cursor on the airport identifier field 4 Use the small and large right knobs to enter the identifier of the desired airport Press the ENT Key when finished 5 Turn the large right knob to highlight the desired frequency 6 Press the ENT Key to place the highlighted frequency in the standby COM Window field Emergency Channel The GNS 430 s emergency channel select provides a quick method of selecting 121 500 MHz as the active frequency in the event of an in flight emergency Emergency channel select is available anytime the unit is on regardless of GPS or cursor status or loss of the display To quickly tune and activate 121 500 Press and hold the C
70. is used while flying 1 outbound and on the initial portion of the procedure turn VLOC guidance is used on the remainder 2 of the approach from the time the pilot turns inbound on the procedure turn The localizer 3 frequency must be active to use VLOC guidance When flying a localizer based approach with automatic CDI switching disabled The pilot may select VLOC guidance 1 at any point on the approach prior to reaching the FAF The localizer 2 frequency must be active to use VLOC guidance GNS 430 A Pilot s Guide and Reference 190 00140 00 Rev P SECTION 6 PROCEDURES 6 34 Blank Page GNS 430 A Pilot s Guide and Reference 190 00140 00 Rev P 7 1 SECTION 7 WPT PAGES SECTION 7 WPT PAGES 7 1 WPT PAGE GROUP Section 3 1 introduced the GNS 430 s main page groups Table 7 1 NAV WPT AUX NRST and described each page in the NAV group This second page group WPT provides information for the thousands of airports VORs NDBs intersections runways frequencies and procedures stored on the Jeppesen NavData Card A WPT page is also provided to display information for up to 1 000 user created waypoints Page Groups NAV Group WPT Group AUX Group NRST Group see Section 3 10 WPT Pages see Section 10 see Section 8 Table 7 1 Page Groups Figure 7 1 WPT Pages Airport Location Airport Runway Airport Frequency Airport Approach Airport Arrival Airport Dep
71. large right knob to scroll through the list highlighting the frequency associated with the desired VOR Figure 8 18 4 Press the ENT Key to place the selected frequency in the standby field of the VLOC Window Figure 8 19 Figure 8 19 Move Frequency to Standby Field 5 Press the VLOC Flip flop Key to activate the selected frequency 6 Press the small right knob to remove the flashing cursor GNS 430 A Pilot s Guide and Reference 190 00140 00 Rev P 8 8 SECTION 8 NRST PAGES To view additional information for a nearby VOR 1 Select the nearest VOR Page using the steps outlined in Section 8 1 2 Press the small right knob to activate the cursor 3 Turn the large right knob to scroll through the list highlighting the identifier of the desired VOR Figure 8 20 Figure 8 20 Nearest VOR Page 4 Press the ENT Key to display the VOR Page for the selected VOR 5 To return to the nearest VOR Page verify that Done is highlighted by the flashing cursor and press the ENT Key or press the CLR Key 6 Press the small right knob to remove the flashing cursor 8 6 NEAREST USER WAyPOINT PAGE The Nearest User Waypoint Page Figure 8 21 displays the name bearing and distance to the nine nearest user waypoints within 200 nm of the present position Figure 8 21 Nearest User Waypoint Page Bearing To and Distance To Current Page Group Waypoint Identifier and Symbol Position o
72. message 14 6 Scroll bar 1 4 3 18 8 4 8 7 GNS 430 A Pilot s Guide and Reference 190 00140 00 Rev P I 4 INDEX Select approach 1 14 5 11 6 1 6 4 6 9 7 10 9 3 C 6 Select Arrival 1 14 5 12 6 1 Select Departure 1 14 5 12 6 1 Self test 1 5 Setup 1 Page 10 20 10 22 10 24 10 25 10 26 Setup 2 Page 10 27 10 28 10 29 Shortcuts 4 4 5 14 SIDs 1 14 13 2 Signal strength 1 8 3 22 3 23 Sky view 3 22 Software database version 10 12 Sort list 5 8 10 15 Specifications v B 1 Squelch 2 1 14 11 Standby frequency 1 9 2 2 7 16 8 9 8 11 STARs 1 14 13 2 Stuck microphone 2 5 Sunrise sunset times 10 18 SUSP 6 8 6 11 6 13 6 17 6 20 6 22 6 25 6 32 14 1 C 3 C 4 Symbols 3 2 3 5 3 16 7 15 T Target pointer 3 7 3 8 7 19 TAS Traffic Advisory System 12 11 TCAS 12 11 Temp dew point ranges 12 36 TERMS 14 1 TERRAIN i 1 10 3 14 3 15 3 16 11 1 11 5 11 7 Terrain separation iv Thumbnail traffic 12 9 Timers 10 12 10 15 TIS 12 11 Track 1 6 1 11 1 12 3 3 3 6 3 10 3 12 3 13 3 19 3 23 5 8 6 15 6 23 6 25 6 30 6 33 10 3 10 7 10 21 14 7 14 12 14 13 Track TRK C 6 Traffic advisory 12 4 Traffic coasting 12 6 Traffic Page 12 5 Traffic Warning Window 12 7 Transitions 5 11 5 12 6 1 6 5 6 10 6 18 7 8 7 9 7 11 7 13 9 3 14 3 C 5 Trip planning 10 1 10 2 10 3 10 6 Trip statistics 10 12 10 17 True airspeed 10 1 10 2 10 3 10 7 Tuning cursor 1 3 1 9 2 1 2 2 9 1
73. missed approach sequence as outlined in this section Figure 6 58 Final Approach GNS 430 A Pilot s Guide and Reference 190 00140 00 Rev P SECTION 6 PROCEDURES 6 21 Course From Fix Flight Plan Legs Certain approach departure and arrival procedures in the Jeppesen database contain course from fix flight plan legs The GNS 430 is able to load these legs into the flight plan along with the rest of the procedure data and provide navigation along these legs There are three different types of course from fix legs Course from fix to distance or Course from fix to DME distance Course from fix to altitude Course from fix to manual sequence Course from fix to distance legs appear in the flight plan like normal waypoints but the destination name always begins with a D followed by a distance in nm from the waypoint fix Figure 6 59 Figure 6 59 Active Flight Plan Page DO NOT USE FOR NAVIGATION Palmdale CA AF Plant 42 VOR DME or GPS Rwy 25 Figure 6 60 KPMD Approach This example uses the VOR DME RWY 25 approach into Palmdale California KPMD and includes a teardrop course reversal refer to Figure 6 60 for the following steps 1 At the initial approach fix PMD a waypoint alert NEXT DTK 070 appears in the lower right corner of the screen As the distance to the IAF approaches zero the alert is replaced by a turn a
74. of a special use airspace boundary but the aircraft is not projected to enter the airspace This message is automatically disabled within 30 nm of an arrival airport when an approach is loaded Need altitude display position page The GPS receiver needs altitude input in order to start and or continue 2D navigation Select the Position Page and verify the altitude reading If the altitude is in error by more than 500 feet enter the current altitude as accurately as possible An inaccurate altitude directly translate into inaccurate position information No altitude input is being received No altitude data is being received from RS 232 Serializer Icarus Rosetta or Shadin or grey code inputs If the problem persists contact a Garmin dealer and check the installation and installation settings When this message occurs no pilot action is required if enough satellites are available for a 3D position fix provided no RAIM warnings are present However if only a 2D position fix is possible the pilot should maintain the GPS altitude within 1 000 feet of pressure altitude by entering the altitude on the Position Page No basemap data available The GNS 430 has detected a failure in the built in basemap land data memory Land data does not appear on the Map Page Other unit functions continue to work normally however the GNS 430 should be taken to a Garmin dealer for service at the earliest convenience Not receiving input data on 4
75. plan 1 Press the small right knob to highlight the airport identifier field 2 Turn the small right knob to display the list of airports within the flight plan Figure 1 21 Figure 1 21 Airport Window 3 Continue turning the small right knob to select the desired airport and press the ENT Key IFR Procedures Once the direct to or flight plan is confirmed the whole range of instrument procedures is available Departures SIDs arrivals STARs and non precision and precision approaches are stored within the NavData Card and are available using the PROC procedures Key To display the Procedures Page Figure 1 22 press the PROC Key Figure 1 22 Procedures Page The steps required to select and activate an approach departure or arrival are identical This introductory section shows examples of the steps required to select an approach but keep in mind the same process also applies to departures and arrivals To select an approach departure or arrival 1 Turn the large right knob to select the desired option Select Approach Select Arrival or Select Departure from the Procedures Page 2 Press the ENT Key to display a list of available procedures for the arrival when using approaches or STARs or departure when using SIDs airport 3 Turn the small right knob to select the desired procedure and press the ENT Key GNS 430 A Pilot s Guide and Reference 190 00140 00
76. published standard terminal arrival route STAR for the destination airport or replace the current arrival with a new selection Section 6 1 for information on selecting arrivals using the PROC Key Select Departure Allows the pilot to select a published standard instrument departure SID for the departure airport or replace the current departure with a new selection When using a direct to the GNS 430 uses the nearest airport as a reference when displaying available departures See Section 6 1 for information on selecting departures using the PROC Key Remove Approach Deletes the currently selected approach from the active flight plan Remove Arrival Deletes the current STAR from the active flight plan Remove Departure Deletes the current SID from the active flight plan Closest Point of FPL Calculates the bearing and closest distance that a flight plan passes from a reference waypoint May also be used to create a new user waypoint along the flight plan at the location closest to the reference waypoint Change Fields Allows the pilot to select the desired data items to display on the Active Flight Plan Page as described in this Section Restore Defaults Returns the data items to factory defaults as described in this Section Table 5 1 Active Flight Plan Page Menu Options GNS 430 A Pilot s Guide and Reference 190 00140 00 Rev P 5 10 SECTION 5 FLIGHT PLANS The data fields for DTK and DIS are user selectable
77. result of flying directly over the radar site providing coverage cone of silence Figure 12 12 UNAVAIL Message Traffic Warning Window When the unit is on any page other than the NAV Traffic Page and a traffic threat is imminent the Traffic Warning Window is displayed Figure 12 13 The Traffic Warning Window shows a small thumbnail map which can take the user to the Traffic Page by pressing the ENT Key or go back to the previous page by pressing the CLR Key Figure 12 13 Traffic Warning Window NOTE The Traffic Warning Window is disabled when the aircraft ground speed is less than 30 knots or when an approach is active Non Bearing Traffic Advisory TA Banner Traffic is only displayed graphically if aircraft heading data is available When heading is not available Traffic Advisories are displayed as non bearing banners The banner shown in Figure 12 14 consists of left to right Figure 12 14 Non Bearing TA Banner Non Bearing Traffic Advisory Banner The TA annunciation The distance in miles 1 5 from the client aircraft s present position to the intruder aircraft A or symbol indicating whether the intruder aircraft is above or below the client aircraft The difference in altitude 04 shown in hundreds of feet between the intruder aircraft and the client aircraft An up or down arrow indicating that the intruder aircraf
78. right knob to activate the cursor 2 Use the small and large right knobs to enter a name for the new waypoint and press the ENT Key 3 Turn the large right knob to highlight the first reference waypoint REF WPT field 4 Use the small and large right knobs to enter the identifier of the reference waypoint The reference waypoint can be an airport VOR NDB intersection or another user waypoint Press the ENT Key to accept the selected identifier 5 The cursor moves to the radial RAD field Figure 7 41 Use the small and large right knobs to enter the radial from the reference waypoint to the new user waypoint Press the ENT Key to accept the selected radial Figure 7 41 Radial Field Highlighted 6 The cursor moves to the distance DIS field Use the small and large right knobs to enter the distance from the reference waypoint to the new user waypoint Press the ENT Key to accept the selected distance GNS 430 A Pilot s Guide and Reference 190 00140 00 Rev P 7 19 SECTION 7 WPT PAGES 7 Turn the large right knob to highlight Create Figure 7 42 and press the ENT Key Figure 7 42 Create Highlighted 8 Press the small right knob to remove the flashing cursor NOTE The GNS 430 allows the pilot to create a new user waypoint at a defined radial and distance from the present position To reference the present position follow the preceding steps but press the CLR Key in Step 4 P P
79. settings from 500 feet to 2000 nautical miles statute and metric units are also available The range is indicated in the lower left hand corner of the Map Display Figure 3 8 and represents the top to bottom distance covered by the Map Display GNS 430 A Pilot s Guide and Reference 190 00140 00 Rev P SECTION 3 NAV PAGES 3 6 To select a map range 1 Press the up arrow of the RNG Key to zoom out to a larger map area 2 Press the down arrow of the RNG Key to zoom in to a smaller map area and more detail An autozoom feature is available which automatically adjusts from an enroute range of 2000 nm through each lower range stopping at a range of 1 0 nm when approaching the destination waypoint The autozoom feature is turned on off from the Map Setup Page described in Section 3 4 The Map Page also displays a background map or basemap showing lakes rivers coastlines highways railways and towns When a map range is selected below the lower limit at which the map detail was originally created an overzoom indication appears on the Map Display below the range reading Figure 3 9 The basemap has limited accuracy and should not be used for navigation but only for non navigational situational awareness Any basemap indication should be compared against other navigational sources for accuracy Continuing to zoom in to lower range settings will cause overzoom to be replaced with no map
80. the GNS 430 for airports and cities Large airports are those with a runway longer than 8100 feet Medium airports include those with a runway longer than 5000 feet or with a control tower Large cities are those with approximate populations greater than 200 000 and medium cities with greater than 50 000 To change map orientation 1 From the Map Page Menu turn the large right knob to highlight Setup Map Figure 3 16 and press the ENT Key 2 Turn the small right knob to select Map Figure 3 17 and press the ENT Key Figure 3 17 Map Setup Window 3 Turn the large right knob to highlight the Orientation field 4 Turn the small right knob to select the desired option a Select DTK up to fix the top of the Map Display to the desired course b Select North up to fix the top of the Map Display to a north heading c Select Track up Figure 3 18 to adjust the top of the Map Display to the current track heading Figure 3 18 Orientation Window GNS 430 A Pilot s Guide and Reference 190 00140 00 Rev P SECTION 3 NAV PAGES 3 11 5 Press the ENT Key to accept the selected option Figure 3 19 Figure 3 19 Map Setup Page The automatic zoom feature automatically adjusts the map range from 2000 nm through each lower range stopping at 1 0 nm when approaching the destination waypoint To enable disable automatic zoom 1 From the Map Page Menu turn the large
81. the Nearest Airport Page A minimum runway length and or surface type may be entered to prevent airports with small runways or runways that are not of appropriate surface from being displayed The default settings are 0 feet or meters for runway length and any for runway surface type COM Configuration Allows selection of 8 33 kHz or 25 0 kHz COM frequency channel spacing NOTE 8 33 kHz VHF communication frequency channel spacing is not approved for use in the United States Setup 2 Page Display To change the backlighting intensity 1 Select Display from the Setup 2 Page Figure 10 73 using the steps described at the beginning of this section 10 5 Figure 10 73 Display Highlighted 2 The flashing cursor highlights the backlight mode field Turn the small right knob to select the desired mode Auto or Manual Figure 10 74 Press the ENT Key to accept the selection GNS 430 A Pilot s Guide and Reference 190 00140 00 Rev P 10 29 SECTION 10 AUX PAGES Figure 10 74 Backlight Mode Window 3 If Manual is selected the flashing cursor moves to the backlight level field Turn the small right knob to select the desired level Press the ENT Key to accept the selection To change the display contrast 1 Select Display from the Setup 2 Page using the steps described at the beginning of this section 2 Turn the large right knob to highlight the contrast mode
82. the active flight plan the GNS 430 alerts the pilot with the Can t change an active waypoint or Waypoint is active and can t be deleted message The pilot must first cancel the direct to or remove the waypoint s from the active flight plan before modifying or deleting the waypoint s GNS 430 A Pilot s Guide and Reference 190 00140 00 Rev P 7 22 SECTION 7 WPT PAGES User Waypoint Page Options The following User Waypoint Page options are available by pressing the MENU Key View User Waypoint List displays a list of all user waypoints currently stored in memory To view a list of all user waypoints 1 From the User Waypoint Page press the MENU Key to display the User Waypoint Page Menu 2 Turn the large right knob to highlight View User Waypoint List Figure 7 49 and press the ENT Key Figure 7 49 User Waypoint Page Menu 3 The top of the User Waypoint List indicates the total number of user waypoints currently used and available memory Figure 7 50 If more user waypoints are stored than can be displayed on a single screen turn the large right knob to scroll through the User Waypoint List Figure 7 50 User Waypoint List Page 4 Press the small right knob to return to the User Waypoint Page Delete User Waypoint allows the pilot to delete the selected waypoint from memory To delete a user waypoint 1 Select the desired waypoint on the User Waypoint P
83. the screen recommends entry procedures for the holding pattern i e HOLD DIRECT HOLD PARALLEL or HOLD TEARDROP see Figure 6 22 When flying the holding pattern a timer appears on the Default NAV Page Figure 6 23 The timer automatically resets on the outbound side of the hold when the aircraft is abeam the hold waypoint The timer again resets as the aircraft turns inbound within approximately 30 of the inbound course This allows the pilot to use standard timing typically one minute to fly the inbound and outbound legs of the hold Figure 6 22 Hold Teardrop Annunciation Figure 6 23 Hold Timer 4 The GNS 430 provides course guidance only on the inbound side of the holding pattern When leaving the holding pattern to re fly the approach or another approach press the PROC Key to Select Approach or Activate Approach as previously described Or use the Direct to Key to select another destination GNS 430 A Pilot s Guide and Reference 190 00140 00 Rev P SECTION 6 PROCEDURES 6 10 Flying an Approach with a Hold Starting where the previous example left off assume weather conditions resulted in a missed approach at Lynchburg Regional The pilot has decided to divert to Farmville Regional KFVX instead refer to Figure 6 24 for the following steps Figure 6 24 Approach with Hold DO NOT USE FOR NAVIGATION 1 Press the Direct to Key 2
84. the selected option 6 Turn the large right knob to highlight the text field for the desired feature 7 Turn the small right knob to select the desired text size or select None to disable text descriptions 8 Press the ENT Key to accept the selected option GNS 430 A Pilot s Guide and Reference 190 00140 00 Rev P SECTION 3 NAV PAGES 3 12 To display airspace boundaries highways roads railroad lines track log data active flight plan course lines and lat long grid lines 1 From the Map Page Menu turn the large right knob to highlight Setup Map and press the ENT Key 2 Turn the small right knob to select the appropriate Group name per the table on the preceding page and press the ENT Key 3 Turn the large right knob to highlight the zoom field for the desired feature 4 Turn the small right knob to select the maximum range at which the feature should appear on screen or select Off to never display the selected feature 5 Press the ENT Key to accept the selected option Distance Measurements The Measure Dist option provides a quick easy method for determining the bearing and distance between any two points on the Map Display To measure bearing and distance between two points 1 From the Map Page Menu turn the large right knob to highlight Measure Dist Figure 3 20 Figure 3 20 Map Page Menu 2 Press the ENT Key an on screen refer
85. then press the ENT Key twice 2 If a list of waypoints is displayed on screen press the small right knob to activate the cursor 3 Turn the large right knob to highlight the desired waypoint 4 Press the Direct to Key followed by the ENT Key twice GNS 430 A Pilot s Guide and Reference 190 00140 00 Rev P 4 5 SECTION 4 DIRECT TO NAVIGATION Selecting a Direct to destination from the Map Page Direct to destinations may also be selected from the Map Page If no airport NAVAID or user waypoint exists at the desired location a waypoint named MAP is automatically created at the location of the panning pointer To select a direct to destination from the Map Page 1 From the Map Page press the small right knob to display a panning pointer 2 Turn the small and large right knobs to place the panning pointer at the desired destination location 3 If the panning pointer is placed on an existing airport NAVAID or user waypoint the waypoint name is highlighted Figure 4 11 Press the Direct to Key and the ENT Key twice to navigate to the waypoint Figure 4 11 Panning Pointer Placed on Waypoint 4 If the panning pointer is placed on an open location press the Direct to Key then press the ENT Key twice to create a MAP waypoint and navigate to it Cancelling Direct to Navigation Once a direct to is activated the GNS 430 provides navigation guidance to the selected destination
86. to 1 0 nm and gradually ramps UP to 5 nm beyond 30 nm from the departure airport GNS 430 A Pilot s Guide and Reference 190 00140 00 Rev P 10 21 SECTION 10 AUX PAGES CDI Scales and Corresponding Flight Phases Oceanic Enroute Terminal Approach Figure 10 54 CDI Scales During approach operations the CDI scale gradually ramps down even further to 0 3 nm This transition normally occurs within 2 0 nm of the final approach fix FAF If a lower CDI scale setting is selected i e 1 0 nm or 0 3 nm the higher scale settings are not selected during any phase of flight For example if 1 0 nm is selected the GNS 430 uses this for the enroute and terminal phase and ramp down to 0 3 nm during an approach Note that the Receiver Autonomous Integrity Monitoring RAIM protection limits listed in Table 10 2 follow the selected CDI scale and corresponding modes CDI Scale Flight Phase RAIM Protection Auto oceanic 4 0 nm 5 0 nm or Auto enroute 2 0 nm 1 0 nm or Auto terminal 1 0 nm 0 3 nm or Auto approach 0 3 nm Table 10 2 CDI Scales An auto ILS CDI selection allows the GNS 430 to automatically switch the external CDI from the GPS receiver to the VLOC receiver when established on the final approach course Section 6 3 Or select manual to manually switch the external CDI connection as needed An arrival alarm provided on the CDI Alarms Page may be set to notify the pilot
87. 0 18 Use the small and large right knobs to enter the airspeed from the airspeed indicator Press the ENT Key when finished Figure 10 18 Calibrated Airspeed Field Selected GNS 430 A Pilot s Guide and Reference 190 00140 00 Rev P 10 8 SECTION 10 AUX PAGES 4 The flashing cursor moves to the barometric pressure BARO field Use the small and large right knobs to enter the barometric pressure altimeter setting Press the ENT Key when finished 5 The flashing cursor moves to the total air temperature TAT field Use the small and large right knobs to enter the temperature Press the ENT Key when finished 6 The flashing cursor moves to the aircraft heading HDG field Use the small and large right knobs to enter the aircraft heading Figure 10 19 from the directional gyro or compass Press the ENT Key when finished Figure 10 19 Heading Field Highlighted 7 With all variables entered the following information is provided DEN ALT Density altitude TAS True airspeed WIND Wind direction and speed HEAD TAIL WIND Magnitude of head wind or tail wind component NOTE If the installation includes components such as an airdata sensor to provide any of the variables above the Density Alt TAS Winds Page data defaults to the values provided by these components Flight Planning Page Crossfill Select Crossfill from the Flight Planning Page Figure 10 20 the Default N
88. 0 Active Flight Plan Page Menu GNS 430 A Pilot s Guide and Reference 190 00140 00 Rev P 5 9 SECTION 5 FLIGHT PLANS Active Flight Plan Page Menu Options Activate Leg Activates reactivates the flight plan and selects the highlighted leg as the active leg the leg which is currently used for navigation guidance Crossfill Allows the pilot to transfer the active flight plan between two 400 or 500 series Garmin units in a dual unit installation See Section 10 2 Flight Planning Crossfill for additional information on this feature Copy Flight Plan Copies the active flight plan to a flight plan catalog location as described previously in this section The copy function is useful for duplicating the active flight plan before making changes Invert Flight Plan Reverses the active flight plan See Section 5 1 Activating Flight Plans and Inverting Flight Plans Delete Flight Plan Allows the pilot to remove all waypoints from the selected flight plan as described previously in this section Deleting a flight plan does not delete the waypoints contained in the flight plan from the database or user waypoint memory Select Approach Allows the pilot to select a published instrument approach for the destination airport or replace the current approach with a new selection In many cases it is convenient to select approaches using the PROC Key as described in Section 6 1 Select Arrival Allows the pilot to select a
89. 0 series unit 4 Continue turning the small right knob to select the desired data option Press the ENT Key when finished 5 For a stored flight plan Flight Plan data option the flight plan number field is highlighted Turn the small right knob to select the desired flight plan and press the ENT Key 6 For a specified user waypoint User Waypoint data option the waypoint identifier field is highlighted Use the small and large right knobs to enter the identifier of the desired user waypoint Press the ENT Key when finished 7 The flashing cursor moves to the CROSS SIDE field Turn the small right knob to select To or From and press the ENT Key 8 The flashing cursor moves to the Initiate Transfer confirmation field Figure 10 26 Press the ENT Key to transfer the selected data Figure 10 26 Initiate Transfer Highlighted Flight Planning Page Scheduler To enter a scheduled message 1 Select Scheduler from the Flight Planning Page using the steps described in this section 2 The flashing cursor highlights the first message field If necessary turn the large right knob to highlight the first blank message field 3 Use the small and large right knobs to enter the message text Press the ENT Key when finished The GNS 430 stores up to nine scheduled messages holding 20 characters each GNS 430 A Pilot s Guide and Reference 190 00140 00 Rev P 10
90. 0 user waypoint locations in the GNS 430 s memory Delete unwanted waypoint to make room for new entries GNS 430 A Pilot s Guide and Reference 190 00140 00 Rev P SECTION 14 MESSAGES ABBREVIATIONS amp NAV TERMS 14 9 14 2 ABBREVIATIONS The following is a list of abbreviations used on the GNS 430 and their meanings ACTV Active ALT Altitude APPRCHING Approaching APR Approach APT Airport ARSPC Airspace ARTCC Air Route Traffic Control Center ARVL Arrival AUX Auxiliary AVGAS Aviation Grade Gasoline AVTN Aviation BARO Barometric Pressure BRG Bearing To C Degree Celsius C V COM VLOC CAS Calibrated Airspeed CDI Course Deviation Indicator CLR Clear COM Communications Transceiver CRSR Cursor CTA ICAO Control Area CTAF Common Traffic Advisory Frequency CTR Center ARTCC CTS Course To Steer CUM Cumulative DB Database DEN Density DEP Departure DIS Distance DME Distance Measuring Equipment DOP Dilution of Precision DTK Desired Track EFF Efficiency ELEV Elevation ENDUR Endurance ENR Enroute ENT Enter EPE Estimated Position Error ESA Enroute Safe Altitude ETA Estimated Time of Arrival ETE Estimated Time Enroute F Degrees Fahrenheit FDE Fault Detection and Exclusion FF Fuel Flow FLOW Total Fuel Flow FOB Fuel On Board FPL Flight Plan fpm Feet Per Minute FREQ Fr
91. 00 Rev P SECTION 14 MESSAGES ABBREVIATIONS amp NAV TERMS 14 3 COM transmitter power has been reduced The GNS 430 has detected excessive unit temperature and or an insufficient voltage level The COM transceiver transmit power has been automatically reduced to compensate for the condition For excessive temperatures check for adequate ventilation or check cooling air flow If the message persists contact a Garmin dealer for assistance Data card failure The GNS 430 has detected a problem with the NavData Card The data is not usable and the card should be returned to Jeppesen or a Garmin dealer Data transfer cancelled crossfill is busy An attempt to transfer flight plan data during a unit to unit crossfill was cancelled The host unit is busy or unable to communicate Wait until any previous crossfill operation is complete before attempting the transfer again Data transfer cancelled data invalid An attempt to transfer a single user waypoint during a unit to unit crossfill was cancelled No waypoint was specified on the Crossfill Page Select a user waypoint and attempt the transfer again Data transfer cancelled version mismatch An attempt to transfer data during a unit to unit crossfill was cancelled The database versions of the two GNS 430s are not identical If necessary update the database s so they match Contact Jeppesen or your Garmin dealer for assistance Data transfer error please re trans
92. 00 Rev P SECTION 6 PROCEDURES 6 25 Refer to Figure 6 68 for the following steps 1 Select the departure CSTL1 from the Procedures Page then select the departure runway RW02 in this example see Figure 6 69 and transition GEDIC Refer to Section 6 1 for instructions on selecting departures Figure 6 69 Runway Window 2 When departing the airfield NEXT DTK 026 appears in the lower right corner of the screen and SUSP appears directly above the OBS Key which indicates the aircraft is now on the course from fix to manual sequence leg The distance displayed on the Active Flight Plan Page the Default NAV Page Figure 6 70 and the Map Page is FROM the waypoint fix the departure runway in this example Figure 6 70 Default NAV Page 3 Fly the outbound course When cleared to sequence to the next leg press the OBS Key Confirm that SUSP no longer appears directly above the OBS Key An alert NEXT DTK 186 appears in the lower right corner of the screen Figure 6 71 to provide guidance to the next waypoint HFD VOR The actual desired track DTK depends on ground speed and distance from HFD VOR Figure 6 71 Waypoint Alert 4 When the OBS Key is pressed the GNS 430 automatically sequences to each waypoint along the remainder of the departure route including the selected transition GNS 430 A Pilot s Guide and Reference 190 00140 00 Rev P SECTION 6 PROCEDURES 6 2
93. 1 Select Direct to Waypoint Page 2 Use the small and large right knobs to enter the identifier of the desired destination waypoint Figure 4 2 Figure 4 2 Waypoint Identifier Field Selected 3 Press the ENT Key to confirm the selected waypoint and press the ENT Key again to activate the direct to function Figure 4 3 Figure 4 3 Activate Field Highlighted When off course while navigating to a waypoint the direct to function may also be used to re center the CDI HSI needle and proceed to the same waypoint To re center the CDI HSI needle to the same destination waypoint Press the Direct to Key followed by the ENT Key twice NOTE When navigating an approach with the missed approach point MAP as the current destination re centering the CDI HSI needle with the Direct to Key cancels the approach GNS 430 A Pilot s Guide and Reference 190 00140 00 Rev P 4 2 SECTION 4 DIRECT TO NAVIGATION Selecting a Destination by Facility Name or City In addition to selecting a destination by identifier the Select Direct to Waypoint Page Figure 4 4 also allows the pilot to select airports VORs and NDBs by facility name or city location If duplicate entries exist for the entered facility name or city additional entries may be viewed by continuing to turn the small right knob during the selection process See Section 7 1 Duplicate Waypoints for more information Identifier Symbol and Region
94. 100 ft Threshold Terrain more than 1000 ft below the aircraft altitude Black Terrain between 100 ft and 1000 ft below the aircraft altitude Yellow Terrain above or within 100 ft below the aircraft altitude Red Figure 11 1 Terrain Altitude Color Correlation Unlighted Obstacle Lighted Obstacle Potential Impact Points Obstacle Location Alert Level lt 1000 AGL gt 1000 AGL lt 1000 AGL gt 1000 AGL Obstacle Symbol Obstacle above or within 100 below current aircraft altitude WARNING Red Obstacle between 100 and 1000 below current aircraft altitude CAUTION Yellow Table 11 1 Terrain Obstacle Colors and Symbology NOTE If an obstacle and the projected flight path of the aircraft intersect the display automatically zooms in to the closest potential point of impact on the TERRAIN Page GNS 430 A Pilot s Guide and Reference 190 00140 00 Rev P 11 4 SECTION 11 TERRAIN 11 3 TERRAIN ALERTS TERRAIN Alerts are issued when flight conditions meet parameters that are set within TERRAIN software algorithms TERRAIN alerts typically employ either an ADVISORY or a CAUTION alert severity level or both When an alert is issued visual annunciations are displayed Annunciations appear in a dedicated field in the lower left corner of the display Figure 11 2 Annunciations are color coded according to Table 11 2 Figure 11 2 TERRAIN Annunciation Field TERRAI
95. 2642 9199 f 886 2 2642 9099 www garmin com 190 00140 00 Rev P 2009 Garmin Ltd or its subsidiaries
96. 28 provides information for up to nine controlled or special use airspaces near or in the flight path Airspace information appears on this page based on the same criteria used for airspace alert messages If the projected course will take the aircraft inside an airspace within the next ten minutes the message Airspace ahead less than 10 minutes appears If the aircraft is within 2 nm of an airspace and the current course will take it inside of the airspace the message Airspace near and ahead appears If the aircraft is within 2 nm of an airspace and the current course will not take it inside of the air space the message Near airspace less than 2nm appears If the aircraft has entered an airspace the message Inside airspace appears Figure 1 28 Nearest Airspace Page GNS 430 A Pilot s Guide and Reference 190 00140 00 Rev P 1 18 SECTION 1 INTRODUCTION By default airspace alert messages are turned off When turned on the message MSG annunciator located directly above the MSG Key flashes to alert the pilot to the airspace message See Section 10 4 Setup 1 Page Airspace Alarms for information on enabling airspace alert messages To view an airspace alert message 1 Press the MSG Key The Messages Page appears with the alert message Figure 1 29 Figure 1 29 Messages Page 2 Press the MSG Key again to return to the previous display Note that the
97. 29 Channel 1 No data has been received on the ARINC 429 channel 1 connection for a period exceeding five seconds If the problem persists the installation should be checked by a Garmin dealer GNS 430 A Pilot s Guide and Reference 190 00140 00 Rev P SECTION 14 MESSAGES ABBREVIATIONS amp NAV TERMS 14 6 Not receiving input data on 429 Channel 2 No data has been received on the ARINC 429 channel 2 connection for a period exceeding five seconds If the problem persists the installation should be checked by a Garmin dealer Not receiving input data on 232 Channel 1 No data has been received on the RS 232 channel 1 connection for a period exceeding ten seconds If the problem persists the installation should be checked by a Garmin dealer OBS key stuck The OBS Key is stuck in the enabled or pressed state Try pressing the OBS Key again to cycle its operation If the message persists contact a Garmin dealer for assistance Poor GPS coverage The GPS receiver cannot acquire a sufficient number of satellites to compute a position and provide navigation Power down and re initialize The GNS 430 cannot calculate a position due to abnormal satellite conditions The unit is unusable until power has been cycled off and back on Abnormal satellite conditions may exist and the pilot may need to use an alternate means of navigation RAIM is not available Receiver Autonomous Integrity Monitoring RAIM has determined t
98. 3 SECTION 10 AUX PAGES Setup 1 Page CDI Scale Alarms To change the CDI scale 1 Select CDI Alarms from the Setup 1 Page Figure 10 58 using the steps described at the beginning of this section Figure 10 58 CDI Alarms Highlighted 2 The flashing cursor highlights the Selected CDI field Turn the small right knob to select the desired CDI scale The selected scale and any lower scale settings are used during the various phases of flight as described at the beginning of this section 3 Press the ENT Key to accept the selected scale The System CDI field displays the CDI scale currently in use Figure 10 59 The System CDI setting may differ from the Selected CDI depending upon the current phase of flight Figure 10 59 Selected CDI Field Highlighted To change the ILS CDI selection 1 Select CDI Alarms from the Setup 1 Page using the steps described at the beginning of this section 2 Turn the large right knob to highlight the Auto Manual ILS CDI field 3 Turn the small right knob to select Auto or Manual as desired Figure 10 60 Press the ENT Key to accept the selection Figure 10 60 ILS CDI Window GNS 430 A Pilot s Guide and Reference 190 00140 00 Rev P 10 24 SECTION 10 AUX PAGES To set the arrival alarm and alarm distance 1 Select CDI Alarms from the Setup 1 Page using the steps described at the beginning of this
99. 3 5 10 10 3 10 7 14 9 14 13 ETE 1 12 3 3 5 10 10 3 10 7 14 9 14 13 F FDE fault detection and exclusion 1 8 13 1 13 2 14 9 Field elevation 1 3 6 7 4 Flight phases 10 13 10 18 13 1 Flight Planning Page 10 1 10 2 10 4 10 6 10 7 10 8 Flight plans 1 4 1 5 1 18 1 19 4 2 5 1 5 6 5 7 10 2 10 3 10 9 14 3 14 5 14 7 C 2 Flight plan catalog 1 18 1 19 5 1 5 9 6 4 Flight timers 10 12 10 15 10 16 Forecast abbreviations 12 34 FPL Key 1 4 Frequency fields 1 3 1 9 1 13 1 15 1 16 1 18 2 2 5 3 9 3 17 3 18 6 2 6 5 6 26 6 28 6 29 6 30 6 33 7 6 7 7 7 9 7 15 7 16 8 4 8 10 8 13 9 1 9 4 10 28 14 6 14 7 Frequency selection 9 1 Fuel planning 10 1 10 4 G GDL 49 12 18 GDL 69 69A 12 18 Generic timer 10 15 10 16 GPS receiver status 3 22 3 23 GPS Window 1 9 Graphic track indicator 3 19 Ground speed 1 11 1 12 3 3 3 6 3 13 3 19 3 23 3 24 6 23 6 25 10 3 10 5 10 7 10 12 10 16 10 17 14 13 Ground track 1 11 1 12 3 3 3 19 14 13 Gust offset graphics 12 35 H HOLD 6 9 6 11 6 24 Hold in an approach 6 9 6 23 C 3 Holding pattern 5 15 6 9 6 12 6 24 C 3 I Ident audio 9 1 IFR procedures 1 14 ILS approach 6 26 6 28 6 30 6 33 9 3 Insert the NavData card A 1 Instrument Panel Self Test Page 1 6 INTEG annunciator C 1 Intersections 1 11 1 15 7 1 8 1 8 2 8 6 Inverting flight plans 5 4 IOI imminent obstacle impact 11 5 ITI immin
100. 4 Press the ENT Key to select the desired facility name or location 5 To remove the flashing cursor press the small right knob To select a waypoint identifier from a list of duplicates 1 Select the desired airport or NAVAID identifier following the preceding steps under To enter a waypoint facility name or city location 2 A Duplicate Waypoints Window appears Figure 7 7 Turn the large right knob to select the desired waypoint and press the ENT Key Figure 7 7 Duplicate Waypoints Window 3 To remove the flashing cursor press the small right knob GNS 430 A Pilot s Guide and Reference 190 00140 00 Rev P 7 4 SECTION 7 WPT PAGES 7 2 AIRPORT LOCATION PAGE The Airport Location Page Figure 7 8 displays the latitude longitude and elevation of the selected airport The Airport Location Page also displays facility name and location as well as fuel availability available approaches radar coverage and airspace type Figure 7 8 Airport Location Page 7 1 5 4 2 10 8 3 6 9 1 Position Latitude Longitude 2 Facility Name and Location City 3 Radar Coverage 4 Airport Identifier Symbol and Type 5 Field Elevation and Available Fuels 6 Airspace Type 7 Best Available Approach 8 Current Page Group 9 Position of Current Page within Current Page Group 10 Number of Pages in Current Page Group The following descriptions and abbreviations are used
101. 40 00 Rev P 9 3 SECTION 9 VLOC RECEIVER 4 Press the ENT Key to place the frequency in the standby field of the VLOC Window Figure 9 6 Figure 9 6 Frequency in Standby Field 5 Press the VLOC Flip flop Key to activate the selected frequency 6 Press the small right knob to remove the flashing cursor NOTE For duplex COM operations the VLOC receiver may be auto tuned from the Nearest Flight Service Station Page See Section 8 8 for more info When selecting a VOR or ILS approach manual tuning of the VLOC receiver is not required Once the approach procedure is Loaded or Activated the GNS 430 automatically places the proper frequency in the standby field of the VLOC Window To use this frequency press the VLOC Flip flop Key to activate the frequency Additional information on approach procedures is provided in Section 6 1 To select an approach and automatically tune the proper VLOC frequency 1 Select the destination airport using the Direct to Key or as the last waypoint in the active flight plan 2 Press the PROC Key to display the Procedures Page 3 Turn the large right knob to highlight Select Approach and press the ENT Key Figure 9 7 Figure 9 7 Procedures Page 4 A window appears listing the available procedures Turn the small right knob to highlight the desired procedure and press the ENT Key When a direct to destination is selected departures are offered fo
102. 5 SECTION 1 INTRODUCTION 1 3 TAKEOFF TOUR Overview The Garmin GNS 430 provides the pilot accurate navigational data and communication capability along with non precision and precision approach certification in the IFR environment The takeoff tour is designed to familiarize the pilot with Powering up the unit Changing frequencies Entering data Performing a simple direct to Selecting IFR procedures Using some limited flight plans In addition this section briefly covers the Default NAV Page the Map Page and the NAV COM Page which are available as part of the NAV Page Group These pages are used for most of the in flight navigation The takeoff tour assumes that the unit and antennas have been properly installed and that the GNS 430 s default settings have not been changed If any of the factory default settings position format units of measure selectable fields etc have been changed the pictures shown here may not exactly match what is shown on the GNS 430 Prior to using the GNS 430 for the first time Garmin recommends that the aircraft be moved to a location that is well away from buildings and other aircraft so the unit can collect satellite data without interruption This takeoff tour is intended to provide a brief introduction of the GNS 430 s major features Sections 2 through 13 of this manual describe these features and others in additional detail Refer to th
103. 6 6 3 ILS APPROACHES Precision approaches can be performed with the GNS 430 s built in VLOC VOR localizer glideslope receivers The GPS receiver can be used for guidance prior to reaching the final approach fix but once there the proper frequency must be selected on the VLOC Window left side of screen and the CDI output set to VLOC The GNS 430 can be set to automatically switch the external CDI output from GPS to VLOC as the pilot intercepts the final approach course When the ILS approach is activated the GNS 430 automatically switches within 1 2 nm left or right of the final approach course This switch can take place anywhere from 2 0 to 15 0 nm from the FAF NOTE When intercepting the approach course at a distance less than 2 0 nm from the FAF the GNS 430 does not automatically switch the CDI to VLOC In this case press the CDI Key to manually switch from GPS to VLOC Figure 6 72 shows multiple locations along the approach path and the expected CDI selection GPS or VLOC The automatic switch from GPS to VLOC should occur within the area of the shaded box 2NM 15NM 1 2NM 1 2NM MANUAL FAF VLOC VLOC GPS GPS Figure 6 72 ILS Approach GNS 430 A Pilot s Guide and Reference 190 00140 00 Rev P SECTION 6 PROCEDURES 6 27 The automatic switch from GPS to VLOC occurs gradually to prevent abrupt CDI changes when coupled to an autopilot The CDI selection can also be changed ma
104. AV Page Figure 10 21 or Active Flight Plan Page Figure 10 22 by pressing the MENU Key and then scrolling down to Crossfill and pressing the ENT key Figure 10 20 Flight Planning Page Figure 10 21 Default NAV Page Menu Figure 10 22 Flight Plan Page Menu GNS 430 A Pilot s Guide and Reference 190 00140 00 Rev P 10 9 SECTION 10 AUX PAGES Automatic Operation If both units are set to automatic a change in the active flight plan of one unit is also be seen in the other Initiating a direct to to a waypoint on one unit also initiates a direct to to the same waypoint on the other unit If one unit is set for automatic crossfill and the other is set for manual crossfill then only the auto unit automatically sends data to the manual unit In this configuration the auto unit could be thought of as the master unit Manual Operation If manual operation is desired the pilot must invoke all transfers from that unit When a unit is configured for automatic transfer a manual transfer can also be done on command If either of the messages data transfer error or data transfer cancelled are received during an automatic or manual transfer the pilot must force another transfer To transfer flight plans or user waypoints to from a second 400 500 series unit 1 Select Crossfill from the Flight Planning Page using the steps described at the beginning of this section 2 The flashing c
105. Ahead lt 2nm etc as described on the preceding page and a time to entry if applicable By selecting any airspace name listed on the Nearest Airspace Page additional details are provided including controlling agency communication frequencies and floor ceiling limits Figure 8 31 Nearest Airspace Page Message Annunciator Status and Time to Entry Current Page Group Airspace Name Position of Current Page within Current Page Group Number of Pages in Current Page Group To view additional details for an airspace listed on the Nearest Airspace Page 1 Select the Nearest Airspace Page using the steps outlined in Section 8 1 Figure 8 32 Figure 8 32 Nearest Airspace Page 2 Press the small right knob to activate the cursor GNS 430 A Pilot s Guide and Reference 190 00140 00 Rev P 8 13 SECTION 8 NRST PAGES 3 Turn the large right knob to scroll through the list highlighting the desired airspace Figure 8 33 Figure 8 33 Airspace Highlighted 4 Press the ENT Key to display the Airspace Page for the selected nearby airspace Figure 8 34 Figure 8 34 Airspace Page Status and Time to Entry Done Field Return to Previous Page Airspace Name and Type Floor Ceiling Limits 5 To return to the Nearest Airspace Page verify that Done is highlighted by the flashing cursor and press the ENT Key 6 Press the small right knob to remove the flashing cursor
106. DI or HSI for primary navigation To confirm this reminder highlight Yes and press the ENT Key CDI Key The GNS 430 s CDI Key is used to couple the GPS or VLOC receiver to the external CDI or HSI When the external CDI or HSI is being driven by the GPS receiver GPS appears at the bottom left corner of the page directly above the CDI Key When the external CDI or HSI if being driven by the VLOC receiver VLOC appears instead To couple the external CDI or HSI to the GPS receiver or VLOC receiver press the CDI Key to display GPS or VLOC as desired Figures 9 9 and 9 10 Figure 9 9 GPS Coupled to External CDI GPS Annunciator Figure 9 10 VLOC Coupled to External CDI VLOC Annunciator NOTE The external CDI or HSI must be coupled to the VLOC receiver for approaches which are not approved for GPS See ILS example in Section 6 3 GNS 430 A Pilot s Guide and Reference 190 00140 00 Rev P 10 1 SECTION 10 AUX PAGES SECTION 10 AUX PAGES 10 1 AUX PAGE GROUP Section 3 1 introduced the GNS 430 s main page groups Table 10 1 NAV WPT AUX NRST and described each page in the NAV group The third page group AUX allows the pilot to change unit settings The AUX pages Figure 10 1 also provide E6B functions such as trip planning fuel planning density altitude true airspeed and winds aloft calculations Page Groups NAV Group WPT Group AUX Gr
107. E For the GDL 69 69A METAR data is automatically updated every twelve minutes from the time of initial request GNS 430 A Pilot s Guide and Reference 190 00140 00 Rev P 12 30 SECTION 12 ADDITIONAL FEATURES Weather Legend Page The symbology unique to Graphical METAR Winds and Temperature Dewpoint data is displayed on the Weather Legend Page The Weather Legend is accessed from the Weather Page NOTE All METAR Wind and Temp Dewpoint symbols are depicted at the end of this section Displaying the Weather Legend 1 Select the Weather Page and activate the cursor This selects the weather selection field in the upper left corner of page 2 Use the small right knob to select METAR WINDS or TEMP DP 3 Press the MENU Key The Weather Page Menu is displayed 4 Turn the small right knob highlight Display Legend and press the ENT Key The Weather Legend is displayed Figure 12 45 for the type of data that was selected Use the small right knob and scroll through the various descriptions for the symbols that are shown Press the small right knob to return to the Weather Page Figure 12 45 Weather Legend Page for METAR Data The following symbology is shown for the various types of data For METAR Data Age of Data in Minutes Ceiling Visibility and Precipitation Ceiling Visual Flight Rules Precipitation For Wind Data Age of Data in Minutes Winds
108. ENT Key Figure 5 17 Delete All Flight Plans Window GNS 430 A Pilot s Guide and Reference 190 00140 00 Rev P 5 8 SECTION 5 FLIGHT PLANS Sort List By Number Sort List by Comment Allows the pilot to sort numerically by the flight plan number or sort alphanumerically based upon the comment assigned to each flight plan When one option is selected the other option appears on the Flight Plan Catalog Page Menu To sort the catalog listing by number or comment 1 Select the Sort List By Number or Sort List By Comment option whichever is currently displayed from the Flight Plan Catalog Page Menu Figure 5 18 and press the ENT Key Figure 5 18 Flight Plan Catalog Page Menu 5 2 ACTIVE FLIGHT PLAN PAGE The Active Flight Plan Page provides information and editing functions for flight plan 00 the flight plan currently in use for navigation When a direct to or flight plan has been activated the Active Flight Plan Page shows each waypoint for the flight plan or a single waypoint for a direct to Figure 5 19 along with the desired track DTK and distance DIS for each leg Figure 5 19 Active Flight Plan Page Active Flight Plan Options The options shown in Table 5 1 are available for the Active Flight Plan Page To access the Active Flight Plan Menu Page 1 Press the FPL Key to view the Active Flight Plan Page 2 Press the MENU Key Figure 5 20 Figure 5 2
109. F the pilot must manually switch to the VLOC receiver by pressing the CDI Key Verify that VLOC is displayed directly above the CDI Key Automatic switching of CDI output is available for ILS localizer SDF and LDA approaches Automatic CDI switching is not available for backcourse approaches When flying an approach with the autopilot coupled the pilot must monitor system functions at all times and verify that the autopilot and external CDI or HSI switches to the VLOC receiver with sufficient time to capture and track the approach course Switching to VLOC late in the approach may not provide the autopilot enough time to respond and intercept the approach course prior to the FAF depending upon the performance characteristics of the autopilot and aircraft In such cases the pilot should manually fly the approach or refer to the documentation provided with the autopilot When an ILS approach is first selected and loaded or activated the ILS frequency is automatically placed in the standby field In order to fly the final course segment of the ILS approach the pilot must place the ILS frequency in the active frequency field by pressing the VLOC Flip flop Key If this is not done a Select appropriate frequency for approach message appears within 3 0 nm of the FAF When flying a localizer based approach other than backcourse with automatic CDI switching enabled GPS guidance
110. Figure 10 65 Position Format Window The following position formats are available hddd mm mmm Latitude and longitude in degrees and decimal minutes hddd mm ss s Latitude and longitude in degrees minutes and decimal seconds MGRS Military Grid Reference System UTM UPS Universal Transverse Mercator Universal Polar Stereographic grids 3 Press the ENT Key to accept the selected format GNS 430 A Pilot s Guide and Reference 190 00140 00 Rev P 10 26 SECTION 10 AUX PAGES To display the map datum 1 Select Position Format Map Datum from the Setup 1 Page using the steps described at the beginning of this section 2 The WGS 84 map datum is displayed this field cannot be changed Figure 10 66 WGS 84 Map Datum Setup 1 Page Date Time To display local time or UTC 1 Select Date Time from the Setup 1 Page using the steps described at the beginning of this section 2 The flashing cursor highlights the time format field Figure 10 67 Turn the small right knob to display a window of available time formats Local 12hr Local 24hr or UTC Figure 10 67 Time Format Window 3 Continue turning the small right knob to select the desired time format 4 Press the ENT Key to accept the selection To set the local time 1 Select Date Time from the Setup 1 Page using the steps described at the beginning of this section 2 Turn the larg
111. GNS 430 A Pilot s Guide and Reference GNS 430 A Pilot s Guide and Reference 190 00140 00 Rev P i RECORD OF REVISIONS Revision Date of Revision Description A 12 98 Initial Release B 4 99 Update to conform to recent SW changes C 6 99 Added Addendum D 7 99 Update for SW 2 10 E 4 00 Update for SW 2 15 F 7 00 Updated Power On Wind Vector Crossfill DME and Fuel Plan G 5 03 Added FDE Section updated per SW 5 01 misc changes H 5 06 Changed to 8 inch x 8 5 inch format Added TERRAIN misc changes J 6 06 Made various layout corrections no content changes K 2 07 Updated per Main SW v5 02 L 10 07 Updated per Main SW v5 03 M 05 08 Removed Proximity Advisory info from Section 12 N 08 08 Converted format of figures to accommodate printing process P 12 09 Added Section 12 2 GTS 8XX Traffic Systems GNS 430 A Pilot s Guide and Reference 190 00140 00 Rev P ii COPYRIGHT Copyright 2009 Garmin Ltd or its subsidiaries All rights reserved This manual reflects the operation of Main System Software version 5 03 or later Some differences may be observed when comparing the information in this manual to other software versions Garmin International Inc 1200 East 151st Street Olathe Kansas 66062 USA p 913 397 8200 f 913 397 8282 Garmin AT Inc 2345 Turner Road SE Salem Oregon 97302 USA p 503 391 3411 f 503 364 2138 Garmin Europe Ltd Liberty House B
112. HOLD TEARDROP alert appears in the lower right corner of the screen to suggest the proper holding pattern entry Figure 6 30 HOLD DIRECT or HOLD PARALLEL may be offered on other similar approaches Figure 6 30 HOLD TEARDROP Annunciation 9 As mentioned in the missed approach example the Default NAV Page displays a timer during the holding pattern Figure 6 31 The timer can be used to fly the one minute outbound portion of the holding pattern The holding pattern is displayed on the Map Page and indicated as the active leg on the Default NAV Page and the Active Flight Plan Page Figure 6 31 Default NAV Page 10 When crossing the IAF SUSP appears above the OBS Key Figure 6 31 indicating that automatic sequencing of approach waypoints is temporarily suspended As the aircraft turns inbound SUSP is cancelled and the GNS 430 returns to automatic sequencing GNS 430 A Pilot s Guide and Reference 190 00140 00 Rev P SECTION 6 PROCEDURES 6 12 NOTE If the pilot needs to lose extra altitude or speed by going around the holding pattern again press the OBS Key to manually suspend waypoint sequencing before crossing the holding waypoint the second time If this waypoint has already been passed re activate the holding pattern using the steps described in Section 5 2 DO NOT USE FOR NAVIGATION Figure 6 32 Approach Mode Refer to Figure 6 32 for the following steps 11 When
113. IATIONS amp NAV TERMS 14 13 EPE estimated position error A measure of satellite geometry quality and additional factors expressed as a horizontal position error in feet or meters ESA enroute safe altitude The recommended minimum altitude within ten miles left or right of the desired course on an active flight plan or direct to ETA estimated time of arrival The estimated time at which the aircraft will reach the destination waypoint based upon current speed and track ETE estimated time enroute The time it will take to reach the destination waypoint from present position based upon current ground speed FF fuel flow The fuel flow rate expressed in fuel units per time e g gallons per hour FOB fuel on board The total amount of usable fuel on board the aircraft GS ground speed The velocity the aircraft is travelling relative to a ground position HDG heading The direction an aircraft is pointed based upon indications from a magnetic compass or a properly set directional gyro IND indicated Information provided by properly calibrated and set instrumentation in the aircraft panel e g indicated altitude LFOB left over fuel onboard The amount of fuel remaining on board after the completion of a one or more legs of a flight plan or a direct to LRES left over fuel reserve The amount of fuel remaining on board after the completion of a one or more legs of a flight pl
114. ICAL SPEED REQUIRED DISTANCE TO TARGET TIME AND DISTANCE TO PROFILE TARGET ALTITUDE AND POSITION AIRPORT CURRENT ALTITUDE AND POSITION Figure 3 50 Vertical Navigation Profile To create a vertical navigation profile Figure 3 50 1 Press the small right knob to activate the cursor 2 Turn the large right knob to highlight the target altitude field 3 Turn the small and large right knobs to select the target altitude Figure 3 51 and press the ENT Key Figure 3 51 Target Altitude Field Selected GNS 430 A Pilot s Guide and Reference 190 00140 00 Rev P SECTION 3 NAV PAGES 3 25 4 Turn the small right knob to select Above Wpt AGL or MSL Figure 3 52 and press the ENT Key Above Wpt uses the altitude of a destination airport as stored in the Jeppesen NavData Card MSL lets the pilot set a specific target altitude for any waypoint category airport VOR NDB intersection or user waypoint Figure 3 52 Reference Window 5 Turn the small and large right knobs to select a distance from the target reference waypoint Figure 3 53 and press the ENT Key If the target altitude should occur at the target reference waypoint enter a distance of zero Figure 3 53 Reference Distance Selected 6 Turn the small right knob to select Before or After and press the ENT Key This setting designates whether the offset distance defines a point before the aircraft re
115. Improvement Report a postage paid card designed for this purpose These cards may be obtained at FAA FSS s General Aviation District Offices Flight Standards District Offices and General Aviation Fixed Based Operations GNS 430 A Pilot s Guide and Reference 190 00140 00 Rev P 12 4 SECTION 12 ADDITIONAL FEATURES TIS Audio Alerting The TIS audio alert is generated when the number of Traffic Advisories TA on the GNS 430 display increases from one scan to the next For example when the first TA appears on the TIS display the user is alerted audibly As long as a single aircraft remains on the TIS display no further audio alert is generated If a second or more TA appears on the display a new audio alert is sounded Limiting TAs reduces nuisance alerting due to proximate aircraft If the number of TAs on the TIS display decreases and then increases a new audio alert is sounded A TIS audio alert is also generated when TIS service becomes unavailable The volume pitch and duration of the audio alert including the choice between a male or female voice is configured during installation The following TIS audio alerts are available Traffic TIS traffic alert is received Traffic Not Available TIS service is not available or out of range TIS Symbology TIS traffic is displayed on the GNS 430 unit according to TCAS symbology on a dedicated Traffic page and on the moving
116. MAL no OBS annunciator OBS Automatic sequencing of waypoints Manual sequencing holds on selected waypoint Change in HSI does not affect CDI deflection Manually select course to next waypoint from HSI Always navigates TO the active waypoint Indicates TO or FROM waypoint Must be in this mode for final approach course Cannot be set for final approach course or published holding patterns When OBS mode is active the GNS 430 allows the pilot to select the desired course to from a waypoint using the HSI much like a VOR and display a to from flag for the active to waypoint If an external course input is not available the pilot may select the OBS course on screen via a Select OBS Course pop up window With OBS mode cancelled the CDI always displays a TO indication for the next waypoint once the aircraft has crossed the active waypoint provided the active waypoint is not the last waypoint Refer to Section 6 2 for an example using the OBS Key One application for the OBS Key is holding patterns The OBS Key is used to suspend waypoint sequencing and select the desired course along the waypoint side of the hold For many approach operations setting and resetting of waypoint sequencing is automatic Holding patterns that are part of an approach automatically disable waypoint sequencing then re enable waypoint sequencing after one time around the holding pattern A
117. Map Page 1 Select the Map Page 2 Press the MENU Key The Map Page Options Menu is displayed Figure 12 44 Figure 12 44 Map Page Menu 3 Select Request METAR and press the ENT Key The METAR Request Page is displayed There are four user selectable parameter fields Format Center Radius and Position see preceding pages for detailed information Change the request parameters as desired 4 Enter the type of desired METAR Data and the desired radius graphical requests only 5 Select Manual Send or Update Request and press the ENT Key The request has been sent Note that selecting Auto Request and pressing the ENT Key does not send the request until after the auto time period 6 To exit from the METAR Request Page press the small right knob The Map Page is displayed Displaying graphical METARs on the NAV Weather Page Once received graphical METAR data is displayed on the NAV Weather Page Displaying graphical METARs on the NAV Weather Page 1 Select the NAV Weather Page 2 Press the small right knob The upper left hand corner field flashes 3 Turn small right knob and select METAR 4 Press the small right knob Viewing graphical METAR Data for a specific airport from the Map Page 1 Select the Map Page 2 Move the target pointer to highlight a desired airport Graphical METAR data is displayed for that airport in a thumbnail image NOT
118. N Annunciation NOTE TERRAIN Advisory Alerts are displayed as constant black text on a yellow background TERRAIN Caution Alerts are displayed as flashing black text on a yellow background Pop up terrain alerts Figure 11 3 amp 11 4 can also appear during an alert but only when the TERRAIN Page is not displayed There are two options when an alert is displayed Press the CLR Key This acknowledges the pop up alert and returns to the currently viewed page Press the ENT Key This acknowledges the pop up alert and accesses the TERRAIN Page Figure 11 3 TERRAIN Advisory Pop up Figure 11 4 TERRAIN Caution Pop up Flashing GNS 430 A Pilot s Guide and Reference 190 00140 00 Rev P 11 5 SECTION 11 TERRAIN Table 11 2 shows the possible TERRAIN alert types with corresponding annunciations Alert Type Annunciation Pop Up Alert TERRAIN Failure None TERRAIN Inhibited None TERRAIN Not Available None Required Terrain Clearance RTC Advisory Required Terrain Clearance RTC Caution FLASHING FLASHING Imminent Terrain Impact ITI Advisory Imminent Terrain Impact ITI Caution FLASHING FLASHING Required Obstacle Clearance ROC Advisory Required Obstacle Clearance ROC Caution FLASHING FLASHING Imminent Obstacle Impact IOI Advisory Imminent Obstacle Impact IOI Caution FLASHING FLASHING Premature Descent Alert PDA Advisory Table 11 2 TERRAIN A
119. OC RECEIVER 2 Turn the large left knob to select the desired megahertz MHz value For example the 117 portion of the frequency 117 60 Figure 9 3 Figure 9 3 Select VOR Megahertz Frequency 3 Turn the small left knob to select the desired kilohertz kHz value For example the 80 portion of the frequency 117 80 Figure 9 4 Figure 9 4 Select VOR Kilohertz Frequency 4 To make the standby frequency the active frequency press the VLOC Flip flop Key Auto Tuning A frequency may also be quickly selected from the database by simply highlighting the desired frequency on the VOR Page Section 7 10 or the Nearest VOR Page Section 8 5 and pressing the ENT Key This process is referred to as auto tuning Once a frequency is selected in the standby field it may be transferred to the active frequency by pressing the VLOC Flip flop Key Auto tuning can also be performed from VLOC frequencies listed on the NAV COM Page the Airport Frequency Page and the Nearest Flight Service Station Page To select a VLOC frequency from the VOR Page or Nearest VOR Page 1 Select the desired page from the main pages as discussed in the preceding paragraph 2 Press the small right knob momentarily to activate the flashing cursor 3 Turn the large right knob to highlight the frequency for the desired VOR Figure 9 5 Figure 9 5 Highlight Frequency GNS 430 A Pilot s Guide and Reference 190 001
120. OM Flip flop Key or COM Remote Transfer Switch for approximately two seconds Figure 2 10 Figure 2 10 Emergency Channel Active If the COM Remote Transfer switch is used to select the emergency channel further changes in COM frequency will not be possible without momentarily pressing the COM Remote Tranfer Switch again or by recycling power NOTE Under some circumstances if the COM system loses communication with the main system the radio will automatically tune to 121 500 MHz for transmit and receive regardless of the displayed frequency GNS 430 A Pilot s Guide and Reference 190 00140 00 Rev P 2 6 SECTION 2 COM Stuck Microphone As mentioned previously in this section when the GNS 430 is transmitting a TX indication appears in the COM Window If the microphone key is stuck or accidentally left in the on position or the microphone continues to transmit after the key is released the COM transmitter automatically times out ceases transmitting after 35 seconds of continuous broadcasting A COM push to talk key stuck message Figure 2 11 is displayed as long as the condition continues Figure 2 11 Message Page GNS 430 A Pilot s Guide and Reference 190 00140 00 Rev P SECTION 3 NAV PAGES 3 1 SECTION 3 NAV PAGES 3 1 MAIN PAGE GROUPS The GNS 430 s main pages are divided into four separate page groups NAV WPT AUX and NRST Table 3 1 Each page group is comprised of mu
121. OS appears in the reference waypoint REF WPT field to indicate that radial and distance information references the present position The second reference waypoint field REF WPT is a temporary reference only not a reference that is stored with the user waypoint By default this field displays a radial from the nearest VOR However the pilot can select any waypoint by identifier to use as a reference in this field The GNS 430 can store user defined waypoints which are generated from other equipment in the panel For example an EFIS equipped with joystick inputs can be used to create user waypoints which if the installation supports this automatically transfer to the GNS 430 Creating User Waypoints from the Map Page The Map Page and panning target pointer Section 3 4 Map Panning provide a quick means of saving the present position as a user defined waypoint To capture and save the present position as a user waypoint 1 With the Map Page displayed press the small right knob to activate the panning function The target pointer appears at the present position Figure 7 43 Figure 7 43 Activate Panning Function GNS 430 A Pilot s Guide and Reference 190 00140 00 Rev P 7 20 SECTION 7 WPT PAGES 2 Press the ENT Key to capture the position and display the User Waypoint Page Figure 7 44 Figure 7 44 User Waypoint Page 3 A four digit name is automatically assigned to the waypoint To change this nam
122. Page using the steps described at the beginning of this section 2 The flashing cursor highlights the channel spacing field Figure 10 78 Turn the small right knob to select the desired channel spacing 8 33 kHz or 25 0 kHz Press the ENT Key when finished Figure 10 78 Channel Spacing Window Restoring Factory Settings When making changes to any Setup 2 Page option a Restore Defaults menu selection restores the original factory settings for the selected option To restore a Setup 2 option to the original factory settings 1 Select the desired menu option from the Setup 2 Page using the steps described at the beginning of this section 2 Press the MENU Key to display the COM Setup Page Menu Figure 10 79 Figure 10 79 COM Setup Page Menu 3 With Restore Defaults highlighted press the ENT Key GNS 430 A Pilot s Guide and Reference 190 00140 00 Rev P 11 1 SECTION 11 TERRAIN SECTION 11 TERRAIN NOTE Not all GNS 430 units are equipped with or configured for TERRAIN See the 400 series Installation Manual 190 00140 02 for TERRAIN configuration information 11 1 INTRODUCTION Garmin TERRAIN is a non TSO C151b certified terrain awareness system incorporated into GNS 430 units to increase situational awareness and aid in reducing controlled flight into terrain CFIT TERRAIN functionality is a standard feature found in GNS 430 units with main software version 5 01 or above a
123. TIONS AND NOTES WARNING Navigation and terrain separation must NOT be predicated upon the use of the TERRAIN function The TERRAIN feature is NOT intended to be used as a primary reference for terrain avoidance and does not relieve the pilot from the responsibility of being aware of surroundings during flight The TERRAIN feature is only to be used as an aid for terrain avoidance and is not certified for use in applications requiring a certified terrain awareness system Terrain data is obtained from third party sources Garmin is not able to independently verify the accuracy of the terrain data WARNING The terrain data should be used only as an aid for situational awareness Terrain data must not be used as the sole basis for decisions or maneuvers to avoid terrain or obstacles Terrain data must not be used for navigation WARNING The altitude calculated by GNS 430 GPS receivers is geometric height above Mean Sea Level and could vary significantly from the altitude displayed by pressure altimeters in aircraft GPS altitude should never be used for vertical navigation Always use pressure altitude displayed by pressure altimeters in the aircraft WARNING The Jeppesen database used in the GNS 430 system must be updated regularly in order to ensure that its information remains current Updates are released every 28 days A database information packet is included in the GNS 430 package Pilots using an outdated database do so entirely at their ow
124. TS 8XX continues to display up to 30 intruder aircraft within its maximum surveillance range regardless of the altitude display mode selected The selected altitude display mode Figure 12 25 is displayed in the upper left hand corner of the Traffic Page Changing the Altitude Display Mode 1 From the Traffic Page press the small right knob to activate the cursor and highlight the current mode Figure 12 25 2 Turn the small right knob to cycle through the options The screen changes to display the traffic detected within the selected altitude display range Refer to Figure 12 24 for information regarding altitude display ranges Figure 12 24 Altitude Display Modes 2 700 ft Drawing Not to Scale Normal NRM Below BLW 2 700 ft 9 900 ft Above ABV 0 ft 9 900 ft Unrestricted UNR 0 ft 2 700 ft 9 000 ft 9 000 ft NOTE Confirmation is not required the mode is changed immediately when using the small right knob Figure 12 25 UNR Selected Altitude Display Mode 3 Press the small right knob to turn the cursor off after the selection is made GNS 430 A Pilot s Guide and Reference 190 00140 00 Rev P 12 16 SECTION 12 ADDITIONAL FEATURES Traffic Warning Window When the unit is not on the traffic page and the GTS issues a Traffic Advisory the Traffic Warning Window Figure 12 26 is displayed which shows a small thumbnail map When the Traffic Warnin
125. There are seven pages available under the NAV Page Group Default NAV Page Map Page TERRAIN Page NAV COM Page Position Page Satellite Status Page Vertical Navigation Page The Default NAV Page the Map Page and the NAV COM Page are used for most of the in flight navigation NOTE Eight or nine NAV pages are available when the GNS 430 installation includes connection to traffic and or weather information sources See the 400 500 Series Display Interfaces Pilot s Guide Addendum p n 190 00140 10 or Section 12 Additional Features To select the NAV Page Group and display the Default NAV Page Press and hold the CLR Key To select the desired NAV Page Turn the small right knob until the desired page is displayed GNS 430 A Pilot s Guide and Reference 190 00140 00 Rev P 1 11 SECTION 1 INTRODUCTION Map Page After the GNS 430 acquires satellites and computes a position the Map Page Figure 1 14 appears automatically Figure 1 14 Map Page Present Position Desired Track Data Fields Map Range Map Display The Map Page displays the present position using an airplane symbol relative to nearby airports VORs NDBs intersections user waypoints and airspace boundaries The route is displayed as a solid line Data fields for destination waypoint WPT distance to waypoint DIS desired track DTK and ground speed GS appear on the right h
126. Use the small and large right knobs to enter the destination airport s identifier KFVX Figure 6 25 Figure 6 25 Select Direct To Waypoint Page 3 Press the ENT Key twice This time the pilot selects the GPS runway 21 approach into Farmville Regional The GPS runway 21 approach begins with a holding pattern at the IAF BODRY intersection 4 Press the PROC Key and select the GPS 21 approach Figure 6 26 also Section 6 1 for additional instructions Figure 6 26 Approach Window 5 From the Transitions Window select BODRY intersection as the IAF Figure 6 27 Also select Activate to load and activate the approach Figure 6 27 TRANS Transitions Window 6 Once the approach has been activated the Active Flight Plan Page appears Figure 6 28 The pilot may review the approach sequence by pressing the small right knob and turning the large right knob Press the FPL Key to return to the navigation pages GNS 430 A Pilot s Guide and Reference 190 00140 00 Rev P SECTION 6 PROCEDURES 6 11 Figure 6 28 Active Flight Plan Page Figure 6 29 Terminal Mode DO NOT USE FOR NAVIGATION Refer to Figure 6 29 for the following steps 7 As in the last example within 30 nm of the airport the GNS 430 switches from enroute to terminal mode and the CDI scale transitions from 5 0 to 1 0 nm full scale deflection 8 Just prior to crossing BODRY intersection a
127. While viewing any NAV page turn the small right knob to select a different NAV page The pilot may find this selection process convenient to cycle between the Default NAV Page and the Map Page which are two of the most frequently used pages Other pages are provided for terrain information if configured for TERRAIN to list frequencies for the flight plan to show the current position to display current satellite reception and to make vertical navigation settings Default NAV Map TERRAIN NAV COM Position Satellite Status VNAV if configured Figure 3 2 NAV Pages GNS 430 A Pilot s Guide and Reference 190 00140 00 Rev P SECTION 3 NAV PAGES 3 2 3 3 DEFAULT NAV PAGE The first NAV page is the Default NAV Page Figure 3 3 This page may be quickly selected from any page by pressing and holding the CLR Key Figure 3 3 Default NAV Page Course Deviation Indicator CDI User selectable Data Fields Active Leg of Flight Plan TO FROM Flag Number of Pages in Current Page Group Position of Current Page within Current Page Group Current Page Group The Default NAV Page displays a graphic course deviation indicator CDI across the top of the page Unlike the angular limits used on a mechanical CDI coupled to a VOR or ILS receiver full scale limits for this CDI are defined by a GPS derived distance 0 3 1 0 or 5 0 nm as indicated at both ends of the CDI By default the CDI scale automatical
128. With a flight plan page displayed press the small right knob to activate the cursor 2 Turn the large right knob to highlight the procedure header Figure 5 38 and press the ENT Key to select the WPT Page Group Figure 5 38 Procedure Header Highlighted GNS 430 A Pilot s Guide and Reference 190 00140 00 Rev P 5 16 SECTION 5 FLIGHT PLANS Blank Page GNS 430 A Pilot s Guide and Reference 190 00140 00 Rev P SECTION 6 PROCEDURES 6 1 SECTION 6 PROCEDURES 6 1 APPROACHES DEPARTURES AND ARRIVALS The GNS 430 allows the pilot to fly non precision and precision approaches to airports with published instrument approach procedures All available approaches are stored on the Jeppesen NavData Card and are automatically updated when the new card is inserted into the GNS 430 Subscription information for NavData cards is included in the GNS 430 package The Procedures Page Figure 6 1 is displayed by pressing the PROC Key The Procedures Page provides direct access to approaches departures and arrivals based upon the active flight plan or direct to destination In either case the departure and destination airports must have published procedures associated with them To select an approach departure or arrival 1 Press the PROC Key to display the Procedures Page 2 Turn the large right knob to highlight Select Approach Select Departure or Select Arrival Figure 6 1 and
129. abase Versions Page Figure 10 49 displays the navigation database type and version information as well as the land database type and version This page is for information purposes only no user functions are available from this page Figure 10 49 Database Versions Page Utility Page Terrain Database Versions The Terrain Database Versions Page Figure 10 50 displays the current version and area of coverage of each terrain and obstacle database This page is for information purposes only no user functions are available from this page Figure 10 50 Terrain Database Versions Page GNS 430 A Pilot s Guide and Reference 190 00140 00 Rev P 10 20 SECTION 10 AUX PAGES 10 4 SETUP 1 PAGE The Setup 1 Page Figure 10 51 provides access via menu options to airspace alarms CDI scale adjustment an arrival alarm units of measure settings position formats map datums and settings for local or UTC time display When a menu option is selected the corresponding page appears providing access to the various unit settings To select a menu option from the Setup 1 Page Figure 10 51 Setup 1 Page Current Page Group Menu Options to Select Highlight with Cursor and Press the ENT Key Position of Current Page within Current Page Group Number of Pages in Current Page Group 1 Press the small right knob momentarily to activate the flashing cursor Figure 10 51 2 Turn the large right knob to select the des
130. aches the target reference waypoint or after the aircraft reaches the waypoint 7 When using a flight plan the target reference waypoint itself can be specified from the waypoints contained in the flight plan By default the last waypoint in the flight plan is selected To select a different waypoint turn the small right knob to select the desired waypoint and press the ENT Key 8 The default profile utilizes a 400 fpm descent rate To change the rate turn the large right knob to highlight the VS Profile field Figure 3 54 and use the small and large right knobs to enter a new rate Press the ENT Key when finished Figure 3 54 VS Profile Field Selected GNS 430 A Pilot s Guide and Reference 190 00140 00 Rev P SECTION 3 NAV PAGES 3 26 With the profile set the vertical speed required VSR is displayed on the Vertical Navigation Page Expect the following to occur when using the vertical navigation feature At one minute prior to reaching the initial descent point a message Approaching VNAV Profile occurs The descent or climb angle also locks to prevent changes in speed from altering the profile If selected the vertical speed required VSR readout on the Default NAV Page and the Map Page show the desired vertical speed to maintain the proper descent or climb angle At 500 feet above or below for a climb the target altitude an Approaching Target Altitude messag
131. age and press the MENU Key to display the User Waypoint Page Menu 2 Turn the large right knob to highlight Delete User Waypoint Figure 7 51 and press the ENT Key Figure 7 51 User Waypoint Page Menu Crossfill allows the pilot to transfer a user waypoint to another 400 500 series unit if installed Please refer to Sections 5 1 and 10 1 for detailed information on crossfill GNS 430 A Pilot s Guide and Reference 190 00140 00 Rev P 7 23 SECTION 7 WPT PAGES User Waypoint List The User Waypoint List Figure 7 52 allows the pilot to review modify rename or delete a selected user waypoint or to delete all user waypoints currently stored in memory The top of the page shows the number of waypoints used and available memory To review and or modify a user waypoint from the User Waypoint List 1 Select the User Waypoint List as described in this section 2 Turn the large right knob to highlight the desired user waypoint Figure 7 52 Figure 7 52 User Waypoint List Page 3 Press the ENT Key to display the User Waypoint Page for the selected waypoint From this page the pilot may review all information defining the waypoint and its position 4 To modify the waypoint s position or reference waypoint information follow the steps described in this section 5 To exit the User Waypoint Page turn the large right knob to highlight Done and press the ENT Key To rename a us
132. ages automatically reset to the original timer value once the message is displayed Event based messages do not use a timer but rather a specific date and time GNS 430 A Pilot s Guide and Reference 190 00140 00 Rev P 10 4 SECTION 10 AUX PAGES Flight Planning Page Fuel Planning To perform fuel planning operations 1 Select Fuel Planning from the Flight Planning Page using the steps described in Section 10 2 2 The current fuel planning mode is displayed at the top of the page Figure 10 7 POINT TO POINT or FPL for a flight plan To change the mode press the MENU Key to display the Fuel Planning Page Menu Figure 10 8 for the other mode then press the ENT Key to accept the other mode Figure 10 7 Fuel Planning Page Figure 10 8 Fuel Planning Page Menu 3 For point to point fuel planning Figure 10 9 turn the small and large right knobs to enter the identifier of the from waypoint Once the waypoint s identifier is entered press the ENT Key to accept the waypoint The flashing cursor moves to the to waypoint Again turn the small and large right knobs to enter the identifier of the to waypoint and press the ENT Key to accept the waypoint OR Figure 10 9 Fuel Planning Page Point to Point 4 For flight plan fuel planning Figure 10 10 turn the small right knob to select the desired flight plan by number already stored in memory 00 is the active fligh
133. ailable to aircraft equipped with a Mode S Data Link such as the Garmin GTX 330 Transponder TIS traffic information from a GTX 330 Transponder can then be displayed on a GNS 430 unit Surveillance data includes aircraft tracked by ATC radar within the coverage volume Aircraft without an operating transponder are invisible to TIS GNS 430 A Pilot s Guide and Reference 190 00140 00 Rev P 12 2 SECTION 12 ADDITIONAL FEATURES TIS displays up to eight traffic targets within 7 nautical miles horizontally from 3000 feet below to 3500 feet above the requesting aircraft Figure 12 1 Figure 12 1 TIS Coverage Volume 7 0 nm 3 500 ft 3 000 ft Not to Scale TIS Operational Procedures TIS warns the user with voice and visual traffic advisories when it predicts an intruder to be a threat The user should not start evasive maneuvers using information from the GNS 430 display or on a traffic advisory only The display and advisories are intended only for assistance in visually locating the traffic due to the lack in resolution and coordination ability The flight crew should attempt to visually acquire the intruder aircraft and maintain a safe separation in accordance with regulatory requirements and good operating practice If the flight crew cannot visually acquire the aircraft they should contact ATC to obtain any information that may assist concerning the intruder aircraft Based on the above procedures minor adjustment
134. ain Database Versions Displays the current version and area of coverage of each terrain and obstacle database If a database is found to be missing and or deficient the TERRAIN system fails the self test and issues a failure message GNS 430 A Pilot s Guide and Reference 190 00140 00 Rev P 10 14 SECTION 10 AUX PAGES Utility Page Checklists To create a checklist 1 Select Checklist from the Utility Page Figure 10 33 using the steps described at the beginning of this section 10 3 Press the ENT Key to display a list of checklists Figure 10 33 Checklists Highlighted 2 Press the MENU Key to display an options menu Turn the large right knob to select Create New Checklist and press the ENT Key 3 Use the small and large right knobs to enter the name of a checklist Press the ENT Key when finished Up to nine different checklists can be created and stored in the GNS 430 4 Use the small and large right knobs to enter each checklist item followed each time by the ENT Key Each checklist may contain up to 30 line items of as much as 16 characters long To execute a checklist 1 With the Checklists Page displayed Figure 10 34 turn the large right knob to select the desired checklist and press the ENT Key Figure 10 34 Desired Checklist Highlighted 2 As each checklist item is completed press the ENT Key to move to the next item on the list Figure 10 35 Figure 10 35 Desire
135. airspace alerts are based upon three dimensional data latitude longitude and altitude to avoid nuisance alerts The alert boundaries for controlled airspace are also sectorized to provide complete information on any nearby airspace Additional information about a nearby airspace such as controlling agency frequency and floor ceiling limits is available from the Nearest Airspace Page Section 8 9 To view additional airspace information 1 Press the small right knob to activate the cursor 2 Turn the large right knob to select the desired airspace from the list 3 Press the ENT Key to view the airspace information Flight Plans FPL The GNS 430 lets the pilot create up to 20 flight plans with up to 31 waypoints in each flight plan Flight plans are created edited and activated using the FPL Key The FPL Page Group includes two pages the Active Flight Plan Page and the Flight Plan Catalog Page Figures 1 30 and 1 31 The Active Flight Plan Page provides information and editing features for the flight plan currently in use referred to as flight plan 00 The Flight Plan Catalog Page serves as the main page for creating new flight plans as well as editing or activating previously created flight plans Figure 1 30 Active Flight Plan Page Figure 1 31 Flight Plan Catalog Page GNS 430 A Pilot s Guide and Reference 190 00140 00 Rev P 1 19 SECTION 1 INTRODUCTION Since using flight plans is
136. all right knob The wind icons are displayed on the NAV Weather Page Displaying Temperature Dewpoints Temperature Dewpoints are displayed on the NAV Weather Page Displaying Temperature Dewpoints on the NAV Weather Page 1 Select the NAV Weather Page 2 Press the small right knob The upper left hand corner data field flashes 3 Turn the small right knob and select TEMP DP 4 Press the small right knob The Temperature Dewpoints are displayed on the NAV Weather Page NOTE See a complete description of all METAR Wind and Temp Dewpoint symbols at the end of this section Troubleshooting Although it is the responsibility of the facility that installed the GDL 49 or GDL 69 69A to correct any hardware problems the pilot can perform some quick troubleshooting steps to find the possible cause of a failure First ensure that the owner operator of the aircraft in which the GDL 49 or GDL 69 69A is installed has subscribed to Echo Flight or XM Satellite Radio for a Service Plan and verify that it has been activated Perform a quick check of the circuit breakers to ensure the GDL 49 or GDL 69 69A has power applied If a failure still exists continue to the Data Link Status Page The fields on the Data Link Status Page may provide insight to a possible failure Information displayed at this page should be noted and provided to the repair station The Connectivity Message table should also provide a
137. allows the map to move beyond its current limits without adjusting the map range When the panning function is selected by pressing the small right knob a target pointer flashes on the Map Display Figure 3 11 A window also appears at the top of the Map Display showing the latitude longitude position of the pointer plus the bearing and distance to the pointer from the present position Pointer Position Window Target Pointer Figure 3 11 Panning on Map Page To select the panning function and pan the Map Display 1 Press the small right knob to activate the panning target pointer 2 Turn the small right knob to move up turn clockwise or down counterclockwise 3 Turn the large right knob to move right turn clockwise or left counterclockwise 4 To cancel the panning function and return to the present position press the small right knob When the target pointer is placed on an object the name of that object is highlighted even if the name wasn t originally displayed on the map This feature applies to airports NAVAIDS user created waypoints roads lakes rivers almost everything displayed on the map except route lines When an airport NAVAID or user waypoint is selected on the Map Display information about the waypoint can be reviewed or the waypoint can be designated as the direct to destination To review information for an on screen airport NAVAID or user waypoint 1 Use the pann
138. an or a direct to expressed in time and based upon a known fuel consumption flow rate MSA minimum safe altitude Uses Grid Minimum Off route Altitudes Grid MORAs to determine a safe altitude within ten miles of the present position Grid MORAs are one degree latitude by one degree longitude in size and clear all reference points within the grid by 1000 feet in areas where the highest reference point is 5000 feet MSL or lower If the highest reference point is above 5000 feet the Grid MORA will clear the highest reference point by 2000 feet TKE track angle error The angle difference between the desired track and the current track An arrow indicates the proper direction to turn to reduce TKE to zero TRK track The direction of movement relative to a ground position Also referred to as ground track VSR vertical speed required The vertical speed necessary to descend climb from current position and altitude to a defined target position and altitude based upon the current ground speed XTK crosstrack error The distance the aircraft is off a desired course in either direction left or right GNS 430 A Pilot s Guide and Reference 190 00140 00 Rev P SECTION 14 MESSAGES ABBREVIATIONS amp NAV TERMS 14 14 Blank Page GNS 430 A Pilot s Guide and Reference 190 00140 00 Rev P APPENDIX A DATA CARD USE A 1 APPENDIX A DATA CARD USE The Jeppesen NavData Card and the Terrain Data
139. an 175 or 3 during a DME arc approach the turn anticipation distance exceeds 90 seconds Stored data was lost All user waypoints flight plans and system settings have been lost due to a memory battery failure or system reset Terrain See Section 11 3 for complete list of TERRAIN related Alerts and Annunciations Terrain configuration conflict The hardware configuration does not match the terrain software configuration The operational status of the terrain components is unknown and the unit should be returned to a Garmin dealer for service Terrain configuration has changed The software has detected a change in the terrain configuration Terrain has failed The terrain functionality self test has failed The operational status of the terrain components is unknown and the unit should be returned to a Garmin dealer for service Timer has expired The count down timer has reached zero Traffic device needs service Either the TCAD battery or the TCAD interrogation device has failed If the message persists contact a Garmin dealer for assistance Unit configuration has changed The GNS 430 has detected a failure during initial power up in its system configuration Some system components may be unusable Try cycling power off and back on If the message persists contact a Garmin dealer for assistance User card format unknown A data card has been inserted but the format of the card is not recognized VLOC has failed
140. and may be changed to display cumulative distance CUM to each waypoint estimated time of arrival ETA estimated time enroute ETE or enroute safe altitude ESA To change a data field on the Active Flight Plan Page 1 With the Active Flight Plan Page displayed press the MENU Key to display the Active Flight Plan Page Menu 2 Turn the large right knob to highlight Change Fields Figure 5 21 and press the ENT Key Figure 5 21 Active Flight Plan Page Menu 3 Turn the large right knob to highlight the field to be changed 4 Turn the small right knob to select the desired data item Figure 5 22 and press the ENT Key Figure 5 22 Select Field Type Window 5 Press the small right knob to remove the cursor To restore factory default settings for data fields on the Active Flight Plan Page 1 With the Active Flight Plan Page displayed press the MENU Key to display the Active Flight Plan Page Menu 2 Turn the large right knob to highlight Restore Defaults and press the ENT Key To activate a flight plan along a specific leg 1 Press the small right knob to activate the cursor and turn the large right knob to highlight the desired destination waypoint 2 Press the MENU Key and select the Activate Leg option from the Active Flight Plan Page Menu Figure 5 23 and press the ENT Key Figure 5 23 Active Flight Plan Page Menu 3 A confirmation window appears With Acti
141. and distance to the pointer from the present position Selecting the panning function and panning the map display 1 Press the small right knob to activate the panning target pointer Figure 12 30 Figure 12 30 Panning the Map Display 2 Turn the small right knob clockwise to move up or counterclockwise to move down 3 Turn the large right knob clockwise to move right or counterclockwise to move left 4 To cancel the panning function and return to the present position press the small right knob When the target pointer is placed on traffic the traffic range and altitude deviation are displayed Figure 12 30 The traffic is identified as TA Traffic Advisory PA Proximity Advisory TRFC Other Traffic GNS 430 A Pilot s Guide and Reference 190 00140 00 Rev P 12 18 SECTION 12 ADDITIONAL FEATURES 12 3 WEATHER DATA LINK INTERFACE This section is written for Garmin GNS 430 Main System Software Version 5 01 and later GDL 49 Main Software Version 2 03 and later GDL 69 69A Main Software Version 2 14 and later Some differences in operation may be observed when comparing the information in this manual to earlier or later software versions NOTE This section is written exclusively for GNS 430 units that are configured with the GDL 49 or GDL 69 A Data Link Satellite Receiver Refer to the 400 500 Series Display Interfaces Pilot s Guide Addendum 190 00140 10 when i
142. and hold to select emergency channel 121 500 MHz 4 VLOC Flip flop Key Used to swap the active and standby VLOC frequencies i e make the selected standby frequency active 10 Small Left Knob COM VLOC Used to tune the kilohertz kHz value of the standby frequency for the communications transceiver COM or the VLOC receiver whichever is currently selected by the tuning cursor Press this knob momentarily to toggle the tuning cursor between the COM and VLOC frequency fields 11 Large Left Knob COM VLOC Used to tune the megahertz MHz value of the standby frequency for the communications transceiver COM or the VLOC receiver whichever is currently selected by the tuning cursor Right hand Keys and Knobs 5 CLR Key Used to erase information remove map detail or to cancel an entry Press and hold the CLR key to immediately display the Default NAV Page 6 Direct to Key Provides access to the direct to function which allows the pilot to enter a destination waypoint and establishes a direct course to the selected destination Section 4 7 RNG Key Allows the pilot to select the desired map range Use the up arrow to zoom out to a larger area or the down arrow to zoom in to a smaller area 8 MENU Key Displays a context sensitive list of options This options list allows the pilot to access additional features or make settings changes which relate to the currently displayed page 9 ENT Key
143. and side of the display These fields are user selectable Section 3 4 Selecting Desired On screen Data to allow the pilot to configure the unit Available settings include altitude bearing enroute safe altitude estimated time of arrival minimum safe altitude and ground track A Map Setup Page is provided to designate the maximum range at which each map feature appears These settings provide an automatic decluttering of the map based upon preferences while adjusting the range See Section 14 3 for definitions of these navigation terms While viewing the Map Page the pilot can quickly declutter and remove many of the background map details by pressing the CLR Key repeatedly until the desired detail is depicted To change the map range press the up arrow to zoom out or the down arrow to zoom in of the RNG map range Key The current map range is depicted in the lower left corner of the Map Display Direct to Navigation The GNS 430 can use direct point to point navigation to provide guidance from takeoff to touchdown even in the IFR environment Once a destination is selected the unit provides speed course and distance data based upon a direct course from the present position to the destination A destination can be selected from any page with the Direct to Key To select a direct to destination 1 Press the Direct to Key The Select Direct to Waypoint Page appears with the destination field highlighte
144. and the geographic detail will be removed from the Map Display airport and NAVAID remain Figure 3 9 Overzoom on Map Page The Setup Map option described in Section 3 4 allows the pilot to define the maximum range at which each map feature appears This provides the pilot with complete control to minimize screen clutter The pilot can also quickly remove items from the map using the CLR Key To quickly declutter the Map Display Press the CLR Key momentarily as often as needed to select the desired amount of map detail The CLR Key allows the pilot to quickly declutter the Map Display providing four levels of map detail Note the 2 1 and 3 are also provided suffix designation in Figure 3 10 indicating each successive declutter level Map Detail Level Figure 3 10 Detail Level on Map Page The right hand side of the Map Page includes four user selectable data fields Figure 3 8 By default the displayed data is destination waypoint name WPT desired track DTK distance to destination waypoint DIS and ground speed GS Any of these data fields may be changed to display a different data type as outlined in Section 3 4 The four data fields can also be removed from the map to show a larger map image as described in Section 3 4 GNS 430 A Pilot s Guide and Reference 190 00140 00 Rev P SECTION 3 NAV PAGES 3 7 Map Panning Another Map Page function is panning which
145. approaching BODRY intersection a waypoint alert NEXT DTK 209 appears in the lower right corner of the screen Figure 6 33 Figure 6 33 Waypoint Alert 12 At 2 0 nm from the FAF DEPOY intersection the GNS 430 switches from terminal mode to approach mode CDI scaling is tightened from 1 0 to 0 3 nm full scale deflection GNS 430 A Pilot s Guide and Reference 190 00140 00 Rev P SECTION 6 PROCEDURES 6 13 13 When approaching the FAF a waypoint alert NEXT DTK 209 appears in the lower right corner Figure 6 34 Make any course adjustments necessary for the final course segment FAF to MAP Figure 6 34 Final Approach 14 After crossing the FAF the destination sequences to the MAP RW21 the runway threshold With the needle centered fly toward the MAP observing the altitude minimums dictated by the approach plate When viewing the Map Page note that the final course segment is displayed in magenta the active leg of the flight plan always appears in magenta and a dashed line extends the course beyond the MAP Do not follow this extended course Instead follow published missed approach procedures 15 When approaching the MAP a waypoint alert APPRCHING WPT appears in the lower right corner 16 After crossing the MAP SUSP appears above the OBS Key Figure 6 35 indicating that automatic sequencing of approach waypoints is suspended at the MAP A f
146. arguably one of the more complex features of the GNS 430 it will be discussed only briefly here with focus on creating a new flight plan and activating it to use for navigation Answers to additional questions about flight plans not found in this brief introduction can be found in Section 5 Flight Plans To create a new flight plan 1 Press the FPL Key 2 Turn the small right knob to select the Flight Plan Catalog Page 3 Press the MENU Key to display the Flight Plan Catalog Page Menu Figure 1 32 Figure 1 32 Flight Plan Catalog Page Menu 4 Turn the large right knob to select Create New Flight Plan and press the ENT Key 5 The cursor appears on the first waypoint identifier field located directly below WAYPOINT Use the large and small right knobs to enter the identifier of the first waypoint in the flight plan The small knob is used to select the desired letter or number and the large knob is used to move to the next character space 6 Press the ENT Key once the identifier has been selected The cursor moves to the next blank waypoint identifier field 7 Repeat steps 5 and 6 above until all waypoints for the flight plan have been entered Figure 1 33 Figure 1 33 Enter Flight Plan Waypoints Once the flight plan is created it may be activated from the Flight Plan Catalog Page Menu Activating the flight plan places it into flight plan 00 a copy of it still resides in the
147. ars in the lower right corner of the screen Figure 6 15 As the distance DIS to the IAF approaches zero the alert is replaced by a turn advisory TURN TO 205 Dial the outbound course of 205 into the CDI or HSI using the OBS knob GNS 430 A Pilot s Guide and Reference 190 00140 00 Rev P SECTION 6 PROCEDURES 6 7 Figure 6 15 Waypoint Alert 4 Fly the outbound course 5 Approximately one minute after passing the FAF LYH the alert message START PROC TRN appears in the lower right corner of the screen Initiate the procedure turn at any time after receiving this alert message Figure 6 16 Terminal Mode DO NOT USE FOR NAVIGATION Refer to Figure 6 16 for the following steps 6 Course guidance is provided relative to the outbound leg from the FAF No guidance through the procedure turn itself is given The procedure turn is displayed on the Map Page and indicated as the active leg on the Default NAV Page and the Active Flight Plan Page The CDI needle starts moving to the right 7 When turning to intercept the inbound course the GNS 430 sequences to the inbound leg to the FAF the CDI needle swings to the opposite side to provide proper sensing along the final course segment and NEXT DTK 025 appears in the lower right corner of the screen Figure 6 17 Figure 6 17 Sequence to Inbound Leg 8 Turn to the final approach course 9 Within 2
148. ars in the lower right corner of the screen 9 After crossing the MAP SUSP appears above the OBS Key indicating that automatic sequencing of approach waypoints is suspended at the MAP If a missed approach is required use the OBS Key to initiate the missed approach sequence as outlined below Course from fix to altitude legs show the specific target altitude on the Active Flight Plan Page Figure 6 63 and the Default NAV Page Figure 6 64 The missed approach sequence for the Palmdale VOR DME RWY 25 approach includes a course from fix to altitude leg Figure 6 63 Active Flight Plan Page Figure 6 64 Default NAV Page GNS 430 A Pilot s Guide and Reference 190 00140 00 Rev P SECTION 6 PROCEDURES 6 23 MISSED APPROACH Climb to 5000 outbound via PMD VOR R 282 then climbing RIGHT turn to 7000 direct PMD VOR and hold DO NOT USE FOR NAVIGATION MISSED APPROACH Palmdale CA AF Plant 42 VOR DME or GPS Rwy 25 Figure 6 65 Palmdale Missed Approach In this instance the leg corresponds to the initial phase of the missed approach which reads Climb to 5000 outbound via PMD VOR R 282 Refer to Figure 6 65 for the following steps 1 After crossing the MAP press the OBS Key The missed approach sequence is automatically offered starting with the course from fix to altitude leg The NEXT DTK 282 alert appears in the lower right corner of the
149. arture Intersection NDB VOR User Waypoint To quickly select a WPT page 1 From any page press and hold the CLR Key to select the Default NAV Page this step may be skipped if the unit is already displaying any of the main pages 2 Turn the large right knob to select the WPT Page Group WPT appears in the lower right corner of the screen 3 Turn the small right knob to select the desired WPT page NOTE The GNS 430 uses International Civil Aviation Organization ICAO identifiers for all airports All U S airport identifiers which contain only letters use the prefix K For example Los Angeles International is KLAX under the ICAO standard Other airports such as Otten Memorial 3VS that contain numbers in the identifier do not require the K prefix Many foreign countries use two letter prefixes The WPT Page Group includes ten pages Figure 7 1 While viewing any WPT page turn the small right knob to select a different WPT page The first six pages provide detailed information for the selected airport location runways frequencies approaches arrivals and departures The last four pages provide information for intersections NDBs VORs and user created waypoints After a WPT page is selected information for a waypoint may be viewed by entering the identifier or name of the desired waypoint Airports NDBs and VORs may be selected by identifier facility name or location city
150. at was requested When a request is received a check mark is placed in the box Viewing the Data Link Request Log Page 1 Use the small and large right knobs and select the Data Link Page from the AUX Group of pages 2 Highlight Data Link Log Figure 12 38 and press the ENT Key Figure 12 38 Data Link Page 3 The Data Link Request Log Page is displayed Figure 12 39 Figure 12 39 Data Link Request Log Page Sending Position Reports GDL 49 Only The Data Link allows for accurate location tracking of the aircraft by sending the aircraft s position manually or automatically to the EchoFlight website www EchoFlight com for use by third party EchoFlight customers Sending the Present Position 1 Select the Data Link Page see preceding step 1 2 Highlight Position Report Figure 12 40 and press the ENT Key Figure 12 40 Data Link Page 3 The Position Report Page is displayed with the following six fields Nearest VOR Nearest VOR identifier Distance The distance from the nearest VOR Radial The radial from the nearest VOR Position Displays the aircraft s current position expressed in Latitude and Longitude GNS 430 A Pilot s Guide and Reference 190 00140 00 Rev P 12 27 SECTION 12 ADDITIONAL FEATURES Auto Request This field is used to set the time interval for the system to automatically send the position The time options are OFF
151. ated from the User Waypoint Page or the Map Page To create a new user waypoint simply enter its name identifier and position or reference another waypoint by radial and distance To create a new user waypoint by entering its latitude longitude position 1 With the User Waypoint Page displayed press the small right knob to activate the cursor 2 Use the small and large right knobs to enter a name for the new waypoint Figure 7 38 and press the ENT Key The present position appears in the position field at the bottom of the page Figure 7 39 To create a waypoint at the present position turn the large right knob to highlight Create and skip to step 6 Figure 7 38 User Waypoint Name Field Selected Figure 7 39 Waypoint Name Field Highlighted GNS 430 A Pilot s Guide and Reference 190 00140 00 Rev P 7 18 SECTION 7 WPT PAGES 3 Turn the large right knob to highlight the position field at the bottom of the page 4 Use the small and large right knobs to enter the position coordinates for the new waypoint Figure 7 40 Figure 7 40 Present Position Field Selected 5 Press the ENT Key to accept the selected position 6 The cursor moves to Create Press the ENT Key to add the new waypoint to memory 7 Press the small right knob to remove the flashing cursor To create a new user waypoint by referencing an existing waypoint 1 With the User Waypoint Page displayed press the small
152. aypoint s identifier and press the ENT Key a second time Figure 8 8 with Activate highlighted to begin navigating to the selected waypoint Figure 8 8 Activate Highlighted GNS 430 A Pilot s Guide and Reference 190 00140 00 Rev P 8 4 SECTION 8 NRST PAGES 8 2 NEAREST AIRPORT PAGE The Nearest Airport Page displays the identifier symbol bearing and distance to the nine nearest airports within 200 nm of the present position For each airport listed the Nearest Airport Page also indicates the best available approach common traffic advisory frequency CTAF and the length of the longest runway Figure 8 9 Figure 8 9 Nearest Airport Page Airport Identifier Symbol Bearing To and Distance To Best Available Approach Current Page Group Scroll Bar Tower or CTAF Frequency and Longest Runway Position of Current Page within Current Page Group Number of Pages in Current Page Group The Nearest Airport Page can be configured to exclude shorter runways or undesirable runway surface types so that the corresponding airports do not appear on the list The pilot may wish to use this feature to exclude seaplane bases or runway lengths which would be difficult or impossible to land upon See Section 10 5 Setup Page 2 Nearest Airport Criteria for additional details The Nearest Airport Page may be used to quickly tune the COM transceiver to a nearby airport The selected frequency is pla
153. b to display a window of available runways Figure 7 29 Continue turning the small right knob to select the desired runway ALL may appear in the runway field indicating the departure procedure applies to all runways For airports with parallel runways B may appear at the end of the runway designation to indicate the departure procedure applies to both runways Figure 7 29 Runway Window 6 Press the ENT Key The cursor moves to the transitions TRANS field 7 Turn the small right knob to display a window of available transitions Continue turning the small right knob to select the desired transition 8 Press the ENT Key To remove the flashing cursor press the small right knob GNS 430 A Pilot s Guide and Reference 190 00140 00 Rev P 7 14 SECTION 7 WPT PAGES Airport Departure Page Options The following option is available for the Airport Departure Page by pressing the MENU Key Load into Active FPL allows the pilot to load the selected departure into the active flight plan This is identical to loading a departure procedure from the Procedures Page as described in Section 6 1 To load a departure procedure from the Airport Departure Page 1 Select the desired departure runway and transition using the steps above 2 Press the MENU Key to display the Airport Departure Page Menu 3 Press the ENT Key to select the Load into Active FPL option Figure 7 30 Figu
154. b to select the Map Page 2 Press the MENU key Turn the small right knob to select Setup Map 3 The flashing cursor highlights the GROUP field Turn the small right knob to select Traffic Figure 12 17 and press the ENT Key Figure 12 17 Map Setup Window 4 Turn the large right knob to select the desired Traffic Mode option Turn the small right knob to select the desired option and press the ENT Key Repeat the step for Traffic Symbol and Traffic Label 5 Press the CLR Key to return the Map Page GNS 430 A Pilot s Guide and Reference 190 00140 00 Rev P 12 9 SECTION 12 ADDITIONAL FEATURES Thumbnail Traffic on Map Page The Map Page can display traffic in a thumbnail format in any of the top three data fields on the right hand side of the Map Page Displaying Thumbnail Traffic on the Map Page 1 Turn the small right knob to select the Map Page 2 Press the MENU Key to display the Page Menu 3 Turn the small right knob to select Change Fields and press the ENT Key 4 Select one of the top three configurable fields Select TRFC from the Select Field Type List and press the ENT Key Note that the thumbnail range defaults to 6 nm and cannot be changed Figure 12 18 Figure 12 18 Thumbnail Traffic on Map Page NOTE To display thumbnail traffic on the left hand side of the display see Setup 2 Page Auxiliary Configuration in Section 8 5 Highlighting TIS Traf
155. bean Czech Republic Denmark Estonia Finland France Germany Greece Hawaii Iceland Ireland Italy Latvia Lithuania Mexico Netherlands Norway Poland Portugal Slovakia Spain Sweden Switzerland United Kingdom United States Indicates partial coverage Table 11 5 Database Coverage Areas GNS 430 A Pilot s Guide and Reference 190 00140 00 Rev P 12 1 SECTION 12 ADDITIONAL FEATURES SECTION 12 ADDITIONAL FEATURES CAUTION The Weather Data Link and TIS information contained in this section is not intended to replace the documentation that is supplied with the GDL 49 the GDL 69 A Data Link and the GTX 330 Transponder CAUTION TIS is not intended to be used as a collision avoidance system and does not relieve pilot responsibility to see and avoid other aircraft TIS should not be used for avoidance maneuvers during Instrument Meteorological Conditions IMC or other times when there is no visual contact with the intruder aircraft TIS is intended only to assist in visual acquisition of other aircraft in Visual Meteorological Conditions VMC Avoidance maneuvers are not recommended nor authorized as a direct result of a TIS intruder display or TIS alert NOTE Garmin is not responsible for Mode S geographical coverage Operation of the ground stations is the responsibility of the FAA Refer to the Aeronautical Information Manual for a Terminal Mode S Radar Site Map covering the U S NOTE
156. bility to roll up to 25 and provide three pilot cues for turn anticipation 1 A waypoint alert NEXT DTK flashes in the lower right corner of the screen 10 seconds before the turn point Figure C 6 Figure C 6 CDI at 1 nm Scale 2 A flashing turn advisory TURN TO appears in the lower right corner of the screen when the aircraft is to begin the turn Set the HSI to the next DTK value and begin the turn 3 The To From indicator on the HSI or CDI flips momentarily to indicate that the aircraft has crossed the midpoint of the turn For more information on waypoint alerts and turn advisories see Sections 6 2 and 6 3 When does the CDI scale change and what does it change to The GNS 430 begins a smooth CDI scale transition from the 5 0 nm enroute oceanic mode to the 1 0 nm terminal mode scale 30 nm from the destination airport Figure C 7 The CDI scale further transitions to 0 3 nm approach mode at 2 nm prior to the FAF during an active approach To return the CDI to the 1 nm scale during a missed approach situation activate the missed approach sequence by pressing the OBS Key as described in Section 6 2 Flying the Missed Approach The CDI scale is also 1 0 nm terminal mode within 30 nm of the departure airport 0 3 nm 30 nm 2nm FAF MAP 1 nm 1 nm 5 nm 1 minute Approach Enroute Oceanic Terminal Figure C 7 CDI Scale Transition GNS 430 A Pilot
157. ble for warranty coverage Online auction confirmations are not accepted for warranty verification To obtain warranty service an original or copy of the sales receipt from the original retailer is required Garmin will not replace missing components from any package purchased through an online auction International Purchases A separate warranty may be provided by international distributors for devices purchased outside the United States depending on the country If applicable this warranty is provided by the local in country distributor and this distributor provides local service for your device Distributor warranties are only valid in the area of intended distribution Devices purchased in the United States or Canada must be returned to the Garmin service center in the United Kingdom the United States Canada or Taiwan for service To obtain warranty service contact your local Garmin Authorized Service Center For assistance in locating a Service Center near you visit the Garmin Website at http www garmin com or contact Garmin Customer Service at 800 800 1020 GNS 430 A Pilot s Guide and Reference 190 00140 00 Rev P 1 1 SECTION 1 INTRODUCTION SECTION 1 INTRODUCTION 1 1 ACCESSORIES AND PACKING LIST Congratulations on choosing the finest most advanced panel mount IFR navigation communication system available The GNS 430 represents Garmin s commitment to provide accurate easy to use avionics Before installing
158. ce through each leg of the approach automatically sequencing through each of these legs up to the missed approach point MAP Approaches may be flown as published with the full transition using any published feeder route or initial approach fix IAF or may be flown with a vectors to final transition NOTE The following approach examples are intended for instructional use only and are not to be used for navigation GNS 430 A Pilot s Guide and Reference 190 00140 00 Rev P SECTION 6 PROCEDURES 6 4 DO NOT USE FOR NAVIGATION Figure 6 7 Sample Approach Select Destination Select and Load the approach Activate the approach Approach operations on the GNS 430 typically begin with the same basic steps refer to Figure 6 7 for the following steps 1 Select the destination airport using the Direct to Key or as the last waypoint in the active flight plan 2 Choose the Select Approach option from the Procedures Page Section 6 1 or from the Active Flight Plan Page Menu Section 5 2 Active Flight Plan Options 3 Load the approach often while enroute in anticipation of its future use This places the approach in the active flight plan but retains course guidance in the enroute section until the approach is activated 4 Activate the full approach or vectors to final as appropriate In some scenarios it may be more convenient to immediately activat
159. ced in the standby field of the COM Window and activated using the COM Flip flop Key To quickly tune the common traffic advisory frequency CTAF from the Nearest Airport Page 1 Select the Nearest Airport Page using the steps outlined in Section 8 1 2 Press the small right knob to activate the cursor 3 Turn the large right knob to scroll through the list highlighting the COM frequency associated with the desired airport Figure 8 10 Figure 8 10 COM Frequency Highlighted 4 Press the ENT Key to place the selected frequency in the standby field of the COM Window Figure 8 11 Figure 8 11 Frequency Moved to Standby Field GNS 430 A Pilot s Guide and Reference 190 00140 00 Rev P 8 5 SECTION 8 NRST PAGES 5 Press the COM Flip flop Key to activate the selected frequency Figure 8 12 Figure 8 12 Frequency Moved to Active Field 6 Press the small right knob to remove the flashing cursor Additional communication frequencies runway infor mation and more is available from the Nearest Airport Page by highlighting the identifier of the desired airport and pressing the ENT Key To view additional information for a nearby airport 1 Select the Nearest Airport Page using the steps outlined in Section 8 1 2 Press the small right knob to activate the cursor 3 Turn the large right knob to scroll through the list highlighting the identifier of the desired airport Figure 8 13 Figu
160. ch The aircraft is inbound and within 3 nm of the FAF and the active VLOC frequency does not match the published frequency for the approach Tune the standby VLOC frequency to the proper frequency and press the VLOC Flip flop Key to activate the frequency GNS 430 A Pilot s Guide and Reference 190 00140 00 Rev P SECTION 14 MESSAGES ABBREVIATIONS amp NAV TERMS 14 7 Select auto sequence mode The OBS Key was pressed disabling auto sequencing of waypoints in a flight plan or instrument procedure The OBS Key should be pressed again to enable auto sequencing because 1 no destination waypoint has been selected or 2 the GPS receiver cannot currently determine its position Select VLOC on CDI for approach The aircraft is inbound and within 3 nm of the FAF and the active approach is not a GPS approved approach Verify that the VLOC receiver is tuned to the proper frequency and press the CDI Key to display VLOC directly above the CDI Key Set course to The course select for the external CDI or HSI should be set to the specified course The message only occurs when the current selected course is greater than 10 different from the desired track Steep turn ahead This message appears approximately one minute prior to a turn in one of the following three conditions 1 the turn requires a bank angle in excess of 25 in order to stay on course 2 the turn requires a course change greater th
161. checklist 3 Once the pilot completes the desired checklist s press the small right knob to return to the Checklists Page Press the small right knob again to return to normal operation on the Satellite Status Page or the Map Page 4 Once instrument operation has been verified with the Instrument Panel Self test Page displayed press the ENT Key NOTE The GNS 430 can hold up to nine checklists with up to 30 entries in each checklist GNS 430 A Pilot s Guide and Reference 190 00140 00 Rev P 1 8 SECTION 1 INTRODUCTION Satellite Status Page The Satellite Status Page Figure 1 9 appears as the GNS 430 attempts to collect satellite information When an Acquiring status is displayed on the Satellite Status Page the signal strengths of any satellites received appear as bar graph readings This is a good indication that the unit is receiving signals and a position fix is being determined Following the first time use of the GNS 430 the time required for a position fix varies usually from one to two minutes Figure 1 9 Satellite Status Page If the unit can only obtain enough satellites for 2D navigation no altitude the unit uses the altitude provided by the altitude encoder if one is connected The INTEG annunciator bottom left corner of the screen indicates that satellite coverage is insufficient to pass built in integrity monitoring tests In the example above not enough satelli
162. clear indication of any potential internal failures If no indications exist check the circuit breakers and electrical connections to the GDL 49 or GDL 69 69A and ensure the unit has power applied Repair stations are equipped to repair the system should a hardware failure exist GNS 430 A Pilot s Guide and Reference 190 00140 00 Rev P 12 32 SECTION 12 ADDITIONAL FEATURES Monitoring the Data Link The Data Link Status Page provides an indication of the integrity of the Data Link The Data Link Page allows the pilot to monitor the system and determine the possible cause of a failure View the Data Link Status Page 1 From the AUX Page Group select the Data Link Page 2 Highlight Data Link Status and press the ENT Key 3 The Data Link Status Page Figure 12 47 is displayed Figure 12 47 Data Link Status Page The GDL 49 Datalink Status Page shows the following fields TX Queue Shows the number of requests in the GDL 49 s transmit queue waiting to be sent to the satellite RX Queue Shows the number of responses in the GDL 49 s receive queue waiting to be sent to the GNS 430 Sat ID Connectivity Shows the current satellite in view and also indicates the status of the current satellite connection See Table 12 8 SAT ID CONNECTIVITY FIELD MESSAGE DESCRIPTION _ _ _ RS 232 communication with the GDL 49 has been lost Data Link has failed Ther
163. clusion information Utility Page Sunrise Sunset To calculate sunrise and sunset times at any waypoint or the present position 1 Select Sunrise Sunset from the Utility Page using the steps described at the beginning of this section Figure 10 45 Figure 10 45 Sunrise Sunset Highlighted 2 The flashing cursor highlights the waypoint field Use the small and large right knobs to enter the identifier of the waypoint at which the pilot wants to determine sunrise and sunset times Press the ENT Key when finished To determine sunrise sunset times for the present position press the CLR Key followed by the ENT Key 3 The flashing cursor moves to the date field Figure 10 46 Use the small and large right knobs to enter the date for which the pilot wants to determine sunrise and sunset times Figure 10 46 Date Field Highlighted GNS 430 A Pilot s Guide and Reference 190 00140 00 Rev P 10 19 SECTION 10 AUX PAGES 4 Press the ENT Key to calculate sunrise and sunset times for the selected location and date Figure 10 47 Figure 10 47 Sunrise Sunset Page Utility Page Software Versions The Software Versions Page Figure 10 48 displays software version information for each of the various subsystems contained within the GNS 430 This page is for information purposes only no user functions are available from this page Figure 10 48 Software Versions Page Utility Page Database Versions The Dat
164. d 2 Turn the small right knob to enter the first letter of the destination waypoint identifier The destination waypoint may be an airport VOR NDB intersection or user waypoint as long as it is in the database or stored in memory as a user waypoint 3 Turn the large right knob to the right to move the cursor to the next character position 4 Repeat steps 2 and 3 to spell out the rest of the waypoint identifier Figure 1 15 Figure 1 15 Direct to Waypoint Page GNS 430 A Pilot s Guide and Reference 190 00140 00 Rev P 1 12 SECTION 1 INTRODUCTION 5 Press the ENT Key to confirm the identifier The Activate function field is highlighted Figure 1 16 Figure 1 16 Activate Highlighted 6 Press the ENT Key to activate a direct to course to the selected destination Once a direct to destination is selected press and hold the CLR Key to display the Default NAV Page Default NAV Page During most flights the Default NAV Page the Map Page and the NAV COM Page are the primary pages used for navigation To select the Default NAV Page Press and hold the CLR Key Figure 1 17 Figure 1 17 Default NAV Page TO FROM Flag Course Deviation Indicator CDI Active Leg of Flight Plan User selectable Data Fields The Default NAV Page Figure 1 17 displays a graphic course deviation indicator CDI the active leg of the flight plan as defined by the current from and
165. d for advisory use only to aid the pilot in visually acquiring traffic No avoidance maneuvers should be based solely upon TAS or TCAS I traffic information It is the responsibility of the pilot in command to see and manuever to avoid traffic NOTE This section assumes the user has experience operating the GNS 430 and the GTS 8XX NOTE References to the GTS 8XX throughout this document refer equally to the GTS 800 GTS 820 and GTS 850 unless otherwise noted NOTE TIS is disabled when a GTS 8XX unit is installed Symbol Traffic Type Description Traffic Advisory TA A TA Traffic Advisory is generated when the GTS 8XX predicts that an intruder aircraft may pose a collision threat A solid yellow circle represents an intruder aircraft that meets the TA criteria as described in the TA Alerting Conditions section A TA consists of the traffic symbol and an aural alert e g traffic 12 o clock high 3 miles Out of Range Traffic Advisory This solid yellow half circle appears on the outer range ring under the same conditions and has the same urgency as a TA Its appearance differs from the TA only to signify that the intruder is outside of the current range of the Traffic Page Proximity Advisory PA Proximity Advisories PA are displayed as solid white may be configured as cyan diamonds PAs are defined as traffic within the 6 0 nm range within 1200 ft of altitude separation and are not a traffic ad
166. d Checklist Item Highlighted To edit a checklist 1 With the Checklists Page displayed turn the large right knob to select the desired checklist and press the ENT Key 2 Press the MENU Key to display an options menu Select Edit Item and press the ENT Key then use the small and large right knobs to edit each checklist item Press the ENT Key when finished GNS 430 A Pilot s Guide and Reference 190 00140 00 Rev P 10 15 SECTION 10 AUX PAGES To insert a checklist step into an existing checklist 1 With the Checklists Page displayed turn the large right knob to select the desired checklist and press the ENT Key 2 Turn the large right knob to highlight the existing checklist entry which immediately follows the new checklist step 3 Turn the small and large right knobs to enter the new checklist step Press the ENT Key when finished To delete a checklist or all checklists 1 With the Checklists Page displayed press the MENU Key to display an options menu 2 Turn the large right knob to select delete checklist or delete all checklists and press the ENT Key to remove the checklist or all checklists from memory To copy a checklist 1 With the Checklists Page displayed and the desired checklist selected press the MENU Key 2 Turn the large right knob to select Copy Checklist and press the ENT Key to copy the checklist to an empty checklist memory location To so
167. d airport Figure 1 26 Figure 1 26 Airport Location Page 4 To display runway and frequency information press the small right knob to remove the cursor and turn the small right knob to display the desired information page The Nearest Airport Page may be used in conjunction with the Direct to Key to quickly set a course to a nearby facility in an in flight emergency Selecting a nearby airport as a direct to destination overrides the flight plan or cancels a previously selected direct to destination The pilot still has the option of returning to the flight plan by cancelling the direct to see Section 4 1 Cancelling Direct to Navigation GNS 430 A Pilot s Guide and Reference 190 00140 00 Rev P 1 17 SECTION 1 INTRODUCTION To select a nearby airport as a direct to destination from the Nearest Airport Page 1 From the Nearest Airport Page press the small right knob to activate the cursor 2 Turn the large right knob to select the desired airport from the list 3 Press the Direct to Key the ENT Key twice to navigate to the nearby airport To select a nearby airport as a direct to destination from the Airport Information Page 1 Press the Direct to Key then press the ENT Key Figure 1 27 Figure 1 27 Activate Highlighted 2 Press the ENT Key again to navigate to the nearby airport Nearest NRST Airspace Page The last page in the NRST group the Nearest Airspace Page Figure 1
168. d altitude can be achieved by frequently updating the altimeter setting to the nearest reporting station along the flight path However because actual atmosphere conditions seldom match the standard conditions defined by the International Standard Atmosphere ISA model where pressure temperature and lapse rates have fixed values it is common for the baro corrected altitude as read from the altimeter to differ from the GPS MSL altitude This variation results in the aircraft s true altitude differing from the baro corrected altitude Using TERRAIN During power up the terrain obstacle database versions are displayed along with a disclaimer to the pilot At the same time TERRAIN self test begins A test failure is annunciated for TERRAIN as shown in Table 11 4 GNS 430 A Pilot s Guide and Reference 190 00140 00 Rev P 11 3 SECTION 11 TERRAIN 11 2 TERRAIN PAGE See Section 3 5 for a complete description of the TERRAIN Page and its operation TERRAIN Symbols The symbols and colors in Figure 11 1 and Table 11 1 are used to represent obstacles and potential impact points on the TERRAIN Page TERRAIN uses yellow caution and red warning to depict terrain information relative to aircraft altitude Each color is associated with an alert severity level Terrain graphics and visual annunciations also use these color assignments Potential Impact Point Unlighted Obstacle Projected Flight Path 1000 ft
169. d go maneuver Traffic Page Traffic can be displayed both on the Map Page only if heading is available and on the Traffic Page Figure 12 23 The orientation source shown at the top of the display first uses heading HDG then GPS Track TRK if no heading is available to orient the display If the GTS 8XX does not have bearing information for an active TA TA followed by range relative altitude and altitude trend is displayed in the lower right corner The Traffic Banner is displayed if more than one TA with no bearing info is active while the TA of most immediate threat is displayed in text below the banner Figure 12 23 Traffic Page Orientation Source Traffic Display Range Traffic Advisory with no bearing information Operating Mode Traffic Banner Traffic Page Display Range The display range on the Traffic Page can be changed at any time Changing the display range on the Traffic Page Press the RNG Key to step through the following range options 2 nm 2 and 6 nm 6 and 12 nm 12 and 24 nm GTS 820 850 only 24 and 40 nm GTS 820 850 only GNS 430 A Pilot s Guide and Reference 190 00140 00 Rev P 12 15 SECTION 12 ADDITIONAL FEATURES Altitude Display Mode The GTS 8XX has four altitude display modes Figure 12 24 Normal 2 700 ft Above 2 700 ft to 9 000 ft Below 9 000 ft to 2 700 ft and Unrestricted 9 900 ft The G
170. desired track differ by more than 10 a Set course to message appears on the Message Page GNS 430 A Pilot s Guide and Reference 190 00140 00 Rev P SECTION 6 PROCEDURES 6 16 7 The next point in the approach is an intermediate fix labeled D025G When approaching this intermediate fix a waypoint alert NEXT DTK 205 appears in the lower right corner of the screen Figure 6 43 As the distance to this fix approaches zero the alert is replaced by a turn advisory TURN TO 205 Dial this course into the CDI or HSI using the OBS knob Figure 6 43 Intermediate Approach Fix 8 At 2 0 nm from the FAF TOP VOR the GNS 430 switches from terminal mode to approach mode CDI scaling is tightened from 1 0 to 0 3 nm full scale deflection Refer to Figure 6 44 for the following steps DO NOT USE FOR NAVIGATION Figure 6 44 Approach Mode 9 When approaching the FAF NEXT DTK 214 appears in the lower right corner of the screen Figure 6 45 Select this course on the CDI or HSI using the OBS knob Figure 6 45 Final Approach Fix GNS 430 A Pilot s Guide and Reference 190 00140 00 Rev P SECTION 6 PROCEDURES 6 17 10 After crossing the FAF the destination sequences to the MAP RW22 the runway threshold With the needle centered fly toward the MAP observing the altitude minimums dictated by the approach plate When viewing the Map Page
171. dvisory TURN TO 070 Dial the outbound course into the CDI or HSI using the OBS knob 2 Fly the course from fix to distance leg as shown on the Active Flight Plan Page and the Default NAV Page Figures 6 61 and 6 62 Note the magenta line in Figure 6 62 which represents the currently active leg of the approach The distance DIS displayed on the above screens is TO the D13 0 point The flight plan automatically sequences to the next leg upon reaching D13 0 Figure 6 61 Default NAV Page Figure 6 62 Map Page GNS 430 A Pilot s Guide and Reference 190 00140 00 Rev P SECTION 6 PROCEDURES 6 22 3 At 13 0 nm from the FAF a waypoint alert NEXT DTK 265 appears in the lower right corner of the screen Turn to intercept the final approach course and watch for the CDI needle to begin to center 4 When approaching the intermediate fix CF25 a waypoint alert NEXT DTK 265 appears 5 Within 2 0 nm of the FAF THERO the GNS 430 switches from terminal mode to approach mode APR appears in the lower left corner of the screen replacing TERM CDI scaling is tightened from 1 0 to 0 3 nm full scale deflection 6 When approaching the FAF NEXT DTK 265 appears in the lower right corner of the screen 7 After crossing the FAF the destination sequences to the MAP MA25 8 When approaching the MAP a waypoint alert APPRCHING WPT appe
172. e 1 Select Units Mag Var from the Setup 1 Page using the steps described at the beginning of this section 2 Turn the large right knob to highlight the desired units of measure category Figure 10 63 GNS 430 A Pilot s Guide and Reference 190 00140 00 Rev P 10 25 SECTION 10 AUX PAGES Figure 10 63 Units Mag Var Page The following categories and corresponding units of measure are available DIS SPD Distance and speed in Nautical nautical miles knots Statute miles miles per hour or Metric kilometers kilometers per hour terms ALT VS Altitude and vertical speed in Feet feet per minute Meters meters per minute or Meters meters per second PRESSURE Barometric pressure in Inches or Millibars TEMP Temperature in degrees Celsius or Fahrenheit FUEL Fuel units in Gallons Imperial Gallons Kilograms Liters or Pounds 3 Turn the small right knob to select the desired units of measure for the selected category Press the ENT Key to accept the selection Setup 1 Page Position Format Map Datum To change the position format 1 Select Position Format Map Datum from the Setup 1 Page Figure 10 64 using the steps described at the beginning of this section Figure 10 64 Position Map Datum Highlighted 2 The flashing cursor is on the position format field Figure 10 65 Turn the small right knob to select the desired position format
173. e is provided The VSR readout on the Default NAV Page and the Map Page is blanked out at this point Vertical navigation messages can be turned on or off by default the messages are off Turning the messages off allows the pilot to keep the previous profile settings without having them generate messages when the feature is not needed To disable enable the vertical navigation VNAV messages 1 Press the MENU Key to display the Vertical Navigation Page Menu Figure 3 55 Figure 3 55 VNAV Page Menu 2 With VNAV Messages On highlighted press the ENT Key Or if the messages are already on to turn them off make sure VNAV Messages Off is highlighted and press the ENT Key GNS 430 A Pilot s Guide and Reference 190 00140 00 Rev P 4 1 SECTION 4 DIRECT TO NAVIGATION SECTION 4 DIRECT TO NAVIGATION 4 1 OVERVIEW The GNS 430 s direct to function provides a quick method of setting a course to a destination waypoint Once a direct to is activated the GNS 430 establishes a point to point course line great circle from the present position to the selected direct to destination Navigation data on the various NAV pages provides steering guidance until the direct to is cancelled or replaced by a new destination To select a direct to destination 1 Press the Direct to Key The Select Direct to Waypoint Page appears Figure 4 1 with the waypoint identifier field highlighted Figure 4
174. e turn the large right knob to highlight the name field then use the small and large right knobs to select a new name Press the ENT Key to accept the selected name 4 The cursor moves to the Create action field Press the ENT Key to save the new waypoint Modifying User Waypoints To modify an existing waypoint select that waypoint on the User Waypoint Page and enter the new position information directly over the old information To modify a user waypoint by changing its latitude longitude position 1 With the User Waypoint Page displayed press the small right knob to activate the cursor 2 Use the small and large right knobs to enter the name of the desired waypoint and press the ENT Key 3 Turn the large right knob to highlight the position field at the bottom of the page 4 Use the small and large right knobs to enter the new position coordinates Figure 7 45 and press the ENT Key to accept the selected position Figure 7 45 Position Field Selected 5 The cursor moves to the Modify action field Press the ENT Key to modify the waypoint 6 Press the small right knob to remove the flashing cursor GNS 430 A Pilot s Guide and Reference 190 00140 00 Rev P 7 21 SECTION 7 WPT PAGES To modify a user waypoint by changing reference waypoint information 1 With the User Waypoint Page displayed press the small right knob to activate the cursor 2 Use the small and large ri
175. e Flight Plan Catalog Page Figure 5 7 Figure 5 7 Edited Flight Plan Page GNS 430 A Pilot s Guide and Reference 190 00140 00 Rev P 5 3 SECTION 5 FLIGHT PLANS To delete a waypoint from an existing flight plan 1 Press the FPL Key and turn the small right knob to display the Flight Plan Catalog Page 2 Press the small right knob to activate the cursor 3 Turn the large right knob to highlight the desired flight plan and press the ENT Key 4 Turn the large right knob to select the waypoint to be deleted and press the CLR Key to display a remove waypoint confirmation window 5 With Yes highlighted press the ENT Key to remove the waypoint 6 Once all changes have been made press the small right knob to return to the Flight Plan Catalog Page A one line user comment may be added to any flight plan which is displayed on the Flight Plan Catalog Page next to the flight plan s number By default as the flight plan is being created the comment shows the first and last waypoints in the flight plan To change the comment line for an existing flight plan 1 From the Flight Plan Catalog Page press the small right knob to activate the cursor 2 Turn the large right knob to highlight the desired flight plan and press the ENT Key 3 Turn the large right knob to select the comment line at the top of the screen 4 Use the small and large right knobs to enter the new comment F
176. e connection to sensors which automatically provide these figures To enter fuel capacity fuel on board or fuel flow figures if not provided by sensors 1 Turn the large right knob to select the CAP FOB or FF field GNS 430 A Pilot s Guide and Reference 190 00140 00 Rev P 1 7 SECTION 1 INTRODUCTION 2 Turn the small and large right knobs to enter the desired figure Figures 1 5 and 1 6 and press the ENT Key Figure 1 6 Fuel Flow Selected The Instrument Panel Self test Page includes selections to set fuel on board FOB to full capacity and access the Checklists Page This allows the pilot to quickly set fuel to full limits and display any checklists that have been entered such as start up or takeoff checklists To set fuel on board to full if not provided by sensor 1 Turn the large right knob to highlight Set Full Fuel Figure 1 7 Figure 1 7 Set Full Fuel Highlighted 2 Press the ENT Key and verify that fuel on board FOB now matches the fuel capacity CAP figure Fuel on board is reduced over time based on the fuel flow FF figure To view the Checklists Page 1 Turn the large right knob to highlight Go To Chklist Figure 1 8 and press the ENT Key Figure 1 8 Go To Chklist Highlighted 2 Turn the large right knob to select the desired checklist then execute each step Section 10 3 Utility Page Checklists in the selected
177. e is a disconnect inside the GDL 49 Linked to sat Can exchange data with the satellite Satellite in view Found satellite but have not yet identified it Searching No satellite is currently in view Table 12 8 Sat ID Connectivity Field SATCOM Operation This field indicates the current activity being performed by the satellite communicator within the GDL 49 Table 12 9 lists the messages that can be displayed including interpretations of the most common ones SATCOM OPERATION FIELD MESSAGE DESCRIPTION _ _ _ Unknown task is being performed or RS 232 communication with the GDL 49 has been lost Idle Waiting to perform the next task Receiving message Receiving a response from the satellite Sending message Transmitting a message Sending request Transmitting a request to the satellite Table 12 9 SATCOM Operation Field SATCOM SER NUM This field shows the serial number assigned to the GDL 49 s internal satellite communicator GDL SW This field shows the currently installed software version for the GDL 49 GNS 430 A Pilot s Guide and Reference 190 00140 00 Rev P 12 33 SECTION 12 ADDITIONAL FEATURES The GDL 69 Datalink Status Page shows the following fields Sat ID Connectivity This field shows the current activation status and signal strength of the XM Satellite Radio weather service Table 12 10 lis
178. e is found to be missing and or deficient the TERRAIN system fails the self test and displays the TERRAIN system failure message see Table 11 3 Figure 11 10 Utility Page Figure 11 11 Terrain Database Versions Page GNS 430 A Pilot s Guide and Reference 190 00140 00 Rev P 11 10 SECTION 11 TERRAIN Database Updates Terrain obstacle databases are updated periodically with the latest terrain and obstacle data Visit the Garmin website to check for newer versions of terrain obstacle databases compare database cycle numbers to determine if a newer version is available Updated terrain data cards may be obtained by calling Garmin at one of the numbers listed in the front of this document Updating terrain obstacle databases 1 Acquire a new terrain data card from Garmin 2 Turn off the power to the GNS 430 3 Remove the old terrain data card from and insert the new card into the right most slot of the GNS 430 4 Turn on the GNS 430 and verify that the TERRAIN system passes self test Terrain Obstacle Database Areas of Coverage Table 11 5 lists the area of coverage available in each database Regional definitions may change without notice Database Coverage Area Worldwide WW Latitudes N75 to S60 Longitudes W180 to E180 United States US Limited to the United States plus some areas of Canada Mexico Caribbean and the Pacific US Europe Alaska Austria Belgium Canada Carib
179. e range of each NEXRAD station is 124 nautical miles NEXRAD Abnormalities There are possible abnormalities regarding displayed NEXRAD images Some but not all of those include Ground clutter Spurious radar data Sun strobes when the radar antenna points directly at the sun Military aircraft deploy metallic dust chaff which can cause alterations in radar scans Interference from buildings or mountains which may cause shadows NEXRAD Limitations CAUTION NEXRAD weather data is to be used for long range planning purposes only Due to inherent delays and relative age of the data that can be experienced NEXRAD weather data cannot be used for short range avoidance of weather Certain limitations exist regarding the NEXRAD radar displays Some but not all are listed for the user s awareness NEXRAD base reflectivity does not provide sufficient information to determine cloud layers or precipitation characteristics hail vs rain etc NEXRAD base reflectivity is sampled at the minimum antenna elevation angle An individual NEXRAD site cannot depict high altitude storms at close ranges and has no information about storms directly over the site NEXRAD resolution varies depending on the amount and complexity of the weather data being received The displayed NEXRAD data will reflect the highest intensity level sampled within a 4 sq km area depending on available sy
180. e right knob to highlight the time offset field Figure 10 68 Figure 10 68 Time Offset Field Highlighted 3 Use the small and large right knobs to enter the desired offset beginning by entering a minus or plus sign to indicate whether the offset is behind UTC or ahead of UTC In the United States all local time offsets use minus or behind UTC 4 Press the ENT Key to accept the selected offset GNS 430 A Pilot s Guide and Reference 190 00140 00 Rev P 10 27 SECTION 10 AUX PAGES Restoring Factory Settings When making changes to any Setup 1 Page option a Restore Defaults menu selection allows the pilot to restore the original factory settings for the selected option only For example with the Airspace Alarms Page displayed the Restore Defaults option restores all Airspace Alarms Page settings to the original factory values To restore a Setup 1 option to the original factory settings 1 Select the desired menu option from the Setup 1 Page using the steps described at the beginning of this section 2 Press the MENU Key to display the Date Time Page Menu Figure 10 69 Figure 10 69 Date Time Page Menu 3 With Restore Defaults highlighted press the ENT Key 10 5 SETUP 2 PAGE The Setup 2 Page Figure 10 70 provides access via menu options to display adjustments parameters which define the nearest airport search and COM transceiver channel spacing When a men
181. e the approach and skip the Load process outlined in the preceding step 3 The GNS 430 provides both options Approaches with Procedure Turns The procedure turn portion of an approach is stored as one of the legs of the approach For this reason the GNS 430 requires no special operations from the pilot other than flying the procedure turn itself beyond what is required for any other type of approach Figure 6 8 Sample Approach with Procedure Turn DO NOT USE FOR NAVIGATION Lynchburg VA Regional VOR or GPS Rwy 03 This example uses the VOR Runway 03 approach for Lynchburg Virginia Regional Airport KLYH and assumes a departure from Frederick Maryland Municipal Airport KFDK GNS 430 A Pilot s Guide and Reference 190 00140 00 Rev P SECTION 6 PROCEDURES 6 5 The steps required to set up and fly the approach are detailed below refer to Figure 6 8 for the following steps 1 Prior to departing KFDK the destination KLYH is selected using the Direct to Key or by creating a flight plan terminating at Lynchburg Regional 2 While enroute to KLYH select the ATIS frequency from the list on the NAV COM Page Section 3 6 and Figure 6 9 and place it in the standby field of the COM Window Use the COM Flip flop Key to make the ATIS frequency active Figure 6 9 NAV COM Page 3 Press the PROC Key Figure 6 10 and select the VOR 03 approach using the steps outli
182. e the airspace the message Airspace near and ahead appears Figure 8 29 The Nearest Airspace Page shows Within 2nm of airspace If aircraft is within two nautical miles of an airspace and the current course will not take it inside the airspace the message Near airspace less than 2nm appears The Nearest Airspace Page shows the airspace as Ahead lt 2nm GNS 430 A Pilot s Guide and Reference 190 00140 00 Rev P 8 12 SECTION 8 NRST PAGES If the aircraft has entered an airspace the message Inside Airspace appears Figure 8 30 The Nearest Airspace Page shows Inside of airspace Figure 8 30 Airspace Messages Note that the airspace alerts are based on three dimensional data latitude longitude and altitude to avoid nuisance alerts The alert boundaries for controlled airspace are also sectorized to provide complete information on any nearby airspace Once one of the described conditions exists the message annunciator flashes alerting the pilot of an airspace message To view an airspace alert message 1 When the message annunciator above the MSG Key flashes press the MSG Key 2 Press the MSG Key again to return to the previous page Once an airspace alert message appears detailed information concerning the specific airspace is provided on the Nearest Airspace Page Figure 8 31 The Nearest Airspace Page displays the airspace name status Ahead
183. ebroadcast Data from two XM satellites is then made immediately available to XM customers The GDL 69 69A receives streaming weather data processes the data then sends it to the GNS 430 unit for display Functions provided by the Weather Data Link system include Request for and display of NEXRAD radar imagery Request for and display of text based METAR data Request for and display of a compressed form of METAR data that allows icon representations at reporting stations on a moving map indicating visibility ceiling etc Position tracking services are provided through periodic position report transmissions from the GNS 430 unit available with GDL 49 only GNS 430 A Pilot s Guide and Reference 190 00140 00 Rev P 12 19 SECTION 12 ADDITIONAL FEATURES Weather Products The following weather products are available for display on the GNS 430 unit via the Weather Data Link interface NEXRAD Data Graphical METAR Data Text based METAR Data Graphical Temperature Dewpoint Data Graphical Wind Data NEXRAD Description WSR 88D weather surveillance radar or NEXRAD NEXt generation RADar is a Doppler radar system that has greatly improved the detection of meteorological events such as thunderstorms tornadoes and hurricanes An extensive network of NEXRAD stations provides almost complete radar coverage of the continental United States Alaska and Hawaii Th
184. ect Activate Vectors To Final Load the full approach as described in Section 6 1 Use the Direct to Key by pressing it twice from the Active Flight Plan Page to select the desired leg of the approach GNS 430 A Pilot s Guide and Reference 190 00140 00 Rev P SECTION 6 PROCEDURES 6 18 To select VECTORS from the Transitions Window 1 Select Billard Municipal KTOP as the destination using the Direct to Key or as the last waypoint in a flight plan 2 Press the PROC Key and select the VOR 22 approach using the steps outlined in Section 6 1 3 From the Transitions Window select VECTORS Figure 6 48 Figure 6 48 Transitions Window 4 Select Load or Activate if already cleared for the approach To activate vectors to final from the Procedures Page 1 Select Billard Municipal KTOP as the destination using the Direct to Key or as the last waypoint in a flight plan 2 Press the PROC Key and select the VOR 22 approach using the steps outlined in Section 6 1 3 From the Transitions Window select D258G as the IAF Figure 6 49 Also select Load Figure 6 49 Transitions Window 4 When cleared press the PROC Key and select Activate Vector To Final Figure 6 50 Figure 6 50 Procedures Page Flying the Vectors Approach With vectors to final selected the CDI needle remains off center until the aircraft
185. ed default is current GPS calculated ground speed entered on the Fuel Planning Page automatically transfers to the Trip Planning Page and vice versa Density Alt TAS Winds Indicates the theoretical altitude at which the aircraft can perform depending upon several environmental conditions including indicated altitude IND ALT barometric pressure BARO and total air temperature TAT the temperature including the heating effect of speed read on a standard outside temperature gauge This menu option computes true airspeed TAS based upon the factors above and the calibrated airspeed CAS Also this menu option determines winds aloft the wind direction and speed and a head wind tail wind component based upon the calculated density altitude DEN ALT true airspeed aircraft heading HDG and ground speed Crossfill Allows the pilot to transfer the active flight plan any stored flight plan a user waypoint or all user waypoints between two 400 500 series Garmin units in a dual unit installation See Section 5 1 Flight Plan Catalog Options and information following in this section for details Scheduler Displays reminder messages such as Change oil Switch fuel tanks Overhaul etc One time periodic and event based messages are allowed One time messages appear once the timer expires and reappear each time the GNS 430 is powered on until the message is deleted Periodic mess
186. ed airport has a localizer based approach the localizer frequency ies is also listed on the Airport Frequency Page Figure 7 12 The Airport Frequency Page may be used to quickly select and tune a COM or VLOC frequency Figure 7 12 Airport Frequency Page Airport Identifier Symbol and Type Frequency Frequency Type Scroll Bar Usage Restrictions Information Number of Pages in Current Page Group Position of Current Page within Current Page Group Current Page Group To scroll through the frequency list and tune to a desired frequency on the list 1 Press the small right knob to activate the cursor GNS 430 A Pilot s Guide and Reference 190 00140 00 Rev P 7 7 SECTION 7 WPT PAGES 2 Turn the large right knob to scroll through the list placing the cursor on the desired frequency Figure 7 13 If there are more frequencies in the list than can be displayed on the screen a scroll bar Figure 7 12 along the right hand side of the screen indicates the cursor s position within the list Figure 7 13 Frequency Highlighted 3 Press the ENT Key to place the selected frequency in the standby field of the COM or VLOC Window Figure 7 14 Figure 7 14 Frequency Moved to Standby Field 4 To remove the flashing cursor press the small right knob Some listed frequencies may include designations for limited usage as follows TX Transmit only RX Receive only
187. ed by system configuration at the time of installation see the installer for detailed criteria information traffic is displayable on the Traffic Page in operating mode If the system fails the power up test one of the messages listed in Table 12 3 will be displayed See the installer for corrective action if the DATA FAIL or FAILED message is displayed Message Description FAILED GTX 330 has failed DATA FAIL Data is being received from the GTX 330 but a failure was detected in the datastream NO DATA Data is not being received from the GTX 330 Table 12 3 Power up Messages NOTE NO DATA may be a normal mode of operation in a dual transponder installation where the GTX 330 with TIS is not the selected transponder Manual Override The user can manually switch between standby STBY and operating OPER modes of operation to manually override automatic operation Placing the display into operating mode from the standby mode to display TIS traffic 1 Press the small right knob to activate the cursor and highlight STBY 2 Turn the small right knob to select OPER 3 Press the ENT Key to confirm Placing the display into standby mode from operating mode to stop displaying TIS traffic 1 Press the small right knob to activate the cursor and highlight OPER 2 Turn the small right knob to select STBY 3 Press the ENT Key to confirm Flig
188. eiver instead for many of the non precision and precision approaches stored on the Jeppesen NavData Card RAIM prediction helps the pilot plan for a pending flight to confirm GPS operation during an approach An INTEG annunciation at the bottom left corner of the screen Figure 10 32 indicates that satellite coverage is insufficient to pass built in RAIM tests When this occurs the GPS receiver continues to provide navigation information but should not be used for primary navigation guidance Use the GNS 430 s VLOC receiver or another suitable navigation source Figure 10 32 INTEG Annunciation If a WARN annunciation appears at the bottom left corner GPS satellite coverage may be sufficient but the GNS 430 has detected a position error which exceeds protection limits In this condition all GPS navigation data on the GNS 430 is disabled Use the GNS 430 s VLOC receiver or an alternate navigation source Sunrise Sunset Allows the pilot to calculate the time of sunrise and sunset at any waypoint or the present position for a specified date Software Versions Provides software version information for the operating software within the GPS receiver COM transceiver VOR localizer receiver glideslope receiver and main processor board Database Versions Displays the current Jeppesen database type and expiration date along with the version and type of built in land database Terr
189. en transmitting Figure 2 2 TX Transmit Indication Figure 2 2 TX Transmit Indication NOTE The tuning cursor normally appears in the COM Window unless placed in the VLOC Window by pressing the small left knob When the tuning cursor is in the VLOC Window it automatically returns to the COM Window after 30 seconds of inactivity To select a COM frequency 1 If the tuning cursor is not currently in the COM Window press the small left knob momentarily Figure 2 3 Figure 2 3 Standby Frequency of 135 325 2 Turn the large left knob to select the desired megahertz MHz value For example the 135 portion of the frequency 135 325 3 Turn the small left knob to select the desired kilohertz kHz value For example the 325 portion of the frequency 135 325 NOTE The active frequency in either window cannot be accessed directly only the standby frequency is highlighted by the tuning cursor 4 To make the standby frequency the active frequency press the COM Flip flop Key Figure 2 4 Figure 2 4 Active Frequency of 135 325 The tuning cursor is normally in the COM Window To select a VOR Localizer ILS frequency press the small left knob momentarily to place the cursor in the VLOC Window Additional instructions for VOR localizer ILS operations are available in Sections 6 and 9 GNS 430 A Pilot s Guide and Reference 190 00140 00 Rev P 2 3 SECTION 2 COM Auto Tu
190. ence pointer appears on the Map Display at the present position 3 Turn the small and large right knobs to place the reference pointer at the desired location to measure FROM and press the ENT Key Figure 3 21 Figure 3 21 Using Pointer to Measure Distance and Bearing 4 Again use the small and large right knobs to place the reference pointer at the desired location to measure TO The bearing and distance from the first reference location appears at the top of the Map Display 5 To exit the Measure Dist option press the small right knob Selecting Full Screen Map The Data Fields Off option provides a full screen Map Display Figure 3 22 without the four data fields along the right hand side of the screen Select this option to display a larger map area If this option has been selected and the data fields are off Data Fields On appears as an option instead Figure 3 22 Full Screen Map GNS 430 A Pilot s Guide and Reference 190 00140 00 Rev P SECTION 3 NAV PAGES 3 13 To turn the data fields off on From the Map Page Menu turn the large right knob to highlight Data Fields Off or Data Fields On and press the ENT Key Selecting Desired On Screen Data Change Fields allows selection of the data displayed on the four user selectable data fields along the right hand side of the Map Page There are 14 available data types including bearing to destination dis
191. ent terrain impact 11 5 K Keys and knobs 1 2 1 3 Key and knob functions 1 2 L Land data 1 5 3 9 3 11 14 5 Loading an approach C 2 Local time 10 22 10 26 Locked waypoints 14 2 M Magnetic variation 7 15 10 21 10 24 Main page groups 8 1 10 1 Manual sequence 6 21 6 24 6 25 MAP 4 1 6 3 Map datum 10 20 Map direct to 3 7 Map orientation 3 9 3 10 GNS 430 A Pilot s Guide and Reference 190 00140 00 Rev P I 3 INDEX Map Page 1 11 3 5 3 6 3 7 3 9 3 13 4 5 6 7 6 8 6 13 6 17 6 18 6 23 6 30 7 17 7 19 10 20 14 5 Map page options 3 9 Map panning 3 7 Map range 1 2 1 3 1 11 3 6 3 7 3 11 Map setup 3 6 Max speed 10 17 Measurement units 1 5 10 20 10 21 10 24 10 25 MENU Key 1 3 Messages 1 4 1 17 1 18 3 23 3 26 8 14 10 3 10 9 10 10 10 11 10 22 14 1 Message Page 1 8 1 18 2 6 METAR 12 18 12 35 Missed approach 4 1 6 3 6 8 6 9 6 10 6 11 6 13 6 17 6 20 6 22 6 23 6 24 6 32 14 6 C 1 C 4 C 5 C 6 Mode S 12 1 MSA minimum safe altitude 3 3 3 19 14 10 14 13 MSG Key 1 4 N NAVAID iv 3 10 3 20 14 10 NAV COM page 1 10 1 13 1 15 2 4 3 17 3 18 6 5 NavData card 1 6 1 14 3 25 A 1 A 2 Navigation terms 1 11 1 12 3 13 14 12 NAV Page Group 1 5 2 4 3 1 NDB 1 11 1 15 3 5 3 20 3 25 6 3 7 2 7 4 7 15 7 17 7 18 7 21 8 1 8 3 8 6 14 10 Nearest NRST Airspace Page 1 17 Nearest NRST pages 1 15 Nearest airport criteria 10 28 10 29 Nea
192. enu 3 Turn the large right knob to highlight Invert amp Activate FPL Figure 5 10 and press the ENT Key The original flight plan remains intact in its flight plan catalog storage location Figure 5 10 Flight Plan Catalog Page Menu GNS 430 A Pilot s Guide and Reference 190 00140 00 Rev P 5 5 SECTION 5 FLIGHT PLANS Copying Flight Plans To save a flight plan currently located in flight plan 00 copy it to an open catalog location 1 19 before the flight plan is cancelled overwritten or erased To copy a flight plan to another flight plan catalog location 1 From the Active Flight Plan Page press the MENU Key to display the Active Flight Plan Page Menu 2 From the Flight Plan Catalog Page press the small right knob to activate the cursor turn the large right knob to highlight the flight plan to be copied then press the MENU Key to display the Flight Plan Catalog Page Menu 3 Turn the large right knob to highlight Copy Flight Plan Figure 5 11 and press the ENT Key Figure 5 11 Flight Plan Catalog Page Menu 4 By default the next empty catalog location is offered To select a different location turn the large right knob to select the flight plan number use the small and large right knobs to enter a different number and press the ENT Key 5 With Yes highlighted press the ENT Key to copy the flight plan Deleting Flight Plans When finished with a flight
193. equency FSS Flight Service Station GNS 430 A Pilot s Guide and Reference 190 00140 00 Rev P SECTION 14 MESSAGES ABBREVIATIONS amp NAV TERMS 14 10 ft Feet G S Glideslope gl Gallons GPS Global Positioning System GS Ground Speed HDG Heading hg Inches of Mercury HUL Horizontal Uncertainty Level HWY Highway ID Identifier ig Imperial Gallons ILS Instrument Landing System IND Indicated INT Intersection INTEG Integrity kg Kilograms kHz Kilohertz km Kilometers kph Kilometers Per Hour kt Knots LAT LON Latitude Longitude lb Pounds LCL Local LFOB Left over Fuel On Board LOC Localizer LRES Left over Fuel Reserve Time Lrg Large lt Liters M Degrees Magnetic m Meters mb Millibars of Pressure Med Medium MHz Megahertz mi Statute Miles MOA Military Operations Area mph Statute Miles Per Hour mpm Meters Per Minute mps Meters Per Second MSA Minimum Safe Altitude MSG Message MSL Mean Sea Level mul Multicom NATNL National NAV Navigation NAVAID Navigational Aid NDB Non directional Radio Beacon nm Nautical Miles NRST Nearest NUM Number OBS Omnibearing Selector GNS 430 A Pilot s Guide and Reference 190 00140 00 Rev P SECTION 14 MESSAGES ABBREVIATIONS amp NAV TERMS 14 11 OCN Oceanic P POS Present Position PROC Procedure s PROV Province
194. er flood fire or other acts of nature or external causes iv damage caused by service performed by anyone who is not an authorized service provider of Garmin or v damage to a product that has been modified or altered without the written permission of Garmin In addition Garmin reserves the right to refuse warranty claims against products or services that are obtained and or used in contravention of the laws of any country THE WARRANTIES AND REMEDIES CONTAINED HEREIN ARE EXCLUSIVE AND IN LIEU OF ALL OTHER WARRANTIES WHETHER EXPRESS IMPLIED OR STATUTORY INCLUDING ANY LIABILITY ARISING UNDER ANY WARRANTY OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE STATUTORY OR OTHERWISE THIS WARRANTY GIVES YOU SPECIFIC LEGAL RIGHTS WHICH MAY VARY FROM STATE TO STATE IN NO EVENT SHALL GARMIN BE LIABLE FOR ANY INCIDENTAL SPECIAL INDIRECT OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES WHETHER RESULTING FROM THE USE MISUSE OR INABILITY TO USE THE PRODUCT OR FROM DEFECTS IN THE PRODUCT SOME STATES DO NOT ALLOW THE EXCLUSION OF INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES SO THE ABOVE LIMITATIONS MAY NOT APPLY TO YOU Garmin retains the exclusive right to repair or replace with a new or newly overhauled replacement product the product or software or offer a full refund of the purchase price at its sole discretion SUCH REMEDY SHALL BE YOUR SOLE AND EXCLUSIVE REMEDY FOR ANY BREACH OF WARRANTY Online Auction Purchases Products purchased through online auctions are not eligi
195. er waypoint from the User Waypoint List 1 Select the User Waypoint List as described in this section 2 Turn the large right knob to highlight the desired user waypoint 3 Use the small and large right knobs to change the name of the user waypoint Figure 7 53 Enter the new name directly over the old name Press the ENT Key to accept the new name Figure 7 53 User Waypoint Name Selected 4 A rename waypoint confirmation window is displayed Figure 7 54 With Yes highlighted press the ENT Key to rename the selected user waypoint Figure 7 54 Rename Waypoint Window GNS 430 A Pilot s Guide and Reference 190 00140 00 Rev P 7 24 SECTION 7 WPT PAGES To delete a user waypoint from the User Waypoint List 1 Select the User Waypoint List as described in this section 2 Turn the large right knob to highlight the desired user waypoint 3 Press the CLR Key to display a delete waypoint confirmation window Figure 7 55 Figure 7 55 Delete Waypoint Window 4 With Yes highlighted press the ENT Key to delete the selected user waypoint To delete all user waypoints from memory 1 Select the User Waypoint List as described in this section 2 Press the MENU Key to display a menu for the User Waypoint List Figure 7 56 Figure 7 56 User Waypoint List Page Menu 3 With Delete All User Waypoints highlighted press the ENT Key 4 A delete all waypoint
196. es the information if the procedure has not been modified If an approach departure or arrival procedure is no longer available the flight plan becomes locked until the procedure is deleted from the flight plan or the correct database is installed For information on loading an approach departure or arrival see Section 6 1 See Section 5 1 for instructions on saving and copying flight plans Can I file slant Golf G using my GPS Yes the pilot may file a flight plan as G if the GNS 430 is a certified A1 or A2 installation If flying enroute the pilot may file G with an expired database only after having verified all route waypoints Non precision approaches may not be flown with an expired database See an approved Airplane Flight Manual Supplement for more information What does the OBS key do and when do I use it The OBS Key is used to select manual OBS mode or automatic sequencing of waypoints Activating OBS mode as indicated by an OBS annunciation directly above the OBS Key holds the current active to waypoint as the navigation reference and prevents the GPS from sequencing to the next waypoint When OBS mode is cancelled automatic waypoint sequencing is selected and the GNS 430 automatically selects the next waypoint in the flight plan once the aircraft has crossed the present active to waypoint GNS 430 A Pilot s Guide and Reference 190 00140 00 Rev P APPENDIX C TROUBLESHOOTING C 3 NOR
197. ese sections as needed to learn or review the details regarding a particular feature After becoming familiar with the basics some suggested reading within this Pilot s Guide includes Flight plan features Section 5 IFR procedures Section 6 Waypoint information pages database information Section 7 Unit settings configuring the unit to the pilot s preferences Section 10 If more information is needed Garmin s Customer Service staff is available during normal business hours U S Central time zone at the phone and fax numbers listed on page ii Garmin can also be reached by mail page ii or at our website address www garmin com Powering up the GNS 430 The GNS 430 s power and COM volume are controlled using the COM Power Volume Knob at the top left corner of the unit Turning it clockwise turns unit power on and increases the COM radio volume After turning the unit on a welcome page appears briefly while the unit performs a self test followed sequentially by the Unit Type Page Figure 1 3 and the Software Version Page Then depending on configuration the Weather Page the Traffic Page the Aviation Data Page the Land Terrain Obstacles Database Page and the Situational Awareness Page are sequentially displayed Figure 1 3 Unit Type Page GNS 430 A Pilot s Guide and Reference 190 00140 00 Rev P 1 6 SECTION 1 INTRODUCTION The Database Versions Page Figure 1 4
198. est METAR This option is a link to either the NEXRAD or METAR Request Pages depending on which is currently displayed on the Weather Page Display Legend This option is a link to the Weather Legend Page See the Weather Legend Page paragraph following in this section GNS 430 A Pilot s Guide and Reference 190 00140 00 Rev P 12 24 SECTION 12 ADDITIONAL FEATURES Displaying NEXRAD Data on the Map Page When NEXRAD data is received it is displayed on the Map Page in addition to the Weather Page and the Default NAV Page Customizing NEXRAD Data on the Map Page The pilot can customize NEXRAD data on the Map Page by using the Page Menu Customizing the Map Page 1 Go to the Map Page in the NAV Page Group 2 Press the MENU Key and select Setup Map from the page menu 3 Select Weather from the GROUP field in the Map Setup window Figure 12 35 Figure 12 35 Map Setup Window 4 Highlight the NEXRAD Symbol field and use the small right knob to set the desired map range at which to overlay NEXRAD data The range values are Off to 2000 nm miles Press the ENT Key for the desired range selection Press the CLR Key to go back to the Map Page 5 Highlight the NEXRAD Density field use the small right knob to set the density desired i e the transparency see Table 12 7 of the NEXRAD cells The density values are LOW MED HIGH Press the ENT Key to make the selection then p
199. ev P SECTION 14 MESSAGES ABBREVIATIONS amp NAV TERMS 14 2 Approaching VNAV profile The aircraft is within one minute of reaching the initial Vertical Navigation descent or climb point Arrival at waypoint waypoint name The aircraft is within the arrival alarm circle for the indicated waypoint The size of the arrival alarm circle is defined from the CDI Alarms menu option on the Setup 1 Page Cannot navigate locked FPL The pilot has attempted to navigate a flight plan FPL with one or more locked waypoints A waypoint can be locked when the NavData Card is replaced and the waypoint s does not exist in the new database Can t change an active waypoint An attempt has been made to modify the position of the active to or from waypoint The GNS 430 does not allow modifications to user waypoints currently being utilized for navigation guidance Can t delete an active or FPL waypoint An attempt has been made to delete the active to or from waypoint The GNS 430 will not allow the deletion of user waypoints currently being utilized for navigation guidance CDI key stuck The CDI Key is stuck in the enabled or pressed state Try pressing the CDI Key again to cycle its operation If the message persists contact a Garmin dealer for assistance Check unit cooling The GNS 430 has detected excessive display backlighting temperature The backlighting has been automatically
200. f Current Page within Current Page Group Number of Pages in Current Page Group GNS 430 A Pilot s Guide and Reference 190 00140 00 Rev P 8 9 SECTION 8 NRST PAGES 8 7 NEAREST CENTER ARTCC PAGE The Nearest Center Page Figure 8 22 displays the facility name bearing to and distance to the five nearest ARTCC points of communication within 200 nm of the present position For each ARTCC listed the Nearest Center Page also indicates the frequency ies and may be used to quickly tune the COM transceiver to the center s frequency The selected frequency is placed in the standby field of the COM Window and activated using the COM Flip flop Key Figure 8 22 Nearest ARTCC Page ARTCC Name Bearing To and Distance To Current Page Group Frequency ies Position of Current Page within Current Page Group Number of Pages in Current Page Group To quickly tune an ARTCC s frequency from the Nearest Center Page 1 Select the Nearest Center Page using the steps outlined in Section 8 1 2 Press the small right knob to activate the cursor 3 Turn the large right knob to scroll through the list selecting the desired ARTCC Figure 8 22 4 Turn the large right knob to scroll down the page highlighting the desired frequency Figure 8 23 Figure 8 23 Frequency Field Highlighted 5 Press the ENT Key to place the selected frequency in the standby field of the COM Window Figure 8 24 Figure 8
201. fault NAV Page Menu Figure 3 4 Figure 3 4 Default NAV Page Menu 2 The Change Fields option is already highlighted so press the ENT Key to select this option 3 Use the large right knob to highlight the data field to be changed Figure 3 5 Figure 3 5 DIS Field Highlighted GNS 430 A Pilot s Guide and Reference 190 00140 00 Rev P SECTION 3 NAV PAGES 3 4 4 Turn the small right knob to display the list of available data items Figure 3 6 Continue turning the small right knob to select the desired data item from the list Figure 3 6 Select Field Type Window 5 Press the ENT Key to select the desired data item and return to the Default NAV Page 6 Press the small right knob momentarily to remove the cursor from the page Restoring Factory Settings All data fields settings can be quickly returned to original factory settings To restore all six data fields to factory default settings 1 From the Default NAV Page press the MENU Key to display the Default NAV Page Menu 2 Turn the large right knob to highlight the Restore Defaults option Figure 3 7 and press the ENT Key Figure 3 7 Default NAV Page Menu Dual Unit Considerations A Crossfill option is also provided for the Default NAV Page This option transfers a direct to destination or flight plan to a second Garmin 400 Series unit See Section 10 2 Flight Planning Crossfill for additional details o
202. ffect approach operations RAIM is an acronym for Receiver Autonomous Integrity Monitoring a GPS receiver function that performs a consistency check on all tracked satellites RAIM ensures that the available satellite geometry allows the receiver to calculate a position within a specified protection limit 4 nm for oceanic 2 nm for enroute 1 nm for terminal and 0 3 nm for non precision approaches During oceanic enroute and terminal phases of flight RAIM is available nearly 100 of the time Because of the tighter protection limit on approaches there may be times when RAIM is not available The GNS 430 automatically monitors RAIM and warns the pilot with an alert message Section 13 when it is not available and the INTEG annunciator appears at the bottom left corner of the screen If RAIM is not available when crossing the FAF the pilot must fly the missed approach procedure The GNS 430 s RAIM prediction function Section 13 also allows the pilot to see whether RAIM is available for a specified date and time NOTE If RAIM is not predicted to be available for the final approach course the approach does not become active as indicated by an Approach is not active message a RAIM not available from FAF to MAP message and INTEG annunciator Why aren t there any approaches available for my flight plan Approaches are available for the final destination airport in a flight plan or as a direct to keep in
203. fic Using Map Page Panning Another Map Page feature is panning which allows the pilot to move the map beyond its current limits without adjusting the map scale Press the small right knob to select the panning function a target pointer flashes on the map display A window appears at the top of the map display showing the latitude longitude position of the pointer plus the bearing and distance to the pointer from the present position Activating the panning feature and panning the map display 1 Press the small right knob to activate the panning target pointer 2 Turn the small right knob to move up turn clockwise or down counterclockwise 3 Turn the large right knob to move right turn clockwise or left counterclockwise 4 To cancel the panning function and return to the present position press the small right knob When the target pointer is placed on traffic the traffic range and altitude separation are displayed Figure 12 19 Figure 12 19 Traffic Range and Altitude Separation Traffic Range and Altitude Separation Target Pointer GNS 430 A Pilot s Guide and Reference 190 00140 00 Rev P 12 10 SECTION 12 ADDITIONAL FEATURES Power Up Test The TIS interface performs an automatic test during power up If the system passes the power up test the Standby Screen appears on the Traffic Page If the system passes the power up test and the aircraft is airborne as determin
204. fier of the reference waypoint GNS 430 A Pilot s Guide and Reference 190 00140 00 Rev P 5 14 SECTION 5 FLIGHT PLANS Shortcuts A number of shortcuts are available to save time when using the Active Flight Plan Page These shortcuts speed the process of removing approaches departures and arrivals and aid in selecting a specific flight plan leg for navigation guidance On the preceding page options to remove approaches departures and arrivals were introduced This process may also be completed using the CLR Key as follows To remove an approach departure or arrival using the CLR Key 1 With the Active Flight Plan Page displayed press the small right knob to activate the cursor 2 Turn the large right knob to highlight the title for the approach Figure 5 33 departure or arrival to be deleted Titles appear in light blue directly above the procedure s waypoints Figure 5 33 Highlight Item To Be Deleted 3 Press the CLR Key to display a confirmation window Figure 5 34 Figure 5 34 Remove Approach Window 4 With Yes highlighted press the ENT Key to remove the selected procedure This same process may also be used to remove individual waypoints from the active flight plan To remove a waypoint using the CLR Key 1 With the Active Flight Plan Page displayed press the small right knob to activate the cursor 2 Turn the large right knob to highlight the identifier for
205. flight plan FPL was truncated because not enough room existed to insert an approach departure or arrival This message also appears when an approach has been deleted from a stored flight plan because an approach could not be found These conditions may occur upon power up when a database change increases the number of waypoints in or removes an approach from an instrument procedure FPL is full remove unnecessary waypoints An attempt has been made to add more than 31 waypoints to a flight plan FPL The GNS 430 does not allow more than 31 waypoints per flight plan FPL leg will not be smoothed The upcoming flight plan FPL leg is too short for smooth waypoint transitions Expect a rapid change in the CDI FPL waypoint is locked At least one flight plan FPL waypoint is locked because the waypoint has been removed from the current NavData Card database change the data card is missing or the data card has failed FPL waypoint moved The position data for one or more flight plan FPL waypoints moved at least 0 33 arc minutes in the current NavData Card database change FPL waypoint was deleted At least one flight plan FPL waypoint is no longer available when a new NavData Card was installed database change G S has failed The GNS 430 has detected a failure in its glideslope receiver The glideslope receiver is not available and the unit should be returned to a Garmin dealer for service G S is not responding
206. g NEXRAD is not meant to be comprehensive The NOAA website www noaa gov contains complete and detailed information regarding NEXRAD weather radar operation and theory GNS 430 A Pilot s Guide and Reference 190 00140 00 Rev P 12 21 SECTION 12 ADDITIONAL FEATURES Requesting NEXRAD Data NEXRAD data can be requested from the Data Link Page or the Map Page Requesting NEXRAD data from the Data Link Page 1 Select the Data Link Page from the AUX Page Group 2 Press the small right knob to activate the cursor NexRad Request is highlighted Figure 12 31 Figure 12 31 Data Link Page GDL 69 3 Press the ENT Key The NEXRAD Request Page see Figure 12 32 is displayed Figure 12 32 NEXRAD Request Page GDL 69 The NEXRAD Request Page has the following user selectable fields Center This field allows the pilot to specify reference points for the request The following five options are available for the Center field Current Position Request NEXRAD data from the aircraft s current position Look Ahead Request NEXRAD data ahead of along the current route From ID Request NEXRAD data from a specific waypoint identifier If From ID is selected as the reference point for the request the WPT field is displayed in place of Position The WPT field is used to enter a waypoint identifier as the reference point for the request From La
207. g Window is displayed press the ENT Key to display the Traffic Page or press the CLR Key to return to the previous page NOTE The Traffic Warning Window is disabled when the aircraft ground speed is less than 30 knots or when an approach is active Figure 12 26 Traffic Warning Window Map Page Traffic Banner A Traffic banner will be displayed in the lower right corner of the Map Page Figure 12 27 if the Display Range setting is beyond the Traffic Symbol setting Figure 12 28 and a Traffic Advisory is active Display Range Traffic Banner Figure 12 27 Traffic Banner Configuring Traffic Data on the Map Page Traffic is only displayed on the Map Page if aircraft heading data is available The Traffic Mode setting allows the operator to choose which traffic type is displayed all traffic traffic and proximity advisories or traffic advisories only The Traffic Symbol and Traffic Label settings determine the maximum ranges at which these items are displayed Configuring traffic on the Map Page 1 Turn the small right knob to select the Map Page 2 Press the MENU Key to display the Page Menu 3 Turn the small right knob to select Setup Map 4 Press the ENT Key The flashing cursor highlights the GROUP field 5 Turn the small right knob to select Traffic 6 Press the ENT Key Figure 12 28 Figure 12 28 Map Setup Menu 7 Turn the large right knob to select the desired T
208. g cursor in the VLOC Window 2 Turn the large left knob to select the MHz and the small left knob to select the kHz of the desired frequency To place the standby frequency in the active field Press the NAV Flip flop Key GNS 430 A Pilot s Guide and Reference 190 00140 00 Rev P 1 10 SECTION 1 INTRODUCTION Page Groups Page Groups NAV Group WPT Group AUX Group NRST Group see Section 3 see Section 7 see Section 10 see Section 8 Table 1 1 Page Groups The bottom right corner of the screen Figure 1 13 indicates which page group Table 1 1 is currently being displayed the number of pages available within that group indicated by square icons and the placement of the current page within that group indicated by a highlighted square icon In addition to the NAV Page Group additional page groups are available for waypoint information WPT auxiliary AUX functions such as flight planning or unit settings and listings for nearest NRST airports or other facilities Figure 1 13 Current Page and Page Group Current Page Group Number of Pages in Current Page Group Position of Current Page within Current Page Group To select the desired page group Turn the large right knob until a page from the desired page group is displayed Figure 1 13 To select the desired page within the page group Turn the small right knob until the desired page is displayed Figure 1 13 NAV Pages
209. ght knobs to enter the name of the desired waypoint and press the ENT Key 3 Turn the large right knob to highlight the first reference waypoint REF WPT field to change the reference waypoint Otherwise continue turning the large right knob to highlight the radial RAD or distance DIS field as desired 4 Use the small and large right knobs to change the identifier if desired of the reference waypoint Figure 7 46 The reference waypoint can be an airport VOR NDB intersection or another user waypoint Press the ENT Key to accept the selected identifier Figure 7 46 Ref Waypoint Field Selected 5 The cursor moves to the radial RAD field Figure 7 47 Use the small and large right knobs to change the radial from the reference waypoint if desired Press the ENT Key to accept the selected radial Figure 7 47 Radial Field Selected 6 The cursor moves to the distance DIS field Figure 7 48 Use the small and large right knobs to change the distance from the reference waypoint to the new user waypoint if desired Press the ENT Key to accept the selected distance Figure 7 48 Distance Field Selected 7 The cursor moves to the Modify action field Press the ENT Key to modify the waypoint 8 Press the small right knob to remove the flashing cursor NOTE If the pilot attempts to modify or delete a waypoint which is currently a direct to waypoint or the current from or to waypoint in
210. hat sufficient GPS satellite coverage does not exist for the current phase of flight The CDI HSI NAV flag also appears Select an alternate source for navigation guidance such as the GNS 430 s VLOC receiver RAIM not available from FAF to MAP waypoints When performing an instrument approach Receiver Autonomous Integrity Monitoring RAIM has determined that sufficient GPS satellite coverage does not exist to meet the required protection limits Select an alternate source for navigation guidance such as the GNS 430 s VLOC receiver for a VOR or localizer based approach RAIM position warning Although sufficient GPS satellite coverage may exist Receiver Autonomous Integrity Monitoring RAIM has determined the information from one or more GPS satellites may be in error The resulting GPS position may be in error beyond the limits allowed for the current phase of flight Cross check the position with an alternate navigation source If the warning occurs during a final approach segment FAF to MAP execute the published missed approach Scheduler message user entered text The user entered scheduler message time has expired and the scheduler message is displayed Searching the sky The GNS 430 is searching the sky for GPS satellite almanac data or the GPS receiver is in AutoLocate Mode Allow the unit to complete data collection approximately five minutes before turning it off Select appropriate frequency for approa
211. he ENT Key Position of Current Page within Current Page Group Number of Pages in Current Page Group To select a menu option from the Flight Planning Page 1 Press the small right knob momentarily to activate the flashing cursor Figure 10 4 2 Turn the large right knob to select the desired menu option Figure 10 5 and press the ENT Key Figure 10 6 Figure 10 5 Density Alt TAS Winds Highlighted Figure 10 6 Density Alt TAS Winds Page GNS 430 A Pilot s Guide and Reference 190 00140 00 Rev P 10 3 SECTION 10 AUX PAGES The following menu options are available Fuel Planning When equipped with fuel flow FF and or fuel on board FOB sensors this option displays current fuel conditions along the active direct to or flight plan The pilot may also manually enter fuel flow ground speed GS and in some instances fuel on board figures for planning purposes Fuel planning figures can be displayed not only for the currently active flight plan or direct to but also point to point between two specified waypoints and for any programmed flight plan Trip Planning Allows the pilot to view desired track DTK distance DIS estimated time enroute ETE enroute safe altitude ESA and estimated time of arrival ETA information for a direct to point to point between two specified waypoints or for any programmed flight plan NOTE Point to point waypoints flight plans and or ground spe
212. he MENU Key with the Map Page displayed Figure 3 16 Figure 3 16 Map Page Menu The following options are available Setup Map Measure Dist Data Fields Off Change Fields and Restore Defaults Setup Map allows configuration of the Map Display to individual preferences including map orientation land data enable disable Jeppesen data enable disable automatic zoom airspace boundaries and text size GNS 430 A Pilot s Guide and Reference 190 00140 00 Rev P SECTION 3 NAV PAGES 3 10 Table 3 4 lists the settings available for each group Group Available Settings Map Orientation AutoZoom Land Data Aviation Data Weather Lightning Mode Symbol when applicable Traffic Traffic Mode Symbol Label when applicable Airport Large Medium Small Airports and Text NAVAID VORs NDBs Intersections and Text Waypoint User Waypoints Waypoint Text Flight Plan Wpts Line Active Flight Plan Lat Long Control Controlled Airspace Class B C D tower zone Airspace Special Use Airspace Restricted MOA Other City Large Medium Small Cities and Text Road Freeway National Highway Local Hwy Local Road Other States Prov Rivers Lakes Railroads Wind Vector Table 3 4 For most entries in Table 3 4 on off and range are the available selections for display of each information type NOTE Large medium and small classifications are used on
213. he Standby Frequency GNS 430 A Pilot s Guide and Reference 190 00140 00 Rev P 7 17 SECTION 7 WPT PAGES 7 11 USER WAyPOINT PAGE In addition to the airport VOR NDB and intersection information contained in the Jeppesen NavData Card the GNS 430 allows the pilot to store up to 1 000 user defined waypoints The User Waypoint Page Figure 7 37 displays the waypoint name up to five characters long identifier radial from two reference waypoints and distance from one reference waypoint along with the user waypoint s latitude longitude position Figure 7 37 User Waypoint Page User Waypoint Name Reference Waypoint Information Create Modify Action Field Latitude Longitude Position Position of Current Page within Current Page Group Number of Pages in Current Page Group Current Page Group The following descriptions and abbreviations appear on the User Waypoint Page REF WPT Reference waypoint identifier name RAD Radial from reference waypoint in degrees magnetic or degrees true depending upon unit configuration DIS Distance from reference waypoint in nautical miles statute miles kilometers depending upon unit configuration Position Latitude Longitude degrees minutes or degrees minutes seconds MGRS or UTM UPS User waypoints may only be selected by name identifier as described in Section 7 1 Creating User Waypoints User waypoints may be cre
214. he desired flight plan or direct to airport 1 Press the small right knob to activate the cursor on the airport identifier field in the GPS Window 2 Turn the small right knob to display the list of airports departure arrival and enroute for the flight plan or direct to Continue to turn the small right knob until the desired airport is selected 3 Press the ENT Key to display the frequency list for the selected airport A frequency listed on the NAV COM Page can be quickly transferred to the standby field of the COM Window or the VLOC Window This time saving process prevents having to re key a frequency already displayed elsewhere on the screen To select a communication or navigation frequency 1 Press the small right knob to activate the cursor in the GPS Window 2 Turn the large right knob to select the desired frequency from the list 3 Press the ENT Key to transfer the selected frequency to the standby field in the COM or VLOC Window COM frequencies automatically go to the standby field of the COM Window and navigation frequencies automatically go to the standby field of the VLOC Window regardless of which window is currently highlighted by the cursor 4 To activate the selected frequency press the COM or VLOC Flip flop Key GNS 430 A Pilot s Guide and Reference 190 00140 00 Rev P 1 14 SECTION 1 INTRODUCTION To display frequencies for a different airport along the flight
215. he following steps 1 Select Billard Municipal KTOP as the destination via the Direct to Key or as the last waypoint in a flight plan Figure 6 37 Figure 6 37 Select Waypoint Page 2 Press the PROC Key Figure 6 38 and select the VOR 22 approach Figure 6 39 using the steps outlined in Section 6 1 From the Transitions Window select D258G as the IAF Also select Load or Activate if already cleared for the approach Figure 6 38 Procedures Page GNS 430 A Pilot s Guide and Reference 190 00140 00 Rev P SECTION 6 PROCEDURES 6 15 Figure 6 39 Approach Window DO NOT USE FOR NAVIGATION Billard Muni Topeka KS VOR or GPS Rwy 22 Figure 6 40 Terminal Mode Refer to Figure 6 40 for the following steps 3 Within 30 nm of KTOP the GNS 430 switches from enroute mode to terminal mode and the CDI scale transitions from 5 0 to 1 0 nm full scale deflection 4 If the approach has not yet been activated in step 2 above do so when cleared for the approach Figure 6 41 Figure 6 41 Procedures Page 5 When approaching the IAF D258G a waypoint alert NEXT DTK 353 appears in the lower right corner of the screen Figure 6 42 As the distance DIS to the IAF approaches zero the alert is replaced by a turn advisory TURN TO 353 Figure 6 42 Waypoint Alert 6 Follow the arc when the course select setting and
216. he frequency list Figure 2 6 Figure 2 6 Airport Frequencies Page 3 Press the small right knob momentarily to reactivate the cursor and turn the large right knob to highlight the desired frequency 4 Press the ENT Key to place the highlighted frequency in the standby COM field GNS 430 A Pilot s Guide and Reference 190 00140 00 Rev P 2 4 SECTION 2 COM To select a COM frequency for a nearby flight service station FSS or center ARTCC 1 Turn the large right knob to select the NRST Page Group 2 Turn the small right knob to select the Nearest Center or Nearest Flight Service Page Figure 2 7 Figure 2 7 Nearest ARTCC Page 3 Press the small right knob momentarily to place the cursor on the page 4 Turn the large right knob to highlight the FSS ARTCC frequency 5 Press the ENT Key to place the frequency in the standby field of the COM Window To select a COM frequency for any airport in the flight plan 1 Select the NAV COM Page from the NAV Page Group Section 3 1 or press and hold the CLR Key then turn the small right knob until the NAV COM Page appears 2 Press the small right knob to place the cursor on the airport identifier field To the left of this field appears Departure Enroute or Arrival depending on the placement of the displayed airport within the flight plan 3 Turn the small right knob to display a window Figure 2 8 listing the airports
217. he generic timer turn the large right knob to highlight the time field Press the CLR Key followed by the ENT Key To record or reset the departure time 1 Select Flight Timers from the Utility Page using the steps described at the beginning of this section 10 3 2 Turn the large right knob to highlight the reset mode field under Departure Time The reset mode field indicates Pwr on or GS gt 30kt 3 Turn the small right knob to select the desired reset mode Figure 10 38 Pwr on records a departure time when the GNS 430 is turned on GS gt 30kt records a departure time once the GPS computed ground speed exceeds 30 knots Figure 10 38 Reset Mode Window 4 Press the ENT Key when finished 5 To reset the departure time turn the large right knob to highlight Reset and press the ENT Key To view use or reset total trip time 1 Select Flight Timers from the Utility Page using the steps described at the beginning of this section 2 Turn the large right knob to highlight the reset mode field under Total Trip Time The reset mode field indicates Pwr on or GS gt 30kt 3 Turn the small right knob to select the desired reset mode Pwr on records trip time in hours minutes seconds any time the GNS 430 is turned on GS gt 30kt records trip time any time the GPS computed ground speed exceeds 30 knots 4 Press the ENT Key whe
218. he specified route of flight The trainer software and the document 400 500 Series FDE Prediction Instructions 190 00643 00 are available on Garmin s web site for free download www garmin com Figure 13 2 Garmin 400 Series Trainer Software GNS 430 A Pilot s Guide and Reference 190 00140 00 Rev P SECTION 14 MESSAGES ABBREVIATIONS amp NAV TERMS 14 1 SECTION 14 MESSAGES ABBREVIATIONS AND NAV TERMS 14 1 MESSAGES The GNS 430 uses a flashing MSG annunciator at the bottom of the screen directly above the MSG Key to alert the pilot of any important information or warnings While most messages are advisory in nature warning messages may require pilot intervention When the MSG annunciator flashes press the MSG Key to display the message Press the MSG Key again to return to the previous page The following is a list of available messages and their meanings Message Description Airspace ahead less than 10 minutes The GPS calculated course is projected to enter a special use airspace within 10 minutes This message is automatically disabled within 30 nm of an arrival airport when an approach is loaded Airspace near and ahead The GPS calculated position is within 2 nm of the boundary of a special use airspace and the course is projected to enter the airspace within 10 minutes This message is automatically disabled within 30 nm of an arrival airport when an approach is loaded
219. hin Current Page Group 10 As the GPS receiver locks onto satellites a signal strength bar appears for each satellite in view with the appropriate satellite number 01 32 underneath each bar The status of satellite reception is shown as follows No signal strength bars The receiver is looking for the satellites indicated Hollow signal strength bars The receiver has found the satellite s and is collecting data Figure 3 48 Solid signal strength bars The receiver has collected the necessary data and the satellite s is ready for use Checkered signal strength bars Excluded satellites Figure 3 47 The sky view display at top left corner of the page shows which satellites are currently in view and where they are The outer circle of the sky view represents the horizon with north at top of the page the inner circle 45 above the horizon and the center point directly overhead Figure 3 48 Hollow Signal Strength Bars GNS 430 A Pilot s Guide and Reference 190 00140 00 Rev P SECTION 3 NAV PAGES 3 23 Each satellite has a 30 second data transmission that must be collected hollow signal strength bar see Figure 3 47 before the satellite may be used for navigation solid signal strength bar see Figure 3 46 Once the GPS receiver has determined the present position the GNS 430 indicates position track and ground speed on the other navigation pages The GPS receiver s
220. ht Procedures Once the aircraft is airborne determined by system configuration at the time of installation the system switches from standby mode to operating mode The GNS 430 unit displays OPER in the upper right hand corner of the display and begins to display traffic on the Traffic or Map Page The TIS Traffic Advisory TA should alert the crew to use additional vigilance to identify the intruding aircraft Any time the traffic symbol becomes a yellow circle or a voice warning is announced conduct a visual search for the intruder If successful maintain visual contact to ensure safe operation See pages 10 5 10 6 and 10 7 for a description of pilot responses to TIS display messages After Landing Once the aircraft is on ground determined by system configuration at the time of installation the system switches from operating mode to standby mode The GNS 430 unit displays STBY As described previously both the standby and operating modes can be manually overridden by the display controls GNS 430 A Pilot s Guide and Reference 190 00140 00 Rev P 12 11 SECTION 12 ADDITIONAL FEATURES 12 2 GTS 8XX TRAFFIC SySTEMS Introduction All information in this section pertains to the display and control of the Garmin GNS 430 GTS 8XX interface refer to the 400 500 Series Display Interfaces Pilot s Guide Addendum 190 00140 10 when interfacing with non Garmin products WARNING The GTS 8XX interface is intende
221. ic squelch function when listening to a distant station or when setting the desired volume level The COM Power Volume Knob allows the pilot to disable the automatic squelch and keep the COM audio open continuously To override the automatic squelch press the COM Power Volume Knob momentarily Press the COM Power Volume Knob again to return to automatic squelch operation COM Window and Tuning Communication frequencies are selected with the tuning cursor in the standby COM frequency field Figure 2 1 using the small and large left knobs to tune the desired frequency The standby frequency always appears below the active frequency The active frequency is the frequency currently in use for transmit and receive operations Figure 2 1 RX Receive Indication RX Receive Indication Standby COM Frequency Field A frequency may also be quickly selected from the database by simply highlighting the desired frequency on any of the main pages and pressing the ENT Key This process is referred to as auto tuning Once a frequency is selected in the standby field it may be transferred to the active frequency by pressing the COM Flip flop Key GNS 430 A Pilot s Guide and Reference 190 00140 00 Rev P 2 2 SECTION 2 COM While receiving a station an RX indication Figure 2 1 appears in the upper right corner of the COM Window to the immediate right of COM A TX indication appears at this location wh
222. ight hand corner of the Airspace Page displays the floor and ceiling limits of the airspace The following are examples of what may appear as vertical limits for an airspace 5000 ft msl 5000 feet mean sea level 5000 ft agl 5000 feet above ground level MSL at mean sea level NOTAM Notice to Airmen Unknown Unlimited See Chart Surface All airspace alert messages except for prohibited areas may be turned on or off from the Airspace Alarms Page An altitude buffer is also provided on the Airspace Alarms Page to provide an extra margin of safety above below the published limits Section 10 4 Setup 1 Page Airspace Alarms for additional details Figure 8 37 Airspace Page for Class C Airspace Figure 8 38 Airspace Page for MOA Figure 8 39 Airspace Page for Prohibited Area GNS 430 A Pilot s Guide and Reference 190 00140 00 Rev P 9 1 SECTION 9 VLOC RECEIVER SECTION 9 VLOC RECEIVER 9 1 VLOC VOR LOCALIZER GLIDESLOPE RECEIVER OPERATIONS The GNS 430 includes digitally tuned VOR localizer and glideslope receivers with the desired frequency selected in the VLOC Window along the left hand side of the display Figure 9 1 Frequency selection is performed by pressing the small left knob and turning the small and large left knobs to select the desired frequency Figure 9 1 VLOC Window Ident Audio and Volume VLOC ident is enabled by pressing the VLOC Volume
223. ighted The following menu options are available Checklists Provides up to nine different user defined checklists containing up to 30 items each Flight Timers Provides count up down timers plus automatic recording of departure time and total trip time Departure and total trip time recording can be configured to run either any time GNS 430 power is on or only when the ground speed exceeds 30 knots Trip Statistics Provides readouts for trip odometers average speed and maximum speed These readouts are resettable individually or all at once by pressing the MENU Key to display the Trip Statistics Page Menu GNS 430 A Pilot s Guide and Reference 190 00140 00 Rev P 10 13 SECTION 10 AUX PAGES RAIM Prediction Predicts if GPS coverage is available for the current location or at a specified waypoint at any time and date Receiver Autonomous Integrity Monitoring RAIM performs checks to ensure that the GNS 430 will have adequate satellite geometry during the flight RAIM availability is near 100 in Oceanic Enroute and Terminal phases of flight Because the FAA s TSO requirements for non precision approaches specify significantly better satellite coverage than other flight phases RAIM may not be available when flying some approaches The GNS 430 automatically monitors RAIM during approach operations and warns the pilot if RAIM is not available In such cases use the GNS 430 s VLOC rec
224. igure 5 8 Press the ENT Key when finished Figure 5 8 Comment Line Selected 5 Once all changes have been made press the small right knob to return to the Flight Plan Catalog Page GNS 430 A Pilot s Guide and Reference 190 00140 00 Rev P 5 4 SECTION 5 FLIGHT PLANS Activating Flight Plans Once a flight plan is defined through the Flight Plan Catalog Page using the steps outlined previously in this section it may be activated for navigation Activating the flight plan places it into flight plan 00 and overwrites any previous information at that location To activate an existing flight plan 1 From the Flight Plan Catalog Page press the small right knob to activate the cursor 2 Turn the large right knob to highlight the desired flight plan and press the MENU Key to display the Flight Plan Catalog Page Menu 3 Turn the large right knob to highlight Activate Flight Plan and press the ENT Key Figure 5 9 Figure 5 9 Flight Plan Catalog Page Menu Inverting Flight Plans After travelling along a flight plan the pilot may wish to reverse the route for navigation guidance back to the original departure point To activate an existing flight plan in reverse order 1 From the Flight Plan Catalog Page press the small right knob to activate the cursor 2 Turn the large right knob to highlight the desired flight plan and press the MENU Key to display the Flight Plan Catalog Page M
225. ing function as described in the preceding procedure to place the target pointer on a waypoint Figure 3 11 2 Press the ENT Key to display the Waypoint Information Page s for the selected waypoint Figure 3 12 Figure 3 12 Information for On Screen Waypoint 3 Press the CLR Key to exit the information page s GNS 430 A Pilot s Guide and Reference 190 00140 00 Rev P SECTION 3 NAV PAGES 3 8 Map Direct to To designate an on screen airport NAVAID or user waypoint as the direct to destination 1 Use the panning function Map Panning in this section to place the target pointer on a waypoint 2 Press the Direct to Key to display the select Direct to Waypoint Page with the selected waypoint already listed Figure 3 13 Figure 3 13 MAP Waypoint 3 Press the ENT Key twice to confirm the selection and begin navigating to the waypoint The direct to function can be used anywhere on the map If nothing currently exists at the target pointer location a new waypoint called MAP Figure 3 13 is created at the target pointer location before the direct to is initiated Airspace Information on the Map When a special use or controlled airspace boundary appears on the Map Display the pilot can quickly retrieve information such as floor ceiling limits and controlling agency directly from the map To view airspace information for an on screen special use or controlled airspace 1
226. ions FAA Notice N8110 60 The oceanic flight phase is used by the GNS 430 when the aircraft is more than 200 nm from the nearest airport FDE requires no pilot interaction during flight predicting the capability of the GPS constellation to provide service during a flight is done by the pilot prior to departure 13 1 DETECTION AND EXCLUSION FDE consists of two distinct parts fault detection and fault exclusion The detection function refers to the capability to detect a satellite failure which can affect navigation Upon detection the exclusion function excludes one or more failed satellites and prevents them from being used during navigation This allows the GPS receiver to return to normal performance without interruption The process is entirely automated and does not require pilot interaction during flight On the Satellite Status Page the pilot can view information related to FDE operation To enhance safety FDE functionality is provided for other phases of flight non precision approach terminal enroute The FDE functionality for non oceanic flight phases adheres to the same missed alert probability false alert probability and failed exclusion probability specified by N8110 60 Figure 13 1 shows satellite number 9 exclusion during oceanic phase of flight No message notifying the user of exclusion appears In addition to the EPE and DOP fields there is the Horizontal Uncertainty Level HUL field which displays a 99 c
227. ired menu option Figure 10 52 and press the ENT Key Figure 10 53 Figure 10 52 Units Mag Var Highlighted Figure 10 53 Units Mag Var Page The following menu options are available Airspace Alarms Allows the pilot to turn the controlled special use airspace message alerts on or off This does not affect the alerts listed on the Nearest Airspace Page or the airspace boundaries depicted on the Map Page It simply turns on off the warning provided when the aircraft is approaching or near an airspace An altitude buffer is also provided which expands the vertical range above or below an airspace For example if the buffer is set at 500 feet and the aircraft is more than 500 feet above or below an airspace the pilot is not notified with an alert message if the aircraft is less than 500 feet above or below an airspace and projected to enter it the pilot is notified with an alert message The default is 200 feet CDI Alarms Allows the pilot to define the scale for the GNS 430 s on screen course deviation indicator The scale values represent full scale deflection for the CDI to either side Figure 10 54 The default setting is Auto At this setting the CDI scale is set to 5 nm during the enroute oceanic phase of flight Within 30 nm of the destination airport the CDI scale gradually ramps down to 1 0 nm terminal area Likewise when leaving the departure airport the CDI scale is set
228. is established on the final approach course With the approach activated the Map Page displays an extension of the final approach course in magenta magenta is used to depict the active leg of the flight plan and VTF appears as part of the active leg on the Default NAV Page as a reminder that the approach was activated with vectors to final GNS 430 A Pilot s Guide and Reference 190 00140 00 Rev P SECTION 6 PROCEDURES 6 19 DO NOT USE FOR NAVIGATION Figure 6 51 Terminal Mode In this example assume ATC vectors result in a rectangular course to intercept final as follows refer to Figure 6 51 for the following steps 1 Within 30 nm of KTOP the GNS 430 switches from enroute mode to terminal mode and the CDI scale transitions from 5 0 to 1 0 nm full scale deflection 2 If the approach has not already been activated activate the approach with vectors to final This allows the GNS 430 to provide guidance to the final approach course 3 ATC instructs the pilot to turn left to a heading of 025 This places the aircraft parallel to the final approach course in the opposite direction Figure 6 52 CDI needle deflection is to the left Figure 6 52 Heading of 025 4 ATC instructs the pilot to turn right to a heading of 115 Figure 6 53 Figure 6 53 Heading of 115 5 ATC instructs the pilot to turn right to a heading of 175 to intercept the final approach
229. ith a special anti reflective coating that is very sensitive to skin oils waxes and abrasive cleaners CLEANERS CONTAINING AMMONIA WILL HARM THE ANTI REFLECTIVE COATING It is very important to clean the screen using a clean lint free cloth and an eyeglass lens cleaner that is specified as safe for anti reflective coatings CAUTION The Garmin GNS 430 does not contain any user serviceable parts Repairs should only be made by an authorized Garmin service center Unauthorized repairs or modifications could void both the warranty and the pilot s authority to operate this device under FAA FCC regulations NOTE All visual depictions contained within this document including screen images of the GNS 430 panel and displays are subject to change and may not reflect the most current GNS 430 system Depictions of equipment may differ slightly from the actual equipment NOTE This device complies with part 15 of the FCC Rules Operation is subject to the following two conditions 1 this device may not cause harmful interference and 2 this device must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesired operation NOTE Unless otherwise specified within this manual the term GNS 430 applies to both the GNS 430 and the GNS 430A models Please note that the difference between these two models is indicated under VHF COM Performance in the Specifications section of this manual Appendix B NOTE This produc
230. key and knob descriptions Figure 1 1 provide a general overview of the primary function s for each key and knob The takeoff tour Section 1 3 is intended to provide a brief overview of the primary functions of the GNS 430 Large left knob Large right knob Small left knob Small right knob CDI OBS MSG message FPL flight plan PROC procedures VLOC Volume COM Power Volume VLOC Flip flop COM Flip flop CLR clear ENT enter MENU RNG map range Direct to 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 4 6 3 2 5 8 9 7 1 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 Figure 1 1 Keys and Knobs Experiment with the unit and refer to the reference sections for more information Data is entered using the large and small knobs Experiment with them to become efficient at entering data This greatly reduces the amount of time spent operating the GNS 430 in flight GNS 430 A Pilot s Guide and Reference 190 00140 00 Rev P 1 3 SECTION 1 INTRODUCTION Left hand Keys and Knobs 1 COM Power Volume Knob Controls unit power and communications radio volume Press momentarily to disable automatic squelch control 2 VLOC Volume Knob Controls audio volume for the selected VOR Localizer frequency Press momentarily to enable disable the ident tone 3 COM Flip flop Key Used to swap the active and standby COM frequencies Press
231. lan 14 4 CLR Key 1 3 COM Configuration 10 28 10 30 COM Flip flop Key 1 3 COM Power Volume Knob 1 3 COM volume 1 5 COM window 1 9 1 13 2 2 2 6 8 4 8 9 8 10 8 13 9 1 Contrast 10 28 10 29 Copying flight plans C 2 Course from fix flight plan 6 21 Creating a flight plan 6 5 Creating user waypoints 7 19 Crossfill 3 4 5 6 10 2 10 3 10 8 10 9 10 10 D Database confirmation page 1 6 A 1 Database subscriptions 1 6 Data fields 1 12 3 4 3 6 3 12 3 13 3 19 3 21 5 10 10 5 Data Link Request Log Page 12 26 Data Link Status Page 12 32 Date and time 10 3 10 11 10 18 10 22 C 1 Declutter 1 11 3 6 Default NAV Page 1 10 Delete user waypoints 14 2 Deleting flight plans 5 5 5 7 Density altitude 10 1 10 2 10 3 10 7 Departures 1 4 1 14 1 15 5 9 5 12 5 14 6 1 6 25 7 1 7 13 9 3 14 3 Departure time 10 7 10 12 10 16 Desired track 1 11 1 12 3 3 3 6 5 8 6 15 6 23 6 25 10 3 14 7 14 12 14 13 Direct to Key 1 3 Direct to navigation 4 5 Display backlighting 14 2 14 3 GNS 430 A Pilot s Guide and Reference 190 00140 00 Rev P I 2 INDEX Display contrast 10 28 10 29 DIS distance 1 11 1 12 3 3 3 6 5 8 5 10 6 6 6 15 6 21 6 23 6 29 7 14 7 17 7 18 7 21 10 3 10 7 10 25 14 9 14 12 DME Arc 3 2 6 14 DOP 3 22 3 23 13 1 14 3 14 9 14 12 Duplex operations 8 10 Duplicate waypoints 7 3 E Emergency channel select 2 5 ENT Key 1 3 EPE 3 22 3 23 13 1 14 9 14 12 ETA 3
232. lashing cursor highlights the first message field Turn the large right knob to highlight the desired message field 3 Press the CLR Key to delete the message text followed by the ENT Key to confirm the deletion GNS 430 A Pilot s Guide and Reference 190 00140 00 Rev P 10 12 SECTION 10 AUX PAGES 10 3 UTILITy PAGE The Utility Page Figure 10 29 provides access via menu options to checklists a count down up timer trip timers trip statistics RAIM Receiver Autonomous Integrity Monitoring prediction sunrise sunset time calculations software versions database versions and terrain database version information When a menu option is selected the corresponding page appears providing additional information and features NOTE Scroll down to view the last 3 items Software Versions Database Versions and Terrain Database Versions listed on the Utility Page Figure 10 29 Utility Page Current Page Group Menu Options to Select Highlight with Cursor and Press the ENT Key Position of Current Page within Current Page Group Number of Pages in Current Page Group To select a menu option from the Utility Page 1 Press the small right knob momentarily to activate the flashing cursor Figure 10 29 2 Turn the large right knob to select the desired menu option Figure 10 30 and press the ENT Key Figure 10 31 Figure 10 30 Sunrise Sunset Highlighted Figure 10 31 Waypoint Field Highl
233. led TIS relies on surveillance of the Mode S radar which is a secondary surveillance radar similar to the ATCRBS TIS operation may be intermittent during turns or other maneuvering TIS is dependent on two way line of sight communications between the aircraft and the Mode S radar When the structure of the client aircraft GNS 430 A Pilot s Guide and Reference 190 00140 00 Rev P 12 3 SECTION 12 ADDITIONAL FEATURES comes between the transponder antenna usually located on the underside of the aircraft and the ground based radar antenna the signal may be temporarily interrupted Other limitations and anomalies associated with TIS are described in the AIM Section 1 3 5 TIS is unavailable at low altitudes in many areas of the U S particularly in mountainous regions Also when flying near the floor of radar coverage in a particular area intruders below the client aircraft may not be detected by TIS TIS information is collected one radar scan prior to the scan during which the uplink occurs Therefore the surveillance information is approximately 5 seconds old In order to present the intruders in a real time position the TIS ground station uses a predictive algorithm in its tracking software This algorithm uses track history data to extrapolate intruders to their expected positions consistent with the time of display in the cockpit Occasionally aircraft maneuvering causes this algorithm to ind
234. lert Summary GNS 430 A Pilot s Guide and Reference 190 00140 00 Rev P 11 6 SECTION 11 TERRAIN Table 11 3 shows system status annunciations that may also be issued Alert Type TERRAIN Page Annunciation Pop Up Alert TERRAIN System Test Fail None TERRAIN Alerting is disabled None No GPS position or excessively degraded GPS signal None System Test in progress None System Test pass None None Table 11 3 Additional System Annunciations Forward Looking Terrain Avoidance The Forward Looking Terrain Avoidance FLTA alert is used by TERRAIN and is composed of Reduced Required Terrain Clearance RTC and Reduced Required Obstacle Clearance ROC These alerts are issued when the aircraft flight path is above terrain yet is projected to come within the minimum clearance values in Table 11 4 When an RTC or ROC alert is issued a potential impact point is displayed on the TERRAIN Page Imminent Terrain Impact ITI and Imminent Obstacle Impact IOI These alerts are issued when the aircraft is below the elevation of a terrain or obstacle cell in the aircraft s projected path ITI and IOI alerts are accompanied by a potential impact point displayed on the TERRAIN Page The alert is annunciated when the projected vertical flight path is calculated to come within minimum clearance altitudes in Table 11 4 During the final approach phase of flight FLTA alerts are automatically inhibited when the aircraf
235. long with appropriate hardware upgrades Operating Criteria TERRAIN requires the following to operate properly The system must have a valid 3 D GPS position solution The system must have a valid terrain obstacle airport terrain database Limitations NOTE The data contained in the TERRAIN databases comes from government agencies Garmin accurately processes and cross validates the data but cannot guarantee the accuracy and completeness of the data TERRAIN displays terrain and obstructions relative to the altitude of the aircraft The displayed alerts are advisory in nature only Individual obstructions may be shown if available in the database However all obstructions may not be available in the database and data may be inaccurate Never use this information for navigation or to maneuver to avoid obstacles Terrain information is based on terrain elevation information in a database that may contain inaccuracies Terrain information should be used as an aid to situational awareness Never use it for navigation or to maneuver to avoid terrain TERRAIN uses terrain and obstacle information supplied by government sources The data undergoes verification by Garmin to confirm accuracy of the content per TSO C151b However the displayed information should never be understood as being all inclusive GNS 430 A Pilot s Guide and Reference 190 00140 00 Rev P 11 2 SECTION 11 TERRAIN TERRAIN Alerting
236. lowest numbers are the best accuracy and the highest numbers are the worst EPE uses DOP and other factors to calculate a horizontal position error in feet or meters HUL is explained in Section 13 Table 3 5 GPS Receiver Status Messages GNS 430 A Pilot s Guide and Reference 190 00140 00 Rev P SECTION 3 NAV PAGES 3 24 3 9 VERTICAL NAVIGATION PAGE The GNS 430 s Vertical Navigation Page the last NAV page see Figure 3 49 creates a three dimensional profile to provide guidance from the present position and altitude to a final target altitude at a specified location This is helpful when descending to a certain altitude near an airport or climbing to an altitude before reaching a route or direct to waypoint Figure 3 50 Once the profile is defined message alerts and additional data on the Default NAV Page and the Map Page provide guidance to the pilot Figure 3 49 Vertical Navigation VNAV Page 6 5 1 4 3 2 8 7 9 Target Altitude 1 Target Distance 2 Altitude Reference AGL or MSL 3 Target Reference 4 Vertical Speed Desired 5 Vertical Speed Required 6 Current Page Group 7 Number of Pages in Current Page Group 8 Position of Current Page within Current Page Group 9 NOTE To use the vertical navigation features ground speed must be greater than 35 knots and the pilot must be navigating to a direct to destination or using a flight plan VERTICAL NAVIGATION PROFILE VERT
237. ltiple pages The page groups are selected using the large right knob The individual pages are selected using the small right knob Page Groups NAV Group WPT Group AUX Group NRST Group 7 NAV Pages see Section 7 see Section 10 see Section 8 Table 3 1 Page Groups The bottom right corner of the screen Figure 3 1 indicates which page group is currently being displayed e g NAV WPT AUX or NRST the number of screens available within that group indicated by the square icons and the placement of the current screen within that group indicated by a highlighted square icon The bottom right corner of the screen is also used to display the GNS 430 s turn advisories Turn to 230 and waypont alerts Next DTK 230 during flight plan and approach operations See Section 6 Figure 3 1 Current Page and Page Group Current Page Group Number of Pages in Current Page Group Position of Current Page within Current Page Group To select the desired page from any page 1 Press and hold the CLR Key to select the Default NAV Page Turn the large right knob to select the desired page group 2 Turn the small right knob to select the desired page NOTE The NAV Page Group may have eight or nine NAV pages when the GNS 430 is connected to Traffic and or weather information sources See Section 12 for more information 3 2 NAV PAGE GROUP The NAV Page Group includes seven pages Figure 3 2
238. ly adjusts to the desired limits based upon the current phase of flight enroute terminal area or approach The pilot may also manually select the desired scale setting as outlined in Section 10 4 The graphic CDI shows the current position at the center of the indicator relative to the desired course the moving course deviation needle As with a traditional mechanical CDI when off course simply steer toward the needle The TO FROM arrow in the center of the scale indicates whether the aircraft is heading TO up arrow or FROM the waypoint down arrow NOTE The GNS 430 always navigates TO a waypoint unless the OBS switch is set preventing automatic waypoint sequencing or if the aircraft has passed the last waypoint in the flight plan Directly below the CDI appears the active leg of the flight plan or the direct to destination when using the Direct to Key This automatically sequences to the next leg of the flight plan as each interim waypoint is reached If no flight plan or direct to destination has been selected the destination field remains blank The symbols in Table 3 2 are used on the Default NAV Page directly below the CDI to depict the active leg of a flight plan or direct to Symbol Description Direct to a Waypoint Course to a Waypoint or Desired Course between Two Waypoints Procedure Turn Procedure Turn Vectors to Final DME Arc to the Left DME Arc to the Right Left hand Holding Patte
239. m this reminder highlight Yes and press the ENT Key Not all approaches in the database are approved for GPS use When selecting an approach a GPS designation to the right of the procedure name Figure 6 4 indicates the procedure can be flown using the GPS receiver Some procedures do not have this designation meaning the GPS receiver may be used for supplemental navigation guidance only ILS approaches for example must be flown by tuning the VLOC receiver to the proper frequency and coupling the VLOC receiver to the external CDI or HSI Figure 6 4 GPS Designations Once an approach is selected it may be activated for navigation from the Procedures Page Activating the approach overrides the enroute portion of the active flight plan proceeding directly to the approach portion for a full approach directly to the initial approach fix Activating the approach also initiates automatic CDI scaling transition as the approach progresses To activate an approach 1 Press the PROC Key to display the Procedures Page Figure 6 5 2 Turn the large right knob to highlight Activate Approach Figure 6 5 and press the ENT Key Figure 6 5 Procedures Page GNS 430 A Pilot s Guide and Reference 190 00140 00 Rev P SECTION 6 PROCEDURES 6 3 Another Procedures Page option allows the pilot to activate the final course segment of the approach This option assumes the pilot will receive vecto
240. mind that some VOR VORTAC identifiers are similar to airport identifiers If a destination airport does not have a GPS approach the GNS 430 indicates NONE for the available procedures as listed on the Airport Approach Page Figure C 1 For more information on selecting an approach see Section 6 1 Figure C 1 Airport Approach Page GNS 430 A Pilot s Guide and Reference 190 00140 00 Rev P APPENDIX C TROUBLESHOOTING C 2 What happens when I select an approach Can I store a flight plan with an approach departure or arrival When loading an approach departure or arrival into the active flight plan a set of approach departure or arrival waypoints is inserted into the flight plan along with a header line describing the selected instrument procedure Figure C 2 The original enroute portion of the flight plan remains active unless the pilot activates the instrument procedure which may be done when the procedure is loaded or at a later time Figure C 2 Active Flight Plan Page Flight plans can also be stored with an approach departure or arrival Keep in mind that the active flight plan is erased when the unit is turned off and overwritten when another flight plan is activated When storing flight plans with an approach departure or arrival the GNS 430 uses the waypoint information from the current database to define the waypoints If the database is changed or updated the GNS 430 automatically updat
241. mit An error was detected during unit to unit crossfill of user data user waypoints and or flight plans The data transfer should be attempted again Data transfer is complete The unit to unit crossfill of user waypoint data has finished Database changed validate user modified procedures One or more approaches departures or arrivals have been modified from their original published form When the NavData Card is replaced database update the changes in the new database must be manually verified This message occurs each time a flight plan containing a modified procedure generated from a prior database version is activated To eliminate the message re create the flight plan from the new database then make the desired modifications Degraded accuracy GPS position accuracy has been degraded and RAIM is not available Poor satellite geometry or coverage has resulted in a horizontal DOP greater than 4 0 Additional cross checking using another navigation source is required to verify the integrity of the GPS position Display backlight failure The GNS 430 has detected a failure in the display backlighting The unit should be taken to your Garmin dealer for service Do not use for navigation The GNS 430 is in Demo Mode and must not be used for actual navigation GNS 430 A Pilot s Guide and Reference 190 00140 00 Rev P SECTION 14 MESSAGES ABBREVIATIONS amp NAV TERMS 14 4 FPL has been truncated The
242. n From ID Position is from the ID entered into the WPT field Flight Plan is the ID selected from the active flight plan Auto Request GDL 49 Only This field is used to set the time interval for the GDL 49 to automatically send a NEXRAD data request The time options are OFF 10 min 15 min 20 min 30 min 45 min and 1 hour When an auto request time is selected the first request is sent after the specified time has elapsed from when the field was set as opposed to immediately sending a request NOTE It is recommended that the pilot turn the Auto Request function on by setting it to 10 min updates This setting provides best performance for the GDL 49 The Manual Send GDL 49 or Update Request GDL 69 field is used to request METAR Data 4 Use the small and large right knobs to select the desired data and the ENT Key to enter the data into the appropriate fields on the METAR Request Page 5 Select Manual Send or Update Request and press the ENT Key The request has been sent Note that selecting Auto Request and pressing the ENT Key does not send the request until after the auto time period 6 To exit from the NEXRAD Request Page press the small right knob The Data Link Page is displayed GNS 430 A Pilot s Guide and Reference 190 00140 00 Rev P 12 29 SECTION 12 ADDITIONAL FEATURES Requesting graphical or textual METARs from the
243. n finished 5 To reset the total trip time turn the large right knob to highlight Reset Figure 10 39 and press the ENT Key Figure 10 39 Reset Highlighted GNS 430 A Pilot s Guide and Reference 190 00140 00 Rev P 10 17 SECTION 10 AUX PAGES Utility Page Trip Statistics To reset trip statistics readouts 1 Select Trip Statistics from the Utility Page Figure 10 40 using the steps described at the beginning of this section Figure 10 40 Trip Statistics Highlighted 2 Press the MENU Key to display the Trip Statistics Page Menu with several reset options Figure 10 41 Figure 10 41 Trip Statistics Page Menu Reset Trip Resets trip odometer and average ground speed readouts Reset Max Speed Resets maximum speed readout only Reset Odometer Resets odometer readout only Reset All Resets all trip statistics readouts 3 Turn the large right knob to select the desired reset option and press the ENT Key Utility Page RAIM Prediction To predict RAIM availability 1 Select RAIM Prediction from the Utility Page Figure 10 42 using the steps described at the beginning of this section Figure 10 42 RAIM Prediction Highlighted 2 The flashing cursor highlights the waypoint field Figure 10 43 Use the small and large right knobs to enter the identifier of the waypoint at which the pilot wants to determine RAIM availability Press the ENT Ke
244. n risk WARNING The basemap land and water data must not be used for navigation but rather only for non navigational situational awareness Any basemap indication should be compared with other navigation sources WARNING For safety reasons GNS 430 operational procedures must be learned on the ground WARNING The United States government operates the Global Positioning System and is solely responsible for its accuracy and maintenance The GPS system is subject to changes which could affect the accuracy and performance of all GPS equipment Portions of the Garmin GNS 430 utilize GPS as a precision electronic NAVigation AID NAVAID Therefore as with all NAVAIDs information presented by the GNS 430 can be misused or misinterpreted and therefore become unsafe GNS 430 A Pilot s Guide and Reference 190 00140 00 Rev P v WARNINGS CAUTIONS AND NOTES WARNING Use the GNS 430 at your own risk To reduce the risk of unsafe operation carefully review and understand all aspects of the GNS 430 Pilot s Guide documentation and the GNS 430 Flight Manual Supplement Thoroughly practice basic operation prior to actual use During flight operations carefully compare indications from the GNS 430 to all available navigation sources including the information from other NAVAIDs visual sightings charts etc For safety purposes always resolve any discrepancies before continuing navigation CAUTION The GNS 430 display screen is coated w
245. n using the crossfill option GNS 430 A Pilot s Guide and Reference 190 00140 00 Rev P SECTION 3 NAV PAGES 3 5 3 4 MAP PAGE The second NAV page is the Map Page Figure 3 8 which displays the present position using an airplane symbol along with nearby airports NAVAIDS user defined waypoints airspace boundaries lakes rivers highways and cities Figure 3 8 Map Page Number of Pages in Current Page Group Map Range Map Display Data Fields Present Position Position of Current Page within Current Page Group Current Page Group NOTE If the GNS 430 is unable to determine a GPS position the present position airplane symbol does not appear on the Map Page Different symbols are used to distinguish between waypoint types The identifiers for any on screen waypoints can also be displayed The identifiers are enabled by default Special use and controlled airspace boundaries appear on the map showing the individual sectors for Class B Class C and Class D airspaces Table 3 3 lists the symbols used to depict the various airports and NAVAIDS on the Map Page Symbol Description Airport with hard surface runway s primary runway shown Airport with soft surface runway s only Private Airfield Heliport VOR VOR DME DME Localizer Intersection VORTAC TACAN NDB Locator Outer Marker Table 3 3 Map Page Symbols The Map Display can be set to 23 different range
246. ned in Section 6 1 Figure 6 10 Procedures Page 4 From the Transitions Window Figure 6 11 select LYH VOR the IAF Also select Load to load but not activate the approach Figure 6 11 Approach and Transitions Windows 5 Press the PROC Key select Activate Approach and press the ENT Key to activate the approach GNS 430 A Pilot s Guide and Reference 190 00140 00 Rev P SECTION 6 PROCEDURES 6 6 Flying the Procedure Turn Figure 6 12 Sample Approach with Procedure Turn DO NOT USE FOR NAVIGATION Refer to Figure 6 12 for the following steps 1 Within 30 nm of the destination airport the GNS 430 switches from enroute mode to terminal mode as indicated in the lower left corner of the screen The switch to terminal mode is accompanied by a gradual Course Deviation Indicator CDI scale transition from 5 0 to 1 0 nm full scale deflection Figure 6 13 Figure 6 13 CDI Scale at 1 0 nm 2 Several miles prior to reaching the IAF LYH the pilot may wish to review the approach sequence Press the FPL Key to display the Active Flight Plan Page Press the small right knob and then turn the large right knob to review each segment of the approach Figure 6 14 When finished press the FPL Key again to return to the previous page Figure 6 14 Active Flight Plan Page 3 When approaching the IAF LYH a waypoint alert NEXT DTK 205 appe
247. nfigured for TERRAIN See Section 11 for a full description of TERRAIN functions TERRAIN Page To display the TERRAIN Page select the NAV Page Group and turn the small right knob until the TERRAIN Page is displayed Figure 3 26 and 3 27 The TERRAIN Page displays GPS derived MSL altitude shown in increments of 20 feet or 10 meters depending on unit configuration The G to right of the MSL altitude display reminds the pilot that altitude is GPS derived Aircraft ground track Terrain Range Indicates the terrain elevation in colors relative to the aircraft altitude Range marking rings 1 nm 2 nm 5 nm 10 nm 25 nm 50nm and 100 nm Heading Indicator The heading indication on the TERRAIN Page always displays TRK for Track up unless there is no valid heading Obstacles Potential Impact Points Figure 3 26 TERRAIN Page 120 View GPS derived MSL Altitude Red Terrain Warning Terrain Above or Within 100 Below Aircraft Altitude Number of Pages in Current Page Group Position of Current Page within Current Page Group Current Page Group Heading Indicator Figure 3 27 TERRAIN Page 360 View Yellow Terrain Caution Terrain Between 100 and 1000 Below Aircraft Altitude Black Terrain No Danger Terrain More than 1000 Below Aircraft Altitude Range Marking Ring Selectable Display Settings The TERRAIN Page has two selec
248. ning The GNS 430 s auto tune feature allows the pilot to quickly select any database frequency in the GPS Window as the standby frequency Any COM frequency displayed in the GPS Window can be transferred to the standby COM frequency field with a minimum of keystrokes required The following are some examples of selecting COM frequencies from some of the main GPS pages To select a COM frequency for a nearby airport 1 Turn the large right knob to select the NRST Page Group 2 Turn the small right knob to display the Nearest Airport Page Figure 2 5 Figure 2 5 Nearest Airport Page 3 Press the small right knob momentarily to place the cursor on the airport identifier field of the first airport in the list To select another airport turn the large right knob to highlight the desired airport 4 The Nearest Airport Page displays the common traffic advisory frequency CTAF for each listed airport To select this frequency turn the large right knob to highlight the desired airport s CTAF frequency and press the ENT Key to place the frequency in the standby field of the COM Window To display the entire list of frequencies for a nearby airport and select from that list 1 Start with the desired airport highlighted on the Nearest Airport Page as described in the preceding step 3 then press the ENT Key 2 Press the small right knob momentarily to remove the cursor and turn the small right knob to display t
249. note that the final course segment is displayed in magenta the active leg of the flight plan always appears in magenta and a dashed line extends the course beyond the MAP Figure 6 46 Figure 6 46 Final Course Segment 11 When approaching the MAP a waypoint alert APPRCHING WPT appears in the lower right corner 12 After crossing the MAP SUSP appears above the OBS Key Figure 6 47 indicating that automatic sequencing of approach waypoints is suspended at the MAP A from indication is displayed on the CDI and Default NAV Page but course guidance along the final approach course continues Do not follow this extended course Follow published missed approach procedures using the OBS Key to initiate the missed approach sequence as outlined in Flying the Missed Approach in this section Figure 6 47 SUSP Annunciation Vectors to Final Take a second look at the VOR 22 approach into Billard Municipal Instead of following the DME arc ATC tells the pilot to expect vectors onto the final approach course There are several ways to select vectors to final with the GNS 430 The first two options below normally require the least workload to accomplish When the approach is first selected choose VECTORS from the Transitions Window Load a full approach including the IAF from the Transitions Window as described in Section 6 1 When cleared press the PROC Key and sel
250. nt to be transferred GNS 430 A Pilot s Guide and Reference 190 00140 00 Rev P 5 7 SECTION 5 FLIGHT PLANS 5 The Cross side field allows the pilot to designate the sending and receiving units in a crossfill operation Turn the large right knob to select the Cross side field then turn the small right knob to select To or From Figure 5 15 Press the ENT Key to confirm the selection Figure 5 15 Transfer Window 6 Turn the large right knob to highlight Initiate Transfer and press the ENT Key Copy Flight Plan Allows the pilot to copy the selected flight plan to a new flight plan location as described previously in this section The copy function is useful for duplicating an existing flight plan before making changes Delete Flight Plan Allows the pilot to remove the selected flight plan from memory as described previously in this section Deleting a flight plan does not delete the individual waypoints contained in the flight plan from the database or user waypoint memory Delete All Flight Plans Allows the pilot to remove all flight plans from memory To delete all flight plans 1 Select the Delete All Flight Plans option from the Flight Plan Catalog Page Menu Figure 5 16 and press the ENT Key Figure 5 16 Flight Plan Catalog Page Menu 2 A confirmation window appears Figure 5 17 With Yes highlighted press the
251. nterfacing with non Garmin products Introduction GNS 430 units can interface with the GDL 49 or the GDL 69 69A The GNS 430 unit provides the display and control interface for the textual and graphical weather data link Satellite up linked textual and graphical weather data is received by the GDL 49 on a request reply basis Transmissions are made using bursts of compressed data at a rate of 4800 bps Weather data transmissions are streamed directly to the GDL 69 69A from the XM Satellite Radio network The following operational differences are noted between the GDL 69 69A and the GDL 49 GDL 49 NEXRAD and METAR data is collected by the National Weather Service and disseminated to Meteorlogix a weather information provider This data is then delivered to a weather server in the Echo Flight Message System With the weather data on the system an incoming customer request is filled logged and turned around for delivery to ORBCOMM in less than five seconds ORBCOMM is a provider of global messaging services using a constellation of 26 low Earth orbiting satellites The message is relayed from the satellites to the GDL 49 aboard the aircraft Once the GDL 49 receives the message it is displayed on the GNS 430 unit GDL 69 69A NEXRAD and METAR data is collected by the National Weather Service and disseminated to WxWorks a weather information provider This data is then delivered to XM Satellite for r
252. nually by pressing the CDI Key Once the switch from GPS to VLOC has occurred either automatically or manually it does not automatically switch again until the approach is reactivated or another approach is selected To prevent automatic ILS CDI selection choose the Manual ILS CDI setting as described in Section 10 4 CDI Scale Alarms The factory default setting is Auto which enables the automatic switch to VLOC Selecting an ILS Approach This example uses a flight from Laughlin Bullhead Arizona International to Flagstaff Pulliam KFLG and selects the ILS runway 21 approach SHUTR intersection is selected as the IAF which includes an outbound leg and a procedure turn Of course vectors to final could also be selected as previously described for the non precision approach examples refer to Figure 6 73 for the following steps DO NOT USE FOR NAVIGATION Flagstaff AZ Pulliam ILS DME Rwy 21 Figure 6 73 ILS Approach Flagstaff 1 Select Flagstaff Pulliam KFLG as the destination using the Direct to Key or as the last waypoint in a flight plan Figure 6 74 Figure 6 74 Select Waypoint GNS 430 A Pilot s Guide and Reference 190 00140 00 Rev P SECTION 6 PROCEDURES 6 28 2 Press the PROC Key and select the ILS 21 approach Figure 6 75 using the steps outlined in Section 6 1 Figure 6 75 Approach Window 3 From the Transitions Window select SHUTR
253. o be used to toggle aviation information on or off Figure 3 30 TERRAIN Page Menu GNS 430 A Pilot s Guide and Reference 190 00140 00 Rev P SECTION 3 NAV PAGES 3 16 Inhibit Mode TERRAIN has an inhibit mode that deactivates the FLTA PDA visual alerts Pilots should use discretion when inhibiting TERRAIN and always remember to enable the system when appropriate Only the PDA and FLTA alerts are disabled in the inhibit mode See Section 11 3 for more information on TERRAIN alerts To inhibit TERRAIN 1 Select the TERRAIN Page and press the MENU Key Inhibit Terrain is selected by default Figure 3 31 Figure 3 31 TERRAIN Page Menu 2 Press the ENT Key The TER INHB annunciation is displayed in the TERRAIN annunciator field when TERRAIN is inhibited Figure 3 32 Annunciator Field Figure 3 32 TERRAIN Annunciator Field Enabling TERRAIN 1 Select the TERRAIN Page and press the MENU Key Enable Terrain is selected by default 2 Press the ENT Key The TERRAIN system is functional again TERRAIN Symbols NOTE See Section 11 2 for a complete description of TERRAIN symbology The following symbols Figure 3 33 are used to represent obstacles and potential impact points on the Terrain Page Red Symbol Terrain Obstacle is above or within 100 feet below the aircraft altitude Yellow Symbol Terrain Obstacle is between 1000 feet and 100 feet below the aircraft al
254. oaches is strictly for monitoring only To confirm this reminder highlight Yes and press the ENT Key GNS 430 A Pilot s Guide and Reference 190 00140 00 Rev P 5 12 SECTION 5 FLIGHT PLANS To select an arrival for a direct to or flight plan destination airport 1 Select the Select Arrival option from the Active Flight Plan Page Menu Figure 5 27 and press the ENT Key Figure 5 27 Active Flight Plan Page Menu 2 A window appears listing the available arrivals Figure 5 28 for the destination airport Turn the small right knob to select the desired arrival and press the ENT Key Figure 5 28 Arrivals Window 3 A second window appears listing available transitions Figure 5 29 for the arrival Turn the small right knob to highlight the desired transition waypoint and press the ENT Key Figure 5 29 Transitions Window 4 With Load highlighted press the ENT Key To select a departure for the departure airport 1 Select the Select Departure option from the Active Flight Plan Page Menu and press the ENT Key 2 A window appears listing the available departures for the departure airport Turn the small right knob to select the desired departure and press the ENT Key 3 A second window appears listing available transitions for the departure Turn the small right knob to highlight the desired transition waypoint and press the ENT Key 4 With Load highlighted press
255. oll through the list and highlight the desired airport 5 Press the ENT Key to confirm the selected airport and press the ENT Key again to activate the direct to function GNS 430 A Pilot s Guide and Reference 190 00140 00 Rev P 4 4 SECTION 4 DIRECT TO NAVIGATION Shortcuts Shortcuts are available when using the Direct to Key allowing the pilot to bypass the use of the small and large right knobs to enter the destination waypoint s identifier A direct to can be performed from any page displaying a single waypoint identifier such as the WPT pages for airports and NAVAIDs For pages that display a list of waypoints e g the Nearest Airport Page the desired waypoint must be highlighted with the cursor before pressing the Direct to Key Selecting an on screen waypoint as a direct to destination 1 If a single airport NAVAID or user waypoint is displayed on screen Figure 4 9 Figure 4 9 Single Waypoint Displayed a Press the Direct to Key b Press the ENT Key twice 2 If a list of waypoints is displayed on screen a Press the small right knob to activate the cursor b Turn the large right knob to highlight the desired waypoint Figure 4 10 Figure 4 10 Nearest List c Press the Direct to Key followed by the ENT Key twice To select an on screen waypoint as a direct to destination 1 If a single airport NAVAID or user waypoint is displayed on screen press the Direct to Key
256. onfidence level that the aircraft position is within a circle with a radius of the value displayed in the HUL field Oceanic Mode Excluded Satellite Checkered Pattern Horizontal Uncertainty Level Figure 13 1 Satellite Status Page GNS 430 A Pilot s Guide and Reference 190 00140 00 Rev P SECTION 13 FAULT DETECTION AND EXCLUSION 13 2 13 2 PRE DEPARTURE VERIFICATION OF FDE Since FDE is based upon the exclusion of bad satellites it is necessary to ensure there will be an adequate number of satellites in the GPS constellation that are still able to provide a navigation solution An FDE prediction must be performed prior to departure for a flight involving Oceanic Remote operation where GPS is to be the sole source of navigation per FAA Notice 8110 60 U S Area Navigation RNAV routes Standard Instrument Departures SIDs or Standard Terminal Arrival Routes STARs if a NOTAM indicates a GPS satellite or satellites is scheduled to be out of service per FAA AC 90 100 U S Terminal and En Route Area Navigation RNAV Operations Prior to departure the operator must use the FDE Prediction Program supplied with the 400 series Trainer Software Figure 13 2 to demonstrate that there are no outages in the capability to navigate on the specified route of flight the FDE Prediction Program determines whether the GPS constellation is robust enough to provide a navigation solution for t
257. original catalog location and replaces any flight plan which currently exists in flight plan 00 To activate the new flight plan 1 Press the MENU Key to display the Flight Plan Catalog Page Menu 2 Turn the small right knob to select Activate Flight Plan Figure 1 34 and press the ENT Key Figure 1 34 Flight Plan Catalog Page Menu GNS 430 A Pilot s Guide and Reference 190 00140 00 Rev P 1 20 SECTION 1 INTRODUCTION Blank Page GNS 430 A Pilot s Guide and Reference 190 00140 00 Rev P 2 1 SECTION 2 COM SECTION 2 COM 2 1 COMMUNICATING USING THE GNS 430 The GNS 430 features a digitally tuned VHF COM radio that provides a seamless transition from communication to navigation bringing the two most important functions in flying together in one panel mounted unit The GNS 430 s COM radio operates in the aviation voice band from 118 000 to 136 975 MHz in 25 kHz steps default For European operations a COM radio configuration to allow for 8 33 kHz steps is also provided Section 10 5 Setup 2 Page COM Configuration Volume COM radio volume is adjusted using the COM Power Volume Knob Turn the COM Power Volume Knob clockwise to increase volume or counterclockwise to decrease volume Squelch The COM radio features an automatic squelch providing maximum sensitivity to weaker signals while rejecting many localized noise sources The pilot may wish to override this automat
258. ound portion of the holding pattern 7 Note that the GNS 430 again displays SUSP above the OBS Key Automatic waypoint sequencing is suspended at the missed approach holding point A waypoint alert APPRCHING WPT appears in the lower right corner of the screen each time the aircraft approaches PMD VOR in the holding pattern 8 When leaving the holding pattern press the PROC Key to reactivate the approach or select a different approach or press the Direct to Key to select another destination Course from fix to manual sequence legs appear on the Active Flight Plan Page and the Map Page with man seq in place of a waypoint identifier An example of this type of course leg appears in the COASTAL ONE DEPARTURE from Westfield Massachusetts Barnes Muni The example leg corresponds to the departure leg from Barnes Municipal and appears as in Figure 6 68 on the Active Flight Plan Page and the Default NAV Page DO NOT USE FOR NAVIGATION COASTAL ONE DEPARTURE CSTL1 CCC DEPARTING BARNES MUNI Fly assigned heading and altitude for radar vectors to HFD VOR Expect clearance to requested flight level 10 minutes after departure From over HFD VOR proceed via the HFD R 143 to Thumb Int then via the HTO R 010 to Yoder Int then via the CCC R 057 to CCC VOR Then via transition or assigned route Figure 6 68 Coastal One Departure GNS 430 A Pilot s Guide and Reference 190 00140
259. oup NRST Group see Section 3 see Section 7 4 AUX pages see Section 8 Table 10 1 Page Groups Figure 10 1 AUX Pages Flight Planning Utility Setup 1 Setup 2 NOTE The AUX Page Group may have five AUX pages available when the GNS 430 installation includes connection to a weather information source See Section 10 of this manual for more information To quickly select an AUX page 1 From any page press and hold the CLR Key to select the Default NAV Page Figure 10 2 If any of the main pages are already being displayed this step may be skipped Figure 10 2 Default NAV Page 2 Turn the large right knob to select the AUX Page Group Figure 10 3 AUX appears in the lower right corner of the screen Figure 10 3 Flight Planning Page 3 Turn the small right knob to select the desired AUX page GNS 430 A Pilot s Guide and Reference 190 00140 00 Rev P 10 2 SECTION 10 AUX PAGES 10 2 FLIGHT PLANNING PAGE The Flight Planning Page Figure 10 4 provides access via menu options to E6B functions for fuel planning trip planning density altitude true airspeed winds aloft calculations and a Crossfill function to transfer flight plans user waypoints to a second GNS 430 When a menu option is selected the corresponding page appears providing additional information and features Figure 10 4 Flight Planning Page Current Page Group Menu Options to Select Highlight with Cursor and Press t
260. oved if the CLR Key is pressed while density is set to low Request Shortcuts The pilot can quickly select the NEXRAD METAR or Textual METAR Page for a specific airport from the Airport Location Page Three methods of selecting the Airport Location Page Use the small and large right knobs to select the Airport Location Page from the WPT Group of pages On the Map Page move the target pointer to high light an on screen airport Press the ENT Key On any page that displays an airport identifier use the cursor and highlight the desired airport identi fier Press the ENT Key Once the Airport Location Page is displayed enter the identifier for the desired airport Press the MENU Key The options menu appears Figure 12 37 listing the following three options Request NEXRAD Request METAR View Text METAR if available Figure 12 37 Airport Location Page Options Menu Highlight the desired option and press the ENT Key Request NEXRAD and Request METAR options select the NEXRAD and METAR Request Pages respectively View Text METAR selects the Textual METAR Page for the desired airport if textual METAR is available for that airport GNS 430 A Pilot s Guide and Reference 190 00140 00 Rev P 12 26 SECTION 12 ADDITIONAL FEATURES Data Link Request Log Page GDL 49 Only The Data Link Request Log Page Figure 12 39 is used to display the data th
261. plan it can easily be deleted from the Flight Plan Catalog Page or the Active Flight Plan Page To delete a flight plan 1 From the Active Flight Plan Page press the MENU Key to display the Active Flight Plan Page Menu 2 From the Flight Plan Catalog Page press the small right knob to activate the cursor turn the large right knob to highlight the flight plan to be deleted then press the MENU Key to display the Flight Plan Catalog Page Menu 3 Turn the large right knob to highlight Delete Flight Plan Figure 5 12 and press the ENT Key Figure 5 12 Flight Plan Catalog Page Menu 4 With Yes highlighted press the ENT Key to delete the flight plan GNS 430 A Pilot s Guide and Reference 190 00140 00 Rev P 5 6 SECTION 5 FLIGHT PLANS Flight Plan Catalog Options The following options some covered on the preceding pages are available for the Flight Plan Catalog Page Activate Flight Plan Allows the pilot to select the flight plan for navigation guidance as described previously in this section Invert amp Activate FPL Allows the pilot to reverse the highlighted flight plan and select it for navigation guidance as described previously in this section Create New Flight Plan Allows the pilot to create a new flight plan as described previously in this section Crossfill Allows the pilot to transfer a Direct to destination
262. plan and activate navigation guidance to the approach transition Section 6 1 To load and activate an approach from the Airport Approach Page follow the steps above but select Load and Activate in step 3 GNS 430 A Pilot s Guide and Reference 190 00140 00 Rev P 7 11 SECTION 7 WPT PAGES 7 6 AIRPORT ARRIVAL PAGE The Airport Arrival Page Figure 7 22 shows the available Airport Standard Terminal Arrival STAR procedures for the selected airport Where multiple transitions or runways are associated with the arrival procedure that information may also be displayed A map image provides a layout diagram for each arrival transition and runway Figure 7 22 Airport Arrival Page Airport Identifier Symbol and Type Map Image Arrival Procedure Name Transitions Runway associated with arrival Position of Current Page within Current Page Group Number of Pages in Current Page Group Current Page Group To scroll through the available arrivals 1 Press the small right knob to activate the cursor 2 Turn the large right knob to place the cursor on the arrival ARVL procedure name field Figure 7 22 3 Turn the small right knob to display a window of available arrivals for the selected airport Figure 7 23 Continue turning the small right knob to select the desired arrival Figure 7 23 Arrivals Window 4 Press the ENT Key The cursor moves to the transitions TRANS field
263. point The GNS 430 only sequences flight plan waypoints when automatic sequencing is enabled i e no OBS or SUSP annunciation directly above the OBS Key For automatic sequencing to occur the aircraft must also cross the bisector of the turn being navigated The bisector is a perpendicular line between two flight plan legs which crosses through the waypoint common to both legs How do I skip a waypoint in an approach departure or arrival The GNS 430 allows the pilot to manually select any approach departure or arrival leg as the active leg of the flight plan This procedure is performed from the Active Flight Plan Page by highlighting the desired waypoint and pressing the Direct to Key twice then press the ENT Key to approve the selection Figure C 5 The GPS then provides navigation along the selected flight plan leg so be sure to have clearance to that position See Section 5 2 Shortcuts for more information Figure C 5 Activate Leg Window How do I fly the GPS with an autopilot and DG heading bug If the installation does not have an HSI the pilot should make the course selections on the external CDI s OBS knob and the DG heading bug GNS 430 A Pilot s Guide and Reference 190 00140 00 Rev P APPENDIX C TROUBLESHOOTING C 5 When does turn anticipation begin and what bank angle is expected The GNS 430 smooths adjacent leg transitions based upon a nominal 15 bank angle with the a
264. ponents Altitude Deviation Altitude Trend Traffic Ground Track Vector Traffic Type Traffic Type Description Traffic Advisory TA This symbol solid yellow circle is generated when an intruder aircraft approaches on a course that projects to intercept defined by a 0 5 nm horizontal radius and a relative altitude of 500 ft the pilot s current course within 34 seconds Out of Range Traffic Advisory This solid yellow half circle appears under the same conditions and has the same urgency as a TA Its appearance differs from the TA only to signify that the intruder is outside of the current range of the Traffic Page Other Traffic Symbol This symbol hollow white diamond represents traffic detected within the selected display range that does not meet the criteria for a TA May be configured as cyan Traffic Ground Track The target track vector is a short line displayed in 45 increments The vector protrudes from each target symbol in the approximate direction of travel Table 12 2 TIS Options Traffic Page TIS Traffic data is displayed on the Traffic Page Figure 12 5 and the Map Page Unlike other forms of traffic TIS traffic does not require heading data to be valid on the map If heading is available the Traffic Page is displayed in heading up orientation If it is not available the Traffic Page is track up oriented Orientation is shown in the upper portion of the Traffic Page
265. press the ENT Key Figure 6 1 Procedures Page 3 A window appears listing the available procedures Figure 6 2 Turn the large right knob to highlight the desired procedure and press the ENT Key When a direct to destination is selected departures are offered for the nearest airport Figure 6 2 Approach Window 4 A second window appears listing the available transitions Figure 6 3 Turn the large right knob to highlight the desired transition waypoint and press the ENT Key The approach Vectors option assumes the pilot will receive vectors to the final course segment of the approach and will provide navigation guidance relative to the final approach course Figure 6 3 Transitions Window GNS 430 A Pilot s Guide and Reference 190 00140 00 Rev P SECTION 6 PROCEDURES 6 2 5 Turn the large right knob to highlight Load or Activate approaches only and press the ENT Key Load adds the procedure to the flight plan without immediately using it for navigation guidance This allows the pilot to continue navigating the original flight plan but keeps the procedure available on the Active Flight Plan Page for quick activation when needed 6 For precision approaches and some non precision approaches a reminder window appears indicating that GPS guidance on such approaches is strictly for monitoring only use the VLOC receivers and external CDI or HSI for primary navigation To confir
266. pt the ILS The GNS 430 sequences to the inbound leg and NEXT DTK 210 Figure 6 83 appears in the lower right corner of the screen CDI coupling automatically switches from the GPS receiver to the VLOC receiver as the pilot completes the inbound turn If the ILS frequency has not been activated per step 4 this automatic CDI switching does not occur Figure 6 83 Waypoint Alert 10 Turn to track the ILS approach course NOTE From this point on primary navigation is provided by the VLOC receiver The pilot may continue to use the GPS receiver for supplemental navigation guidance only ALSO when using an external CDI not an HSI expect reverse sensing when flying outbound on the approach course or when flying a backcourse approach 11 When approaching the FAF SHUTR 0 30nm appears in the lower left corner of the screen indicating a CDI scale transition from 1 0 to 0 3 nm full scale deflection Figure 6 84 This scale transition applies only to the Default NAV Page s on screen CDI since the external CDI or HSI is now coupled to the VLOC receiver GPS approach mode is not activated for precision approaches since the VLOC receiver must be used for primary navigation Figure 6 84 Final Approach GNS 430 A Pilot s Guide and Reference 190 00140 00 Rev P SECTION 6 PROCEDURES 6 31 DO NOT USE FOR NAVIGATION Figure 6 85 Final Approach Flagstaff Refer to Figure 6 85 for the following steps
267. quency Figure 3 37 Figure 3 37 Info Highlighted 2 Press the ENT Key to display the restriction information Figure 3 38 Figure 3 38 Restriction Information Page 3 To return to the NAV COM Page press the ENT Key GNS 430 A Pilot s Guide and Reference 190 00140 00 Rev P SECTION 3 NAV PAGES 3 19 3 7 POSITION PAGE The Position Page displays the present position by default in latitude and longitude and altitude The Position Page Figure 3 39 also displays the current track ground speed time and a reference waypoint field These fields are user selectable to configure the page to the pilot s own preferences and current navigation needs Figure 3 39 Position Page Present Position Reference Waypoint Field Graphic Track Indicator User selectable Data Fields Number of Pages in Current Page Group Position of Current Page within Current Page Group Current Page Group The graphic track indicator at the top of the page indicates the direction the aircraft is heading or track only when moving The graphic track indicator and the TRK indication directly below it provide the same information Use the graphic track indicator for quick at a glance ground track information Directly below are three user selectable fields which by default display track ground speed and altitude Barometric pressure BARO settings and minimum safe altitude MSA can also be displayed in these field
268. quency Range 108 00 MHz to 117 95 MHz LOCALIZER PERFORMANCE Frequency Range 108 10 MHz to 111 95 MHz GLIDESLOPE PERFORMANCE Frequency Range 329 15 MHz to 335 00 MHz INTERFACES ARINC 429 Aviation RS 232 CDI HSI RMI digital clock data Superflag Out Altitude serial Icarus Shadin Rosetta or encoded Gillham Greycode Fuel Sensor Fuel Air Data Earlier versions of the 430 were designed to be used with 28 Vdc power only For questions on a particular installation please refer to a Garmin authorized service center GNS 430 A Pilot s Guide and Reference 190 00140 00 Rev P APPENDIX B SPECIFICATIONS B 2 Blank Page GNS 430 A Pilot s Guide and Reference 190 00140 00 Rev P APPENDIX C TROUBLESHOOTING C 1 APPENDIX C TROUBLESHOOTING Q amp A This section is designed to answer some of the common questions regarding the GNS 430 s capabilities and operation If there is a problem operating the unit read through this appendix and refer to the reference section noted If the answer to a particular question is not covered here use the index to find the appropriate section elsewhere in this manual If after reading through the appropriate reference section the answer cannot be found please see an authorized dealer or contact Garmin directly at the address or phone numbers listed on page ii Garmin is dedicated to supporting its products and customers What is RAIM and how does it a
269. r the nearest airport 5 A second window appears listing available transitions Turn the small right knob to highlight the desired transition waypoint and press the ENT Key The approach Vectors option assumes the pilot will receive vectors to the final course segment of the approach and will provide navigation guidance to intercept this final course GNS 430 A Pilot s Guide and Reference 190 00140 00 Rev P 9 4 SECTION 9 VLOC RECEIVER 6 Turn the large right knob to highlight Load or Activate Figure 9 8 and press the ENT Key Load adds the procedure to the flight plan without immediately using it for navigation guidance This allows the pilot to continue navigating the original flight plan but keeps the procedure available on the Active Flight Plan Page for quick activation when needed Figure 9 8 Highlight Load 7 For VOR and ILS approaches the standby field of the VLOC Window is automatically tuned to the proper frequency To activate the frequency press the VLOC Flip flop Key To display VLOC course information on the external CDI or HSI press the CDI Key and verify that VLOC is displayed at the bottom left corner of the screen directly above the CLR Key 8 For precision approaches and some non precision approaches a reminder window appears indicating that GPS guidance on such approaches is strictly for monitoring only use the VLOC receivers and external C
270. raffic Mode option 8 Turn the small right knob to select the desired option 9 Press the ENT Key Repeat steps 7 9 for Traffic Symbol and Traffic Label GNS 430 A Pilot s Guide and Reference 190 00140 00 Rev P 12 17 SECTION 12 ADDITIONAL FEATURES 10 Return to the Map Page by pressing the CLR Key Thumbnail Traffic on Map Page Traffic in a thumbnail format can be displayed in any of the three data fields on the right side of the Map Page Figure 12 29 Displaying Thumbnail Traffic on the Map Page 1 Turn the small right knob to select the Map Page 2 Press the MENU Key to display the Page Menu 3 Turn the small right knob to select Change Fields 4 Press the ENT Key 5 Turn the large right knob to select one of the three fields 6 Turn the small right knob to select TRFC from the Select Field Type List 7 Press the ENT Key Figure 12 29 Figure 12 29 Thumbnail Traffic on Map Page NOTE The thumbnail range defaults to 6 nm and cannot be changed Highlighting Traffic Data Using Map Panning Another map page function is panning which allows changing the map beyond its current limits without adjusting the map scale Select the panning function by pressing the small right knob a target pointer flashes on the map display Figure 12 30 Also a window appears at the top of the map display showing the latitude longitude position of the pointer and the bearing
271. re 14 1 Illustrated NAV Terms VERTICAL NAVIGATION PROFILE VERTICAL SPEED REQUIRED DISTANCE TO TARGET TIME AND DISTANCE TO PROFILE TARGET ALTITUDE AND POSITION AIRPORT CURRENT ALTITUDE AND POSITION Figure 14 2 Illustrated Vertical NAV Terms Term Description ALT altitude Height above mean sea level MSL BRG bearing The compass direction from the present position to a destination waypoint CAS calibrated airspeed Indicated airspeed corrected for instrument errors CTS course to steer The recommended direction to steer in order to reduce course error or stay on course Provides the most efficient heading to get back to the desired course and proceed along the flight plan CUM cumulative The total of all legs in a flight plan cumulative distance DIS distance The great circle distance from the present position to a destination waypoint DOP dilution of precision A measure of satellite geometry quality on a scale of one to ten lowest numbers are best highest numbers are worst DTK desired track The desired course between the active from and to waypoints EFF efficiency A measure of fuel consumption expressed in distance per fuel units e g nautical miles per gallon ENDUR endurance Flight endurance or total available flight time based upon available fuel GNS 430 A Pilot s Guide and Reference 190 00140 00 Rev P SECTION 14 MESSAGES ABBREV
272. re 7 30 Airport Departure Page Menu 4 The Active Flight Plan Page appears Press the FPL Key to return to the Airport Departure Page 7 8 INTERSECTION PAGE The Intersection Page Figure 7 31 displays the latitude longitude region and country for the selected intersection The Intersection Page also displays the identifier radial and distance from the nearest VOR VORTAC or VOR DME Figure 7 31 Intersection Page Intersection Identifier and Symbol Region Country Nearest VOR and Symbol Radial and Distance from Nearest VOR Latitude Longitude Position Number of Pages in Current Page Group Position of Current Page within Current Page Group Current Page Group The following descriptions and abbreviations are used Position Latitude Longitude degrees minutes or degrees minutes seconds MGRS or UTM UPS RAD Radial from nearest VOR in degrees magnetic or degrees true depending upon unit configuration DIS Distance from nearest VOR in nautical miles statute miles kilometers depending upon unit configuration NOTE The VOR displayed on the Intersection Page is the nearest VOR not necessarily the VOR used to define the intersection Intersections may only be selected by identifier as described in Section 7 1 GNS 430 A Pilot s Guide and Reference 190 00140 00 Rev P 7 15 SECTION 7 WPT PAGES 7 9 NDB PAGE The NDB Page displays the facility name city
273. re 8 13 Desired Airport Highlighted 4 Press the ENT Key to display the Airport Location Page for the selected airport Figure 8 14 Figure 8 14 Airport Location Page 5 To view additional WPT pages for the selected airport including the Airport Runway Page and the Airport Frequency Page press the small right knob to remove the flashing cursor Turn the small right knob to display the additional WPT pages Figure 8 15 When finished press the small right knob to return the flashing cursor to the screen Figure 8 15 Additional WPT Page 6 To return to the Nearest Airport Page verify that Done is highlighted by the flashing cursor and press the ENT Key or press the CLR Key GNS 430 A Pilot s Guide and Reference 190 00140 00 Rev P 8 6 SECTION 8 NRST PAGES 8 3 NEAREST INTERSECTION PAGE The Nearest Intersection Page Figure 8 16 displays the identifier symbol bearing and distance to the nine nearest intersections within 200 nm of the present position To view additional information for a nearby intersection start from the Nearest Intersection Page and follow the preceding steps 2 through 4 Figure 8 16 Nearest Intersection Page Bearing To and Distance To Current Page Group Intersection Identifier and Symbol Position of Current Page within Current Page Group Number of Pages in Current Page Group 8 4 NEAREST NDB PAGE The Nearest NDB Page Figure 8 17 displays the iden
274. ress the CLR Key to go back to the Map Page Precipitation Intensity Map Configuration Pattern Color Light Precipitation Low sparse dotted area fill Green Light Precipitation Medium Density dense dotted area fill Green Light Precipitation High Density solid area fill Green Moderate Precipitation Low amp Medium Density dense dotted area fill Yellow Moderate Precipitation High Density solid area fill Yellow Heavy Precipitation Low amp Medium Density dense dotted area fill Red Heavy Precipitation High Density solid area fill Red Table 12 7 NEXRAD Density Patterns NOTE If the pilot changes the NEXRAD Density and or NEXRAD Symbol fields these settings changes also affect the Weather Page For example if the pilot selects Low NEXRAD Density both the Weather Page and the Map Page display the NEXRAD graphics in the Low mode GNS 430 A Pilot s Guide and Reference 190 00140 00 Rev P 12 25 SECTION 12 ADDITIONAL FEATURES The pilot may use the NEXRAD Off and NEXRAD On fields in the Page Menu Figure 12 36 to turn off the display of NEXRAD data from the Map Page Figure 12 36 Map Page Options Menu NOTE If the GNS 430 is configured for Weather Data Link Interface with a GDL 49 or GDL 69 pressing the CLR Key while viewing the Map Page reduces the NEXRAD density one incremental step All NEXRAD data is rem
275. rest Airport Page 1 15 1 16 1 17 2 3 8 2 8 4 8 5 10 28 Nearest airspace 1 15 Nearest ARTCC 1 15 2 4 8 9 Nearest FSS 1 15 8 2 8 10 Nearest Intersection Page 1 15 Nearest NDB Page 1 15 Nearest User Waypoints Page 1 15 Nearest VOR Page 1 15 NEXRAD 12 18 12 21 NEXRAD Request Page 12 21 NOAA 12 20 Non bearing traffic advisory 12 7 NRST Page Group 1 16 8 1 O OBS Key 1 4 6 8 6 9 6 11 6 12 6 13 6 17 6 20 6 22 6 25 6 32 14 1 14 6 C 2 C 6 Odometer 10 17 Overzoom 3 6 P Page groups 1 3 3 1 8 1 10 1 PDA premature descent alert 11 5 Pointer panning 3 7 3 8 3 12 4 5 7 19 Position format 1 5 10 22 10 25 Position Page 3 19 3 20 3 21 14 1 14 5 Power on 1 3 1 5 Precipitation graphics 12 34 Procedures Page 1 14 6 1 6 4 6 18 7 12 7 14 9 3 C 6 Procedure turn 5 15 6 4 6 7 6 27 6 29 6 30 6 33 PROC Key 1 4 1 14 5 9 6 1 6 2 6 3 6 5 6 9 6 10 6 14 6 17 6 18 6 24 6 28 9 3 C 6 R Radar coverage 7 4 RAIM prediction 10 13 10 17 RAIM protection limits 10 18 Reference waypoint 3 19 3 20 3 21 3 25 5 9 5 13 7 17 7 18 7 19 7 21 7 23 Remove the NavData Card A 2 Removing approaches 5 14 Rename a user waypoint 7 23 Requesting graphical METARS 12 27 Request METAR 12 25 Request NEXRAD 12 25 RNG Key 1 3 3 6 3 15 7 5 7 6 Roads 3 7 3 12 RTC required terrain clearance 11 5 Runway information 1 15 8 5 S Satellite Status Page 1 8 3 22 13 1 Scheduler
276. right knob to highlight Setup Map and press the ENT Key 2 Turn the small right knob to select Map and press the ENT Key 3 Turn the large right knob to highlight the Auto Zoom field 4 Turn the small right knob to select On or Off 5 Press the ENT Key to accept the selected option To enable disable the wind vector all back ground land data or all Jeppesen aviation data 1 From the Map Page Menu turn the large right knob to highlight Setup Map and press the ENT Key 2 Turn the small right knob to select Map and press the ENT Key 3 Turn the large right knob to highlight the appropriate field 4 Turn the small right knob to select On or Off 5 Press the ENT Key to accept the selected option To display airports NAVAIDs active flight plan waypoints user created waypoints state provincial boundaries rivers lakes and cities 1 From the Map Page Menu turn the large right knob to highlight Setup Map and press the ENT Key 2 Turn the small right knob to select the appropriate group name per the table on the preceding page and press the ENT Key 3 Turn the large right knob to highlight the zoom field for the desired feature 4 Turn the small right knob to select the maximum range at which the feature should appear on screen or select Off to never display the selected feature 5 Press the ENT Key to accept
277. rn Right hand Holding Pattern Table 3 2 NAV Page Symbols GNS 430 A Pilot s Guide and Reference 190 00140 00 Rev P SECTION 3 NAV PAGES 3 3 Selecting Desired On Screen Data At the bottom of the Default NAV Page there are six user definable fields which display the data needed as the flight progresses Figure 3 3 By default these fields display distance to destination DIS desired track DTK bearing to destination BRG ground speed GS ground track TRK and estimated time enroute ETE However each of these fields can be customized to display a different data item Available data items include Bearing to destination BRG Course to steer CTS Cross track error XTK Desired track DTK Distance to destination DIS Enroute safe altitude ESA Estimated time of arrival ETA Estimate time enroute ETE Fuel flow FLOW when configured Ground speed GS Ground track TRK Minimum safe altitude MSA Track angle error TKE Vertical speed required VSR If no flight plan or direct to destination has been selected only speed track altitude and minimum safe altitude data may be displayed All other data types appear as blank lines on the Default NAV Page until a destination is selected To select a different data item for any data field 1 Starting with the Default NAV Page press the MENU Key to display the De
278. roach has not yet been activated in steps on the preceding page do so when cleared for the approach Figure 6 78 Figure 6 78 Activate Approach 3 When approaching the IAF SHUTR a waypoint alert NEXT DTK 030 appears in the lower right corner of the screen Figure 6 79 Figure 6 79 Waypoint Alert 4 Press the VLOC Flip flop Key to activate the ILS frequency If this step is forgotten the GNS 430 displays a reminder message within 3 nm of the FAF to activate the ILS frequency 5 As the distance DIS to the IAF approaches zero the alert is replaced by a turn advisory TURN TO 030 see Figure 6 80 Figure 6 80 Turn Advisory 6 Fly the outbound course 7 Approximately one minute past SHUTR intersection the alert message START PROC TRN Figure 6 81 appears in the lower right corner of the screen if the pilot has not yet begun the procedure turn Figure 6 81 Alert Message GNS 430 A Pilot s Guide and Reference 190 00140 00 Rev P SECTION 6 PROCEDURES 6 30 Figure 6 82 ILS Approach Course DO NOT USE FOR NAVIGATION Refer to Figure 6 82 for the following steps 8 Initiate the procedure turn The GNS 430 does not provide guidance through the turn The procedure turn is displayed on the Map Page and indicated as the active leg on the Default NAV Page and the Active Flight Plan Page 9 After approximately one minute make a turn to interce
279. rom indication is displayed on the CDI and Default NAV Page but course guidance along the final approach course continues If a missed approach is required use the OBS Key to initiate the missed approach sequence as outlined in this section Figure 6 35 Missed Approach GNS 430 A Pilot s Guide and Reference 190 00140 00 Rev P SECTION 6 PROCEDURES 6 14 Flying a DME Arc Approach The GPS overlay for a DME arc approach uses additional Jeppesen provided waypoints to define the arc These waypoints are indicated by D as the first letter in the waypoint name This is followed by three numbers which indicate the radial the waypoint lies on The last letter indicates the radius of the arc Either of the following may be done to intercept the arc for a DME arc approach Follow a specified radial inbound to intercept the IAF Follow ATC vectors which allow the pilot to intercept the arc at any point along the arc DO NOT USE FOR NAVIGATION Figure 6 36 Enroute Mode NOTE As this manual was being written the letter number DME arc names were being replaced with standard five letter intersection names Either naming convention may be used for an approach This example is based upon a flight from Hutchinson Kansas Municipal KHUT to Billard Municipal KTOP in Topeka Kansas The VOR DME runway 22 approach is selected along with D258G as the IAF refer to Figure 6 36 for t
280. rs to the final approach fix FAF and provides guidance to intercept the final course before reaching the FAF To activate the approach with vectors to final 1 Press the PROC Key to display the Procedures Page 2 Turn the large right knob to highlight Activate Vector To Final Figure 6 6 and press the ENT Key Figure 6 6 Procedures Page In many cases it may be easiest to Load the full approach while still some distance away enroute to the destination airport Later if vectored to final use the steps above to select Activate Vector To Final which makes the inbound course to the FAF waypoint active Otherwise activate the full approach using the Activate Approach option 6 2 NON PRECISION APPROACH OPERATIONS The GNS 430 provides non precision approach guidance using its built in GPS receiver The GPS receiver can also be used as a supplemental aid for precision approaches and for non precision localizer based approaches but the localizer and glideslope receivers must be used for primary approach course guidance Approaches designed specifically for GPS are often very simple and don t require overflying a VOR or NDB Many non precision approaches have GPS overlays to let the pilot fly an existing procedure VOR VOR DME NDB RNAV etc more accurately using GPS Many overlay approaches are complex in comparison to GPS only approaches The GNS 430 displays and provides guidan
281. rt the checklists by name or entry 1 With the Checklists Page displayed press the MENU Key to display an options menu 2 Turn the large right knob to select Sort List By Entry or Sort List By Name and press the ENT Key Utility Page Flight Timers To view use or reset the generic timer 1 Select Flight Timers from the Utility Page Figure 10 36 using the steps described at the beginning of this section 10 3 Figure 10 36 Flight Timers Highlighted 2 The flashing cursor highlights Start To start the generic timer press the ENT Key Count up timers typically begin with this step however for count down timers to enter a count direction and time before starting the timer see the following steps 3 To change the count direction turn the large right knob to highlight the count direction field Figure 10 37 Down or Up Turn the small right knob to select the desired count direction Press the ENT Key when finished Figure 10 37 Count Window GNS 430 A Pilot s Guide and Reference 190 00140 00 Rev P 10 16 SECTION 10 AUX PAGES 4 For a count down timer turn the large right knob to highlight the time field Use the small and large right knobs to enter the count down time in hours minutes and seconds Press the ENT Key when finished 5 To stop the generic timer turn the large right knob to highlight Stop and press the ENT Key 6 To reset t
282. s confirmation window is displayed Figure 7 57 With Yes highlighted press the ENT Key to delete all user waypoints from memory Figure 7 57 Delete All Waypoints Window GNS 430 A Pilot s Guide and Reference 190 00140 00 Rev P 8 1 SECTION 8 NRST PAGES SECTION 8 NRST PAGES 8 1 NRST PAGE GROUP Section 3 1 introduced the GNS 430 s main page groups Table 8 1 NAV WPT AUX NRST and described each page in the NAV group This fourth page group NRST provides detailed information for the nine nearest airports VORs NDBs intersections and user waypoints within 200 nm of the current position In addition the NRST pages Figure 8 1 include the five nearest Flight Service Station FSS and center ARTCC FIR points of communication plus alerts the pilot to any nearby Special Use SUA or Controlled Airspaces Page Groups NAV Group WPT Group AUX Group NRST Group see Section 3 see Section 7 see Section 10 8 NRST pages Table 8 1 Page Groups Figure 8 1 NRST Pages NRST Airport NRST Intersection NRST NDB NRST VOR NRST User NRST Center NRST Flight Service NRST Airspace To quickly select a NRST page 1 From any page press and hold the CLR Key to select the Default NAV Page Figure 8 2 This step may be skipped if any of the main pages are already displayed Figure 8 2 Default NAV Page 2 Turn the large right knob to select the NRST Page Group Figure 8 3 NRST appear
283. s MSA is the recommended minimum altitude within approximately ten miles of the present position MSA is calculated from the information contained in the database and generally takes into account mountains buildings and other permanent features NOTE Do not rely solely on MSA as an absolute measure of safe altitude Consult current area charts and NOTAMs To change the user selectable data fields 1 Press the MENU Key to display the Position Page Menu Figure 3 40 Figure 3 40 Position Page Menu 2 Turn the large right knob to highlight Change Fields and press the ENT Key 3 Turn the large right knob to highlight the data field to be changed 4 Turn the small right knob to display the list of available data items Figure 3 41 Continue turning the small right knob to select the desired data item from the list Figure 3 41 Select Field Type Window GNS 430 A Pilot s Guide and Reference 190 00140 00 Rev P SECTION 3 NAV PAGES 3 20 5 Press the ENT Key to select the desired data item and return to the Position Page 6 Press the small right knob momentarily to remove the cursor from the page The Position Page also features a reference waypoint field located at the bottom of the page to indicate bearing and distance to from a selected waypoint The reference waypoint field can display bearing and distance information for a nearby airport default VOR NDB intersection or user waypoint
284. s Guide and Reference 190 00140 00 Rev P APPENDIX C TROUBLESHOOTING C 6 Why does my CDI not respond like a VOR when OBS mode is active Unlike a VOR the CDI scale used on GPS equipment is based on the cross track distance to the desired course not an angular relationship to the destination Figure C 8 Therefore the CDI deflection on the GPS is constant regardless of the distance to the destination and does not become less sensitive when further away from the destination For more information on the CDI scale see Section 8 4 Figure C 8 CDI Comparison 5 nm 5 nm 5 nm 5 nm 2 nm 2 nm GPS VOR What is the correct missed approach procedure How do I select the missed approach holding point To comply with TSO specifications the GNS 430 does not automatically sequence past the MAP The active to waypoint sequences to the first waypoint in the missed approach procedure when the OBS Key is pressed after crossing the MAP All published missed approach procedures must be followed as indicated on the approach plate To execute the missed approach procedure prior to the MAP not recommended select the Active Flight Plan Page highlight the MAHP press the Direct to Key and then press the ENT Key twice How do I re select the same approach or activate a new approach after a missed approach After flying all missed approach procedures the pilot may reactivate the same approach for another attemp
285. s in the lower right corner of the screen Figure 8 3 Nearest Airport Page 3 Turn the small right knob to select the desired NRST page GNS 430 A Pilot s Guide and Reference 190 00140 00 Rev P 8 2 SECTION 8 NRST PAGES Not all nine nearest airports VORs NDBs intersections or user waypoints can be displayed on the corresponding NRST page at one time The Nearest Airport Page displays detailed information for three nearest airports with a scroll bar along the right hand side of the page indicating which part of the list is currently being viewed The Nearest Airspace Page displays detailed information for up to three special use or controlled airspace alerts The NRST pages for VORs NDBs intersections and user waypoints displays five waypoints at a time The flashing cursor and large right knob are used to scroll and view the rest of the waypoints or airspaces in the list To scroll through the list of nearest airports VORs NDBs intersections user waypoints or SUAs 1 Select the desired NRST page using the steps outlined on the preceding page 2 Press the small right knob to activate the cursor 3 Turn the large right knob to scroll through the list The scroll bar along the right hand side of the page indicates which part of the list is currently being viewed Figure 8 4 Figure 8 4 Nearest Airport Page Scroll Bar 4 Press the small right knob to remove the flashing cursor The Nearest
286. screen 2 Note that within a few seconds of pressing the OBS Key to release suspend mode and start the approach sequence SUSP re appears above the OBS Key as the GNS 430 returns to suspend mode This is normal when flying a course from fix to altitude leg and indicates that automatic leg sequencing is suspended 3 Fly the outbound course The Map Page depicts the flight path extending indefinitely from PMD VOR Figure 6 66 The distance DIS on the Default NAV Page the Map Page and the Active Flight Plan Page increases indicating the distance back to PMD VOR Figure 6 66 Map Page 4 Upon reaching the desired altitude 5000 press the OBS Key to return to automatic leg sequencing Confirm that SUSP no longer appears directly above the OBS Key 5 An alert NEXT DTK 126 appears providing guidance to the inbound course Figure 6 67 The actual desired track DTK depends on ground speed and distance from PMD VOR Intercept and fly the inbound course Figure 6 67 Waypoint Alert GNS 430 A Pilot s Guide and Reference 190 00140 00 Rev P SECTION 6 PROCEDURES 6 24 6 When approaching PMD VOR the missed approach holding point an alert message in the lower right hand corner of the screen recommends the holding pattern entry procedure HOLD PARALLEL When flying the holding pattern a timer appears on the Default NAV Page The timer automatically resets on each outbound and inb
287. section 2 Turn the large right knob to highlight the On Off field directly below Arrival Alarm 3 Turn the small right knob to select On or Off as desired Press the ENT Key to accept the selection 4 The flashing cursor moves to the alarm distance field to the immediate right of On or Off To enter an arrival alarm distance use the small and large right knobs to enter the desired alarm distance Press the ENT Key when finished NOTE The CDI scale is always measured in nautical miles regardless of the current distance units of measure selected on the Units Mag Var Page Setup 1 Page Units Mag Var To set the magnetic variation 1 Select Units Mag Var from the Setup 1 Page Figure 10 61 using the steps described at the beginning of this section Figure 10 61 Units Mag Var Highlighted 2 The flashing cursor highlights the heading mode field Turn the small right knob to select the desired heading mode Auto True or User Figure 10 62 Press the ENT Key to accept the selection The heading modes are described at the beginning of this section Figure 10 62 Heading Mode Window 3 If User is selected the flashing cursor moves to the user value field to the immediate right of User Use the small and large right knobs to enter the desired magnetic variation direction and value Press the ENT Key when finished To change the units of measur
288. stem memory GNS 430 A Pilot s Guide and Reference 190 00140 00 Rev P 12 20 SECTION 12 ADDITIONAL FEATURES NEXRAD Intensity Colors are used to identify the different NEXRAD echo intensities reflectivity measured in dBZ decibels of Z Reflectivity designated by the letter Z is the amount of transmitted power returned to the radar receiver The dBZ values increase as returned signal strength increases Precipitation intensity is displayed on the GNS 430 units using colors represented by the dBZ values listed in Table 12 6 Display dBZ Rain inches hour Snow inches hour Source of NEXRAD Echo GDL 49 GDL 69 Atmos Cloud Rain Snow Sleet Hail lt 10 00 00 10 00 00 5 00 trace 0 00 trace 05 Very Light GREEN 5 00 trace 10 Light GREEN 10 0 trace 10 Light Light 15 01 1 2 Light Light 20 02 2 3 Light Light 25 05 3 5 Light Light Medium YELLOW YELLOW 30 09 5 7 Light Moderate Moderate 35 24 7 1 0 Moderate Heavy 40 48 gt 1 or sleet Heavy Heavy RED RED 45 1 25 gt 1 or sleet Heavy Heavy 50 2 5 sleet Intense 55 5 7 sleet Extreme 60 12 7 Extreme 65 Extreme 70 Large 75 Large Table 12 6 NEXRAD Intensity Colors NOTE The information presented in this Pilot s Guide regardin
289. t its packaging and its components contain chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer birth defects or reproductive harm This notice is being provided in accordance with California s Proposition 65 If you have any questions or would like additional information please refer to our website at www garmin com prop65 GNS 430 A Pilot s Guide and Reference 190 00140 00 Rev P vi WARRANTY AVIATION LIMITED WARRANTY All Garmin avionics products are warranted to be free from defects in materials or workmanship for two years from the date of purchase for new Remote Mount and Panel Mount products one year from the date of purchase for new portable products and any purchased newly overhauled products six months for newly overhauled products exchanged through a Garmin Authorized Service Center and 90 days for factory repaired or newly overhauled products exchanged at Garmin in lieu of repair Within the applicable period Garmin will at its sole option repair or replace any components that fail in normal use Such repairs or replacement will be made at no charge to the customer for parts or labor provided that the customer shall be responsible for any transportation cost This warranty does not apply to i cosmetic damage such as scratches nicks and dents ii consumable parts such as batteries unless product damage has occurred due to a defect in materials or workmanship iii damage caused by accident abuse misuse wat
290. t Lon Request NEXRAD data from a specific latitude and longitude This is only selectable when requesting from the map The Position field displays the position of the map cursor and cannot be edited From Flight Plan Request NEXRAD data from one of the waypoints in the active flight plan This is only selectable when an active Flight Plan has been selected The Flight Plan field displayed in place of Position is used to select which waypoint in the active flight plan to use as the reference point for the request Radius This field selects a request radius from 50 to 250 nautical miles from the selected position Position also WPT or Flight Plan Current Posn Position is current Look Ahead Position is look ahead position From ID Position is from the ID entered into the WPT field Flight Plan is the ID selected from the active flight plan GNS 430 A Pilot s Guide and Reference 190 00140 00 Rev P 12 22 SECTION 12 ADDITIONAL FEATURES Auto Request GDL 49 Only This field is used to set the time interval for the GDL 49 to automatically send a NEXRAD data request The time options are OFF 10 min 15 min 20 min 30 min 45 min and 1 hour When an auto request time is selected the first request is sent after the specified time has elapsed from when the field was set as opposed to immediately sending a request NOTE It is recommended that the pilo
291. t from the Procedures Page Once given clearance for another attempt activate the approach from the Procedures Page by highlighting Activate Approach and pressing the ENT Key The GNS 430 provides navigation along the desired course to the waypoint and rejoins the approach in sequence from that point on See Section 4 2 Active Flight Plan Options for information on activating a specific flight plan leg Activating a new approach for the same airport 1 Press the PROC Key 2 Turn the large right knob to highlight Select Approach 3 Press the ENT Key 4 Turn the large right knob to highlight the new desired approach 5 Press the ENT Key to select the approach then select the desired transition 6 Highlight Activate at the bottom right corner of the screen and press the ENT Key to activate the new approach Activating a new approach to a different airport 1 Press the Direct to Key 2 Select the desired airport using the small and large right knobs 3 Press the ENT Key to accept the selected airport then follow the steps in the preceding paragraph to select an approach for the new airport See Section 5 1 for more information on selecting and activating approaches GNS 430 A Pilot s Guide and Reference 190 00140 00 Rev P I 1 INDEX A Abbreviations 7 4 7 6 7 8 7 14 7 15 7 17 14 9 Accessories 1 1 Activate an existing flight plan in reverse 5 4 Activate leg 5 10
292. t is below 200 feet AGL while within 0 5 nm of the approach runway or below 125 feet AGL while within 1 0 nm of the runway threshold Phase of Flight Minimum Clearance Altitude Level Flight ft Minimum Clearance Altitude Descending ft Enroute 700 500 Terminal 350 300 Approach 150 100 Departure 100 100 Table 11 4 Minimum Terrain and Obstacle Clearance Values for FLTA Alerts GNS 430 A Pilot s Guide and Reference 190 00140 00 Rev P 11 7 SECTION 11 TERRAIN Premature Descent Alerting A Premature Descent Alert PDA is issued when the system detects that the aircraft is significantly below the normal approach path to a runway Figure 11 5 PDA alerting begins when the aircraft is within 15 nm of the destination airport PDA alerting ends when the aircraft is either 0 5 nm from the runway threshold OR at an altitude of 125 feet AGL while within 1 0 nm of the threshold 700 600 500 400 300 200 100 Height Above Terrain Feet Distance From Destination Airport nm 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 Too Low Terrain Too Low Terrain Runway Threshold Figure 11 5 PDA Alerting Threshold TERRAIN Inhibit TERRAIN also has an inhibit mode that deactivates the FLTA PDA visual alerts Pilots should use discretion when inhibiting TERRAIN and always remember to enable the system when appropriate Inhibiting TERRAIN 1
293. t is climbing or descending at a rate greater than 500 fpm GNS 430 A Pilot s Guide and Reference 190 00140 00 Rev P 12 8 SECTION 12 ADDITIONAL FEATURES Traffic Page Display Range Various display ranges can be selected for optimal display of TIS traffic information Changing the display range on the Traffic Page Press the RNG Key to zoom through the range selections which are 12 6 nm 6 2 nm and 2 nm Map Page TIS traffic is displayed on the Map Page Figure 12 15 in addition to the Traffic Page When a Traffic Advisory is active the Traffic Banner is displayed in the lower right corner of the Map Page Figure 12 15 Map Page Displaying Traffic Traffic Advisory Banner The Traffic Mode Selection Menu Figure 12 16 allows the user to choose from the following options TRAFC Mode All trfc All traffic is displayed on the Map Page TA PA Only traffic and proximity advisories are displayed on the Map Page proximity advisories are not applicable to TIS configuration TA only Only traffic advisories are displayed on the Map Page TRAFC SMBL Allows the user to select the map range at which the traffic symbol s and TA text appear TRAFC LBL Allows the user to select at what map range the altitude trend arrow and altitude deviation indicator appear Figure 12 16 Traffic Mode Selection Window Configuring TIS traffic on the Map Page 1 Turn the small right kno
294. t of the procedure name indicates the procedure can be flown using the GPS receiver Some procedures do not have this designation meaning the GPS receiver may be used for supplemental navigation guidance only ILS approaches for example must be flown by tuning the VLOC receiver to the proper frequency and coupling the VLOC receiver to the external CDI or HSI GNS 430 A Pilot s Guide and Reference 190 00140 00 Rev P 7 10 SECTION 7 WPT PAGES Airport Approach Page Options The following options are available for the Airport Approach Page by pressing the MENU Key Load into Active FPL allows the pilot to load the selected approach into the active flight plan without activating it This performs the same operation as selecting Load from the Procedures Page Select Approach option See Section 6 1 To load an approach from the Airport Approach Page Figure 7 20 Airport Approach Page 1 Select the desired approach and transition using the steps outlined in Section 6 1 Figure 7 20 2 Press the MENU Key to display the Airport Approach Page Menu 3 Turn the large right knob to highlight Load into Active FPL and press the ENT Key Figure 7 21 Figure 7 21 Airport Approach Page Menu 4 The Active Flight Plan Page appears Press the FPL Key to return to the Airport Procedures Page Load and Activate allows the pilot to load the selected approach into the active flight
295. t plan Turn the large right knob to highlight the LEG field and turn the small right knob to select the desired leg of the flight plan or select Cum to apply fuel planning calculations to the entire flight plan Figure 10 10 Fuel Planning Page Flight Plan GNS 430 A Pilot s Guide and Reference 190 00140 00 Rev P 10 5 SECTION 10 AUX PAGES 5 If the fuel management system does not enter the data automatically turn the large right knob to highlight the fuel on board FOB field Figure 10 11 Figure 10 11 FOB Highlighted 6 Use the small and large right knobs to enter the amount of fuel on board Press the ENT Key when finished 7 The flashing cursor moves to the fuel flow FF field Use the small and large right knobs to enter the fuel flow rate Press the ENT Key when finished Note that if a fuel system is providing current fuel flow the fuel flow field defaults to this value 8 The flashing cursor moves to the ground speed GS field Use the small and large right knobs to enter the ground speed Press the ENT Key when finished 9 With all variables entered the following information is provided Figure 10 12 REQ Quantity of fuel required LFOB Left over fuel on board LRES Left over fuel reserve time EFF Efficiency expressed in distance per fuel units e g nautical miles per gallon RNG Range distance ENDUR Flight endurance or total a
296. t turn the Auto Request function on by setting it to 10 min updates This setting provides best performance for the GDL 49 The Manual Send GDL 49 or Update Request GDL 69 field is used to request NEXRAD Data 4 Use the small and large right knobs to select the desired data listed on preceding page and the ENT Key to enter the data into the appropriate fields on the NEXRAD Request Page 5 Select Manual Send or Update Request and press the ENT Key The request has been sent Note that selecting Auto Request and pressing the ENT Key does not send the request until after the auto time period 6 To exit from the NEXRAD Request Page press the small right knob The Data Link Page is displayed Requesting NEXRAD data from the Map Page 1 Select the Map Page 2 Press the MENU Key The Map Page Options Menu is displayed 3 Select Request NEXRAD Figure 12 33 and press the ENT Key Figure 12 33 Map Page Options Menu 4 Follow the preceding steps 4 6 NOTE The pilot may also use the map panning function to request NEXRAD data at a specific map position After panning and selecting a position on the map the pilot can press the MENU Key and request the NEXRAD data Data Received Message GDL 49 Only When the request has been answered the message annunciator MSG flashes to alert the pilot to one of the following messages depending on the type of
297. table view settings 360 View View from above aircraft depicting surrounding terrain on all sides 120 View View of terrain ahead of and 60 to either side of the aircraft flight path Figure 3 26 NOTE The TERRAIN Page gives a Track Up display orientation as indicated by the TRK label shown on the display This is the only orientation available on this page GNS 430 A Pilot s Guide and Reference 190 00140 00 Rev P SECTION 3 NAV PAGES 3 15 To display a 360 view 1 Select the TERRAIN Page and press the MENU Key 2 Select View 360 Figure 3 28 Figure 3 28 TERRAIN Page Menu 3 Press the ENT Key To switch back to a 120 view repeat step 1 select View 120 and press the ENT Key Seven display ranges are available allowing for a more complete view of the surrounding area To change the display range Select the TERRAIN Page and press up or down on the RNG Key to select the desired range 1 nm 2 nm 5 nm 10 nm 25 nm 50 nm 100 nm Figure 3 29 Display Range Field Figure 3 29 TERRAIN Display Range Aviation information such as airports VORs and other NAVAIDS can be turned on or off from the TERRAIN Page To show or hide aviation data 1 Select the TERRAIN Page and press the MENU Key 2 Select Show or Hide Aviation Data Figure 3 30 and press the ENT Key Pressing the CLR Key when the TERRAIN Page is displayed can als
298. tance to destination estimated time of arrival ground speed minimum safe altitude and track See Section 14 3 for descriptions of these and other navigation terms To change a data field 1 From the Map Page Menu turn the large right knob to highlight Change Fields Figure 3 23 and press the ENT Key Figure 3 23 Map Page Menu 2 Turn the large right knob to highlight the data field to be changed 3 Turn the small right knob to select the type of data Figure 3 24 desired to appear on this field and press the ENT Key Figure 3 24 Select Data Field Window 4 Press the small right knob to remove the cursor NOTE The on screen traffic information occupies two data fields leaving room to display only two additional data types Traffic information is only available when the GNS 430 installation includes connection to traffic information sources see Section 12 Restoring Factory Settings Restore Defaults resets all four user selectable data fields to their original factory default settings To restore the factory default settings From the Map Page Menu turn the large right knob to highlight Restore Defaults Figure 3 25 and press the ENT Key Figure 3 25 Map Page Menu GNS 430 A Pilot s Guide and Reference 190 00140 00 Rev P SECTION 3 NAV PAGES 3 14 3 5 TERRAIN PAGE NOTE The TERRAIN Page does not appear on GNS 430 units that are not properly equipped with or co
299. tatus field Figure 3 46 also displays the messages listed in Table 3 5 under the appropriate conditions GPS Receiver Status Messages Searching Sky The GPS receiver is searching the sky for ANY visible satellites The pilot is informed of this status with a Searching the Sky message Acquiring Sat The GPS receiver is acquiring satellites for navigation In this mode the receiver uses satellite orbital data collected continuously from the satellites and last known position to determine which satellites should be in view 2D Navigation The GPS receiver is in 2D navigation mode Altitude data is provided by an altitude serializer 3D Navigation The GPS receiver is in 3D navigation mode and computes altitude using satellite data Poor Coverg The GPS receiver cannot acquire sufficient satellites for navigation Rcvr Not Usbl The GPS receiver is unusable due to incorrect initialization or abnormal satellite conditions Turn the unit off and on again AutoLocate The GPS receiver is looking for any available satellite This process can take up to five minutes to determine a position The Satellite Status Page also indicates the accuracy of the position fix using Estimated Position Error EPE Dilution of Precision DOP and Horizontal Uncertainty Level HUL figures DOP measures satellite geometry quality i e number of satellites received and where they are relative to each other on a scale from one to ten The
300. tes are being received to determine a position The Satellite Status Page shows the ID numbers for the satellites and the relative signal strength of each satellite received as a bar graph reading Searching Sky indicates that satellite almanac data is not available or has expired if the unit hasn t been used for six months or more This means the unit is acquiring satellite data to establish almanac and satellite orbit information which can take five to ten minutes The data is recollected from the first available satellite The Satellite Status Page displays a Search Sky status and the message annunciator MSG above the MSG Key also flashes to alert the pilot of system message Searching the Sky To view a system message Press the MSG Key Figure 1 10 The Message Page appears and displays the status or warning information applicable to the receiver s current operating condition Figure 1 10 Message Page To return to the previous page after viewing a message Press the MSG Key again NOTE The GNS 430 utilizes certain software algorithms to ensure reliable GPS receiver operation Receiver Autonomous Integrity Monitoring RAIM and Fault Detection and Exclusion FDE are two examples These features allow navigation during Oceanic Remote legs of a flight using the GNS 430 For further details please refer to Sections 10 3 and 12 GNS 430 A Pilot s Guide and Reference 190 00140 00 Rev P
301. the ENT Key GNS 430 A Pilot s Guide and Reference 190 00140 00 Rev P 5 13 SECTION 5 FLIGHT PLANS To remove an approach arrival or departure from the active flight plan 1 Select the Remove Approach Remove Arrival or Remove Departure option from the Active Flight Plan Page Menu Figure 5 30 and press the ENT Key Figure 5 30 Active Flight Plan Page Menu 2 A confirmation window appears listing the procedure to be removed With Yes highlighted press the ENT Key To determine the closest point along the active flight plan to a selected waypoint 1 Select the Closest Point of FPL option from the Active Flight Plan Page Menu Figure 5 31 and press the ENT Key Figure 5 31 Active Flight Plan Page Menu 2 A window appears with the reference waypoint field highlighted Use the small and large right knobs to enter the identifier of the reference waypoint and press the ENT Key 3 A confirmation window appears for the selected reference waypoint Figure 5 32 Press the ENT Key to accept the waypoint Figure 5 32 Closest Point of Flight Plan Window 4 The GNS 430 displays the bearing BRG and distance DIST to the closest point along the flight plan from the selected reference waypoint To create a user waypoint at this location and add it to the flight plan highlight Load and press the ENT Key The name for the new user waypoint is derived from the identi
302. the waypoint to be deleted Identifiers appear in green text 3 Press the CLR Key to display a confirmation window Figure 5 35 Figure 5 35 Remove Waypoint Window 4 With Yes highlighted press the ENT Key to remove the selected procedure GNS 430 A Pilot s Guide and Reference 190 00140 00 Rev P 5 15 SECTION 5 FLIGHT PLANS The Activate Leg option is discussed previously in this section which allows the pilot to specify which leg of the flight plan is used for navigation guidance A shortcut also exists for this operation using the Direct to Key To activate a specific leg of the active flight plan 1 Press the small right knob to activate the cursor and turn the large right knob to highlight the desired destination waypoint Figure 5 36 Figure 5 36 Destination Waypoint Highlighted 2 Press the Direct to Key twice to display an Activate Leg confirmation window Figure 5 37 Figure 5 37 Activate Leg Window 3 With Activate highlighted press the ENT Key When using instrument procedures this feature can be used not only to activate a specific point to point leg but to also activate the procedure turn portion of an approach follow a DME arc or activate a holding pattern Any approach departure or arrival can be reviewed on the appropriate airport page in the Waypoint Page Group Section 7 1 To review a procedure while viewing a flight plan page 1
303. tifier symbol bearing distance and frequency to the nine nearest NDBs within 200 nm of the present position To view additional information for a nearby NDB start from the nearest NDB Page and follow the preceding steps 2 through 4 Figure 8 17 Nearest NDB Page Bearing To and Distance To Current Page Group Intersection Identifier and Symbol Position of Current Page within Current Page Group Number of Pages in Current Page Group NDB Frequency GNS 430 A Pilot s Guide and Reference 190 00140 00 Rev P 8 7 SECTION 8 NRST PAGES 8 5 NEAREST VOR PAGE The Nearest VOR Page Figure 8 18 displays the identifier symbol bearing and distance to the nine nearest VORs within 200 nm of the present position For each VOR listed the nearest VOR Page also indicates the frequency and may be used to quickly tune the VLOC receiver to the nearby VOR The selected frequency is placed in the standby field of the VLOC Window and activated using the VLOC Flip flop Key Figure 8 18 Nearest VOR Page Bearing To and Distance To VOR Frequency Current Page Group Scroll Bar VOR Identifier and Symbol Position of Current Page within Current Page Group Number of Pages in Current Page Group To quickly tune a VOR s frequency from the nearest VOR Page 1 Select the nearest VOR Page using the steps outlined in Section 8 1 2 Press the small right knob to activate the cursor 3 Turn the
304. titude Black Symbol Terrain Obstacle is more than 1000 feet below the aircraft altitude NOTE Obstacle symbols are shown on display zoom ranges up to 10 nm Unlighted Obstacles lt 1000 feet AGL Lighted Obstacles lt 1000 feet AGL Unlighted Obstacles gt 1000 feet AGL Lighted Obstacles gt 1000 feet AGL Potential Impact Points Figure 3 33 TERRAIN Symbols NOTE If an obstacle and the projected flight path of the aircraft intersect the display automatically zooms in to the closest potential point of impact on the TERRAIN Page GNS 430 A Pilot s Guide and Reference 190 00140 00 Rev P SECTION 3 NAV PAGES 3 17 3 6 NAV COM PAGE The NAV COM navigation communications Page Figure 3 34 provides a list of the airport communication and navigation frequencies at the departure enroute and arrival airports The NAV COM Page makes selection of the frequencies needed along the flight plan quick and convenient If there is no active flight plan with a departure airport the NAV COM Page displays the frequencies for the airport nearest the departure position Figure 3 34 NAV COM Page Frequency Type Departure Enroute or Arrival Airport Assigned Frequency and Usage Information when applicable Number of Pages in Current Page Group Position of Current Page within Current Page Group Current Page Group To select a frequency list for a departure enroute or arrival airport 1
305. to waypoints and six user selectable data fields The default settings for these fields are distance to waypoint DIS desired track DTK bearing to waypoint BRG ground speed GS ground track TRK and estimated time enroute ETE See Section 14 3 for definitions of these navigation terms To change the data fields 1 From the Default NAV page press the MENU Key and select Change Fields Figure 1 18 Figure 1 18 Default NAV Page Menu 2 Turn the large right knob to select the data field to be changed 3 Turn the small right knob to display a list of data options Figure 1 19 Figure 1 19 Select Field Type Window 4 Press the ENT Key to select the desired data item and return to the Default NAV Page GNS 430 A Pilot s Guide and Reference 190 00140 00 Rev P 1 13 SECTION 1 INTRODUCTION NAV COM Page From the Default NAV Page turn the small right knob until the NAV COM Page Figure 1 20 is displayed Frequency Type Departure Enroute or Arrival Airport Frequency List Figure 1 20 NAV COM Page The NAV COM Page displays the available frequencies communications and navigation for the departure airport any enroute airports which are included in the flight plan and the final destination airport When using the direct to function frequencies are listed for the airport nearest to the starting position and the destination airport To display the frequency list for t
306. to Active FPL option Figure 7 26 Figure 7 26 Airport Arrival Page Menu 4 The Active Flight Plan Page appears Press the FPL Key to return to the Airport Arrival Page GNS 430 A Pilot s Guide and Reference 190 00140 00 Rev P 7 13 SECTION 7 WPT PAGES 7 7 AIRPORT DEPARTURE PAGE The Airport Departure Page Figure 7 27 shows the available Airport Standard Instrument Departure SID procedures for the selected airport Where multiple runways or transitions are associated with the departure procedure that information may also be displayed A map image provides a layout diagram for each departure runway and transition Figure 7 27 Airport Departure Page Airport Identifier Symbol and Type Map Image Departure Procedure Name Transitions Runways associated with Departure Position of Current Page within Current Page Group Number of Pages in Current Page Group Current Page Group To scroll through the available departures 1 Press the small right knob to activate the cursor 2 Turn the large right knob to place the cursor on the departure DEP procedure name field Figure 7 27 3 Turn the small right knob to display a window of available departures for the selected airport Figure 7 28 Continue turning the small right knob to select the desired departure Figure 7 28 Departure Window 4 Press the ENT Key The cursor moves to the runway field 5 Turn the small right kno
307. to the vertical flight path consistent with air traffic requirements are not considered evasive maneuvers TIS Limitations NOTE This section on TIS Limitations is not comprehensive Garmin recommends the user review the TIS Limitations section of the Aeronautical Information Manual Section 1 3 5 TIS is not intended to be used as a collision avoidance system and does not relieve the pilot responsibility to see and avoid other aircraft TIS should not be used for avoidance maneuvers during IMC or other times when there is no visual contact with the intruder aircraft TIS is intended only to assist in visual acquisition of other aircraft in VMC No recommended avoidance maneuvers are provided for nor authorized as a direct result of a TIS intruder display or TIS advisory NOTE The main difference between TIS and TCAS is the source of surveillance data TCAS uses an airborne interrogator with a half second update rate while TIS uses the terminal Mode S ground interrogator and its Data Link to provide about a 5 second update rate The range accuracy of TIS and TCAS is similar While TIS is a useful aid to visual traffic avoidance it has some system limitations that must be fully understood to ensure proper use Many of these limitations are inherent in secondary radar surveillance In other words the information provided by TIS is no better than that provided to ATC TIS only displays aircraft with operating transponders instal
308. ts the messages that may be shown in the Sat ID field Table 12 11 lists the messages that may be shown in the Sat Connectivity field SAT ID FIELD MESSAGE DESCRIPTION GDL 69 69A GNS 430 interface communications not yet established 0 1 2 or 3 Satellite radio service is not activated Satellite signal quality is indicated by the numbers 0 1 2 or 3 where 0 none 1 poor 2 good and 3 excellent XM GDL 69 69A not yet communicating with internal satellite radio hardware normal during power up X0 X1 X2 or X3 X Satellite radio service activated Satellite signal quality is indicated by the numbers 0 1 2 or 3 where 0 none 1 poor 2 good and 3 excellent Table 12 10 Sat ID Field CONNECTIVITY FIELD MESSAGE DESCRIPTION Satellite in view Indicates a signal quality between 1 and 3 Searching No satellite is currently in view signal quality is 0 Table 12 11 Connectivity Field SATCOM Operation This field always indicates Idle for the GDL 69 69A SATCOM SER NUM The first eight characters of this field indicate the satellite radio ID number A dash separates the satellite radio ID from the currently installed METAR database version in the GDL 69 69A GDL SW This field shows the currently installed software version for the GDL 69 69A GNS 430 A Pilot
309. ty Level Intruder Altitude Available TA Alerting Conditions A Yes Intruder closing rate provides less than 20 seconds of vertical and horizontal separation Or Intruder range is within 0 2 nm and vertical separation is within 600 feet A No Intruder closing rate is less than 15 seconds B Yes Intruder closing rate provides less than 30 seconds of vertical and horizontal separation Or Intruder range is within 0 55 nm and vertical separation is within 800 feet B No Intruder closing rate is less than 20 seconds Table 12 5 TA Sensitivity Level and TA Alerting Criteria In all other conditions Level B greater sensitivity TA sensitivity is used to assess TA threats Traffic Symbology Traffic information from the GTS 8XX is displayed on the GNS 430 unit using TAS TCAS symbology Table 12 4 on a dedicated Traffic page and on the moving Map Page The displayed traffic information generally includes the relative range bearing and altitude of intruder aircraft The GTS 8XX also generates aural announcements heard on the cockpit audio system Target altitude relative to own aircraft altitude relative altitude is displayed in hundreds of feet for each target symbol Figure 12 20 If traffic is above own aircraft altitude the relative altitude is shown above the target next to a symbol If traffic is below own aircraft altitude the relative altitude is shown below the target next to a symbol Altit
310. u option is selected the corresponding page appears providing access to the various unit settings To select a menu option from the Setup 2 Page Figure 10 70 Setup 2 Page Current Page Group Menu Options to Select Highlight with Cursor and Press the ENT Key Position of Current Page within Current Page Group Number of Pages in Current Page Group 1 Press the small right knob momentarily to activate the flashing cursor Figure 10 70 GNS 430 A Pilot s Guide and Reference 190 00140 00 Rev P 10 28 SECTION 10 AUX PAGES 2 Turn the large right knob to select the desired menu option Figure 10 71 and press the ENT Key Figure 10 72 Figure 10 71 Nearest Airport Criteria Highlighted Figure 10 72 Nearest Airport Criteria Page The following menu options are available Display Allows the pilot to adjust the display for optimum viewing in any condition Automatic backlighting is available which uses a built in photocell at the top left corner of the display bezel to make the proper display adjustments without any user intervention Automatic contrast adjustment varies the screen contrast level based upon current unit temperature The pilot may also select manual control of the display contrast and backlighting of the GNS 430 s display Nearest Airport Criteria Defines the minimum runway length and surface type used when determining the nine nearest airports to display on
311. uce errors in the GNS 430 display These errors primarily affect relative bearing information and traffic target track vector it lags intruder distance and altitude remain relatively accurate and may be used to assist see and avoid Some of the more common examples of these errors follow When client or intruder aircraft maneuver excessively or abruptly the tracking algorithm may report incorrect horizontal position until the maneuvering aircraft stabilizes When a rapidly closing intruder is on a course that crosses the client aircraft course at a shallow angle either overtaking or head on and either aircraft abruptly changes course within 0 25 nm TIS may display the intruder on the wrong side of the client The preceding errors are relatively rare occurrences and are corrected within a few radar scans once the course has stabilized Users of TIS can render valuable assistance in the correction of malfunctions by reporting their observations of undesirable performance Reporters should identify Time of observation Location type and identity of aircraft Condition observed Type of transponder processor and software in use Since TIS performance is monitored by maintenance personnel rather than ATC it is suggested that malfunctions be reported in the following ways By telephone to the nearest Flight Service Station FSS facility By FAA Form 8000 7 Safety
312. ude trend Figure 12 20 is displayed as an up arrow 500 fpm down arrow 500 fpm or no symbol if less than 500 fpm rate in either direction Figure 12 20 Traffic Symbol Components Relative Altitude Altitude Trend Traffic Type GNS 430 A Pilot s Guide and Reference 190 00140 00 Rev P 12 13 SECTION 12 ADDITIONAL FEATURES Aural Alerts A TA consists of a displayed traffic symbol solid yellow circle and an aural alert The aural alert announces traffic followed by the intruder aircraft s position altitude relative to own aircraft high low or same altitude and distance from own aircraft e g traffic 12 o clock high 3 miles Self Test The GTS 8XX automatically performs a self test upon power up The self test checks internal parameters and calibrates components of the GTS 8XX The self test can also be initiated by the user during normal operation Check for the following test criteria on the Traffic Page during power up If the GTS 8XX passes the power up test and the aircraft both has a squat switch and is on the ground the Standby Screen is displayed Figure 12 21 If the GTS 8XX passes the power up test and the aircraft both has a squat switch and is airborne the Traffic Page is displayed on the 6 nm display range and in the normal altitude display mode If the GTS 8XX passes the power up test and the aircraft does not
313. uence as outlined beginning on the following page Figure 6 19 SUSP Annunciation Flying the Missed Approach After passing the MAP if the runway is not in sight the pilot must execute a missed approach The GNS 430 continues to give guidance along an extension of the final course segment FAF to MAP until the pilot manually initiates the missed approach procedure as mentioned previously in reference to the SUSP advisory Figure 6 20 Sequence to MAP DO NOT USE FOR NAVIGATION The OBS Key is used to initiate the missed approach as follows refer to Figure 6 20 for the following steps GNS 430 A Pilot s Guide and Reference 190 00140 00 Rev P SECTION 6 PROCEDURES 6 9 1 Press the OBS Key The missed approach holding point MAHP in this case SWARM intersection is automatically offered as the destination waypoint Figure 6 21 Figure 6 21 Missed Approach Holding Point NOTE In some cases an additional hold waypoint is added to the missed approach sequence This additional waypoint is used as an aid in establishing the holding pattern especially where the MAP and MAHP are the same waypoint 2 Follow the missed approach procedures as published on the approach plate for proper climb and heading instructions The GNS 430 guides the pilot to the holding pattern along the 053 radial from LYH VOR 3 An alert message in the lower right hand corner of
314. ulls Copse Road Hounsdown Business Park Southampton SO40 9RB U K p 44 0 870 8501241 f 44 0 870 8501251 Garmin Asia Corp No 68 Jangshu 2nd Road Shijr Taipei County Taiwan p 886 2 2642 9199 f 886 2 2642 9099 Website Address www garmin com Visit the Garmin website for the latest updates and supplemental information concerning the operation of this and other Garmin products Except as expressly provided herein no part of this manual may be reproduced copied transmitted disseminated downloaded or stored in any storage medium for any purpose without the express written permission of Garmin Garmin hereby grants permission to download a single copy of this manual and of any revision to this manual onto a hard drive or other electronic storage medium to be viewed for personal use provided that such electronic or printed copy of this manual or revision must contain the complete text of this copyright notice and provided further that any unauthorized commercial distribution of this manual or any revision hereto is strictly prohibited Garmin and AutoLocate are registered trademarks of Garmin Ltd or its subsidiaries and may not be used without the express permission of Garmin GNS GDL GTX PhaseTrac12 and Spell N Find are trademarks of Garmin Ltd or its subsidiaries and may not be used without the express permission of Garmin NavData is a registered trademark of Jeppesen Inc December
315. until the direct to is replaced with a new direct to or flight plan cancelled or the unit is turned off To cancel a direct to 1 Press the Direct to Key to display the Select Direct to Waypoint Page 2 Press the MENU Key to display the Direct to Page Menu Figure 4 12 Figure 4 12 Select Direct to Page Menu 3 With Cancel Direct to NAV highlighted press the ENT Key If a flight plan is still active the GNS 430 resumes navigating the flight plan along the closest leg GNS 430 A Pilot s Guide and Reference 190 00140 00 Rev P 4 6 SECTION 4 DIRECT TO NAVIGATION Specifying a Course to a Waypoint When performing a direct to the GNS 430 sets a direct great circle course to the selected destination The course to the destination can also be manually defined using the CRS course field on the Select Direct to Waypoint Page To manually define the direct to course 1 Press the Direct to Key 2 Use the small and large right knobs to select the destination waypoint 3 Press the ENT Key to confirm the selected waypoint then turn the large right knob to highlight the course CRS field Figure 4 13 Figure 4 13 CRS Course Field Highlighted 4 Turn the small and large right knobs to select the desired course Figure 4 14 and press the ENT Key Figure 4 14 Course Field Selected 5 Press the ENT Key again to begin navigation using the selected destination and course 6
316. urse selector cannot be read properly A Garmin dealer may need to check the installation Inside airspace A GPS calculated position lies within the boundaries of a special use airspace This message is automatically disabled within 30 nm of an arrival airport when an approach is loaded Invalid closest pt of FPL A closest point cannot be created from the waypoint entered on the Closest point of flight plan window This occurs when the selected waypoint is beyond the limits of all legs in the flight plan too far away or when a unique waypoint name for the closest point cannot be created Invalid FPL modification An attempt was made to modify the final course segment FAF to MAP of an instrument approach The GNS 430 does not allow the modifications Invalid waypoint ident An attempt was made to create a user waypoint with an invalid name The GNS 430 does not allow spaces between characters in the waypoint name MAIN processor requires service The GNS 430 has detected a failure in the main system processor The GNS 430 is not usable and should be taken to a Garmin dealer for service Memory battery low The internal battery that sustains user memory is low and should be replaced by a Garmin dealer as soon as possible Failure to do so may result in loss of stored data including flight plans user waypoints unit settings and satellite data Near airspace less than 2 nm The GPS calculated position is within 2 nm
317. ursor highlights the method field Turn the small right knob to select Auto or Manual Figure 10 23 Auto automatically transfers any selection of or any change to a direct to destination or active flight plan to a second 400 500 series Garmin unit Figure 10 23 Crossfill Method Window NOTE Crossfill requires both 400 and or 500 Series units to have the same Jeppesen NavData database cycle number 3 The flashing cursor highlights the transfer data option TRANSFER field Figure 10 24 Turn the small right knob to display a window of available data options Figure 10 25 Figure 10 24 Transfer Field Highlighted Figure 10 25 Transfer Window GNS 430 A Pilot s Guide and Reference 190 00140 00 Rev P 10 10 SECTION 10 AUX PAGES Active Flight Plan Transfer the active flight plan to from a second 400 500 series Garmin unit in a dual unit installation This option is the default when selecting Crossfill from the Active Flight Plan Page Flight Plan Transfer any stored flight plan to from a second 400 500 series unit by selecting the flight plan by number This option is the default when selecting Crossfill from the Flight Plan Catalog Page See also Section 5 1 Flight Plan Catalog Page Options User Waypoints all Transfer all stored user waypoints to from a second 400 500 series unit User Waypoint Transfer the specified user waypoint to a second 400 50
318. vailable flight time Figure 10 12 REQ Highlighted 10 To re configure the data fields press the MENU Key to display the options window Figure 10 13 Turn the small right knob to highlight the change fields option Press the ENT Key to re configure the data fields Turn the large right knob to select the desired field Turn the small right knob to highlight the desired data Press the ENT Key to select the data configuration Figure 10 13 Select Field Type Window GNS 430 A Pilot s Guide and Reference 190 00140 00 Rev P 10 6 SECTION 10 AUX PAGES Fuel planning figures can be entered and displayed based upon one of three possible configurations No fuel sensors connected In this instance fuel flow is manually entered and is used to calculate fuel on board When fuel flow or fuel on board is manually entered the figures are retained the next time the page is displayed with fuel on board continuously recalculated Fuel flow sensor installed but no fuel on board sensor Fuel on board is manually entered Fuel flow is automatically provided by sensor If fuel flow is manually entered to override the sensor it does not affect the FOB figure and is not retained the next time the page is displayed Fuel flow and fuel on board sensors installed Fuel flow and fuel on board are automatically provided by sensors Fuel on board can NOT be entered manually Fuel flow can be entered manually
319. vate highlighted press the ENT Key GNS 430 A Pilot s Guide and Reference 190 00140 00 Rev P 5 11 SECTION 5 FLIGHT PLANS To select an approach for a direct to or flight plan destination airport 1 Choose the Select Approach option from the Active Flight Plan Page Menu Figure 5 24 and press the ENT Key Figure 5 24 Active Flight Plan Page Menu 2 A window appears listing the available approaches Figure 5 25 for the destination airport Turn the small right knob to highlight the desired approach and press the ENT Key Figure 5 25 Approach Window 3 A second window appears listing available transitions Figure 5 26 for the approach Turn the small right knob to highlight the desired transition waypoint and press the ENT Key The Vectors option assumes the pilot will receive vectors to the final course segment of the approach and will provide navigation guidance to intercept this final course Figure 5 26 Transitions Window 4 Turn the large right knob to highlight Load or Activate and press the ENT Key Load adds the approach to the flight plan without immediately using the approach for navigation guidance This allows the pilot to continue navigating the original flight plan until cleared for the approach but keeps the approach available for quick activation when needed 5 For precision approaches a reminder window appears indicating that GPS guidance on such appr
320. ves the CDI output on VLOC and the pilot is using an external CDI not an HSI expect reverse sensing on the backcourse of the ILS 6 4 POINTS TO REMEMBER FOR ALL APPROACHES The GNS 430 is designed to complement printed approach plates and vastly improve situational awareness throughout the approach However the pilot must always fly an approach as it appears on the approach plate The active leg or the portion of the approach currently in use is depicted in magenta on the Map Page When flying the approach the GNS 430 automatically sequences through each leg of the approach unless SUSP appears above the OBS Key SUSP indicates that automatic sequencing of approach waypoints is suspended on the current leg and normally appears at holding patterns and upon crossing the missed approach point MAP GNS 430 A Pilot s Guide and Reference 190 00140 00 Rev P SECTION 6 PROCEDURES 6 33 Points to Remember for Localizer based Approaches The default factory setting allows the CDI output to automatically switch from the GPS receiver to the VLOC receiver If the ILS CDI Capture setting is changed to Manual the pilot must determine when to select GPS or VLOC guidance during the approach Remember VLOC is required for the final course segment from final approach fix FAF to MAP If the CDI output has not automatically switched from GPS to ILS by 2 0 nm prior to the FA
321. visory TA Other Traffic Symbol The hollow white may be confiugred as cyan diamond represents traffic detected within the selected display range that does not meet the criteria for a TA or a PA and does not pose an immediate collision threat Table 12 4 TAS TCAS Symbology System Description The GNS 430 provides an optional display interface for the GTS 8XX Traffic Advisory TAS and Traffic Collision Avoidance TCAS I Systems The GTS 800 and GTS 820 are TAS systems the GTS 850 is a TSO Certified TCAS I system The GTS 8XX uses active interrogations of Mode A C S GTS 820 and GTS 850 only and Mode A C transponders to provide Traffic Advisories to the GNS 430 The GTS 8XX is an active traffic advisory system that operates as an aircraft to aircraft interrogation device The GTS 8XX monitors the airspace surrounding an aircraft and advises the flight crew where to look for transponder equipped aircraft that may pose a collision threat When the GTS 8XX receives replies to its interrogations it computes the responding aircraft s range bearing relative altitude and closure rate The GTS 8XX then determines the advisory status of the target and sends the location information and alert status to the GNS 430 for display The GTS 800 is capable of tracking up to 45 Mode A C S intruders The GTS 820 850 is capable of tracking up to 45 Mode A C plus 30 Mode S intruders Up to 30 of the most threatening targets are displayed
322. wind speed barbs In Figure 12 49 there are two long barbs 10 knots each and one short barb 5 knots each Thus the total wind speed is 25 knots Adding the gust offset to this figure gives winds gusting to 36 knots Thus the symbol in Figure 12 49 indicates the surface wind at KFRM is coming from a direction of 300 at a speed of 25 knots gusting to 36 knots or greater The data age is 11 20 minutes old Gust Offset Wind Speed Wind Vector Data Age Figure 12 49 Wind Symbol Temperature Dewpoints The Temperature Dewpoint Range symbols Table 12 18 display the difference between the reported temperature and dewpoint Differences are shown in degrees Fahrenheit Temp Dewpoint Display Ranges Blank Unknown 11 Green 7 10 Green 0 6 Yellow Table 12 18 Temp Dewpoint Ranges This symbol in Figure 12 50 displays the difference between the reported temperature and dewpoint as 7 10 degrees Fahrenheit at KSPW Figure 12 50 Temp Dewpoint Symbol Temperature Dewpoint GNS 430 A Pilot s Guide and Reference 190 00140 00 Rev P SECTION 13 FAULT DETECTION AND EXCLUSION 13 1 SECTION 13 FAULT DETECTION AND EXCLUSION Fault Detection and Exclusion FDE is incorporated in the Garmin GNS 430 main and GPS software version 3 00 and higher FDE algorithms provide a basis for approval per the requirements for GPS as a Primary Means of Navigation for Oceanic Remote Operat
323. with a message when a user defined distance to the final destination the direct to waypoint or the last waypoint in a flight plan has been reached Once the aircraft has reached the set distance up to 99 9 units an Arrival at waypoint message is displayed Units Mag Var Allows the pilot to configure the displayed data to standard or metric units of measure This setting applies to distance speed altitude fuel pressure and temperature Also provides three magnetic variation heading options True Auto or User defined If Auto is selected all track course and heading information is corrected to the magnetic variation computed by the GPS receiver The True setting references all information to true north and the User setting corrects information to an user entered value GNS 430 A Pilot s Guide and Reference 190 00140 00 Rev P 10 22 SECTION 10 AUX PAGES Position Map Datum Configures position readout information to the desired position format The GNS 430 uses the map datum WGS 84 Note that using a map datum that does not match the charts used by the pilot can result in significant differences in position information If the pilot is using the paper charts for reference only the GNS 430 still provides correct navigation guidance to the waypoints contained in the database regardless of the datum differences Date Time Provides settings for time format
324. y Figure 3 45 Mode Window 8 Press the small right knob momentarily to remove the cursor from the page Restoring Factory Settings A Restore Defaults option allows all data fields to be reset to their original factory default settings This returns the three user selectable fields at the top of the page AND the reference waypoint fields to default settings To restore the factory default settings 1 Press the MENU Key to display the Position Page Menu Figure 3 46 Figure 3 46 Position Page Menu 2 Turn the large right knob to highlight Restore Defaults and press the ENT Key GNS 430 A Pilot s Guide and Reference 190 00140 00 Rev P SECTION 3 NAV PAGES 3 22 3 8 SATELLITE STATUS PAGE The Satellite Status Page provides a visual reference of GPS receiver functions including current satellite coverage GPS receiver status and position accuracy The Satellite Status Page Figure 3 47 is helpful in troubleshooting weak or missing signal levels due to poor satellite coverage or installation problems Figure 3 47 Satellite Status Page 5 6 7 1 4 2 3 9 8 10 Sky View 1 Estimated Position Error EPE and Dilution of Precision DOP GPS Receiver Status 3 Horizontal Uncertainty Level HUL 4 Satellite ID Numbers 5 Signal Strength Bars 6 Excluded Satellite 7 Current Page Group 8 2 Number of Pages in Current Page Group 9 Position of Current Page wit
325. y when finished To determine RAIM availability for the present position press the CLR Key followed by the ENT Key Figure 10 43 RAIM Prediction Page GNS 430 A Pilot s Guide and Reference 190 00140 00 Rev P 10 18 SECTION 10 AUX PAGES 3 The flashing cursor moves to the arrival date field Use the small and large right knobs to enter the date for which the pilot wants to determine RAIM availability Press the ENT Key when finished 4 The flashing cursor moves to the arrival time field Use the small and large right knobs to enter the time for which the pilot wants to determine RAIM availability Press the ENT Key when finished 5 The flashing cursor moves to Compute RAIM Figure 10 44 Press the ENT Key to begin RAIM prediction Once calculations are complete the GNS 430 displays one of the following in the RAIM status field Figure 10 44 Compute RAIM Highlighted RAIM Not Available Satellite coverage is predicted to NOT be sufficient for reliable operation during non precision approaches RAIM Available Satellite coverage is predicted to be sufficient for reliable operation during all flight phases including non precision approaches NOTE RAIM computations predict satellite coverage within 15 minutes of the specified arrival date and time Refer to Section 10 4 for specific information regarding RAIM protection limits also refer to Section 13 for FDE Fault Detection and Ex

Garmin GNS 430(A) GPS Receiver User Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents